Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices OI 12 en

Operating Instruction Manual
Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices

netTAP, netBRICK and netLINK
V1.1100
Hilscher Gesellschaft für Systemautomation mbH

www.hilscher.com
DOC081201OI12EN | Revision 12 | English | 2020-05 | Released | Public
Introduction 2/355
Table of Contents
1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................... 8
1.1 About this Manual .................................................................................................... 8
1.1.1 Online Help ........................................................................................................... 9
1.1.2 List of Revisions ................................................................................................... 9
1.2 About netGateway DTM ......................................................................................... 10
1.2.1 Requirements ..................................................................................................... 10
1.3 Dialog Structure of the netGateway DTM ............................................................... 11
1.3.1 General Device Information ................................................................................ 12
1.3.2 Navigation Area .................................................................................................. 12
1.3.3 Dialog Panes ...................................................................................................... 13
1.3.4 OK, Cancel, Apply and Help ............................................................................... 14
1.3.5 Table Lines ......................................................................................................... 14
1.3.6 Status Bar ........................................................................................................... 15
2 SAFETY .................................................................................................................... 16
2.1 General Note .......................................................................................................... 16
2.2 Intended Use .......................................................................................................... 16
2.3 Personnel Qualification .......................................................................................... 16
2.4 Safety Instructions.................................................................................................. 16
2.4.1 Communication Stop during Firmware or Configuration Download ...................17
2.4.2 Mismatching System Configuration .................................................................... 17
2.5 Property Damage ................................................................................................... 18
2.5.1 Power Disconnect while dowloading Firmware or Configuration .......................18
2.5.2 Invalid Firmware ................................................................................................. 18
2.6 Safety Messages on Firmware or Configuration Download .................................... 19
3 CONFIGURATION SEQUENCE FOR GATEWAY AND PROXY .............................. 20

3.1 Gateway and Proxy Device .................................................................................... 20
3.2 Configuration of a NT 50 as a Gateway .................................................................. 21
3.2.1 Requirement for the Configuration ..................................................................... 21
3.2.2 Start SYCON.net and User Login ....................................................................... 21
3.2.3 Insert the Gateway Device into the Configuration Window ................................22
3.2.4 Select the Protocol Conversion of the Gateway .................................................23
3.2.5 Configuration of the secondary Network ............................................................ 27
3.2.6 Configuration of the primary Network ................................................................. 28
3.2.7 Configure the Gateway – Signal Mapping ..........................................................29
3.2.8 Establish a Connection to the netTAP NT 50 .....................................................32
3.2.9 Device Assignment ............................................................................................. 35
3.2.10 Load Firmware .................................................................................................... 36
3.2.11 Load Configuration ............................................................................................. 37
3.2.12 Save Project ....................................................................................................... 38
3.3 Configuration of a NT 100 or NB 100 as a Gateway ............................................... 39
Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices | netTAP, netBRICK and netLINK
DOC081201OI12EN | Revision 12 | English | 2020-05 | Released | Public © Hilscher, 2009-2020
Introduction 3/355
3.3.6 Configure the Gateway – Signal Mapping ..........................................................48
3.3.7 Establish a Connection to the Gateway Device .................................................51
3.3.9 Load Firmware .................................................................................................... 54
3.3.11 Save Project ....................................................................................................... 55
3.3.12 Device Description File to configure the Master .................................................56
3.4 Configuration of a NT 100 as Proxy........................................................................ 57
3.4.2 Insert the Proxy Device into the Configuration Window .....................................58
3.4.3 Select the Protocol Conversion of the Proxy ......................................................59
3.4.6 Establish a Connection to the Proxy Device ......................................................67
3.4.8 Load Firmware .................................................................................................... 70
3.4.10 Save Project ....................................................................................................... 71
3.4.11 Device Description File to configure the PROFINET IO Controller ....................72
3.5 Configuration of the NT 151-RE-RE (netTAP Real-Time Ethernet Gateway) .......... 73
3.5.6 Signal Mapping ................................................................................................... 88
3.5.7 Establish Connection to Gateway Device and Select Driver..............................93
3.5.9 Loading or Updating Firmware (Firmware Download) .......................................97
3.5.11 Save Project ..................................................................................................... 100
3.5.12 Device Description File to configure the Master ...............................................100
3.6 Configuration of the NT 151-CCIES-RE ............................................................... 101
3.6.1 Start SYCON.net and User Login ..................................................................... 101
3.6.2 Insert the Gateway Device into the Configuration Window ..............................102
3.6.3 Define Variables for Cyclic Data ....................................................................... 103
3.6.4 Configuring Acyclic Communication ................................................................. 106
3.6.5 Configuration of the CC-Link IE Field Slave .....................................................108
3.6.6 Configuration of the PROFINET Device ...........................................................110
3.6.7 Establish Connection to Gateway Device and Select Driver............................113
3.6.8 Device Assignment ........................................................................................... 115
3.6.9 Updating Firmware (Firmware Download)........................................................117
3.6.10 Load Configuration ........................................................................................... 119
3.6.11 Save Project ..................................................................................................... 120
3.6.12 Export Device Description Files ....................................................................... 121
3.7 Configuration of a NL 51N-DPL as Proxy ............................................................. 122
3.7.1 Requirement for the Configuration ................................................................... 122
3.7.2 Start SYCON.net and User Login ..................................................................... 122

Introduction 4/355
3.7.3 Insert the Proxy Device into the Configuration Window ...................................123
3.7.4 Configuration of the secondary Network ..........................................................124
3.7.5 Configuration of the primary Network ............................................................... 127
3.7.6 Establish a Connection to the netLINK NL 51N-DPL .......................................129
3.7.7 Device Assignment ........................................................................................... 132
3.7.8 Load Configuration ........................................................................................... 133
3.7.9 Save Project ..................................................................................................... 134
3.7.10 Device Description File to configure the PROFINET IO Controller ..................135
3.7.11 Update Firmware .............................................................................................. 136
4 SETTINGS .............................................................................................................. 137

4.1 Overview Settings ................................................................................................ 137
4.2 Driver ................................................................................................................... 138
4.2.1 Selecting the Driver .......................................................................................... 138
4.2.2 Configuring the Driver....................................................................................... 139
4.2.3 netX Driver ........................................................................................................ 140
4.2.4 Configure netX Driver ....................................................................................... 146
4.3 Device Assignment .............................................................................................. 147
4.3.1 Scanning for Devices........................................................................................ 147
4.3.2 Selecting the Device ......................................................................................... 149
5 CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 150

5.1 Overview Configuration ........................................................................................ 150
5.2 Settings ................................................................................................................ 151
5.3 Licenses ............................................................................................................... 153
5.3.1 Open License Dialog ........................................................................................ 153
5.3.2 License Dialog .................................................................................................. 154
5.3.3 Which Licenses are present in the Device? .....................................................155
5.3.4 How to order a License..................................................................................... 157
5.3.5 Selecting License(s) ......................................................................................... 157
5.3.6 Ordering Data ................................................................................................... 158
5.3.7 Ordering the License ........................................................................................ 160
5.3.8 How to get the License and transfer it to the Device ........................................165
5.4 Signal Mapping .................................................................................................... 166
5.4.1 Status Information ............................................................................................ 169
5.5 Memory Card Management .................................................................................. 173
5.6 Configuration EtherCAT Master ........................................................................... 174
5.7 Configuration EtherCAT Slave ............................................................................. 175
5.7.1 EtherCAT Slave Parameter ..............................................................................176
5.7.2 Settings at the used EtherCAT Master ............................................................. 177
5.8 Configuration EtherNet/IP Scanner ...................................................................... 178
5.9 Configuration EtherNet/IP Adapter ....................................................................... 179
5.9.1 EtherNet/IP Adapter Parameter ....................................................................... 181
5.9.2 Settings at the used EtherNet/IP Scanner........................................................183
5.10 Configuration Open Modbus/TCP ........................................................................ 185
5.10.1 Open Modbus/TCP Parameter ......................................................................... 187
5.10.2 Open Modbus/TCP Client ................................................................................ 189
5.10.3 Open Modbus/TCP Server ............................................................................... 195
5.10.4 Modbus References ......................................................................................... 198

Introduction 5/355
5.11 Configuration POWERLINK Controlled Node ....................................................... 199
5.11.1 POWERLINK Controlled Node Parameter .......................................................201
5.11.2 Settings at the used POWERLINK Managing Node ........................................203
5.12 Configuration PROFINET IO Controller ................................................................ 204
5.13 Configuration PROFINET IO Device (Gateway) ................................................... 205
5.13.1 PROFINET IO Device Parameter..................................................................... 207
5.13.2 Settings at the used PROFINET IO Controller (Gateway) ...............................208
5.14 Configuration PROFINET IO Device (Proxy) ........................................................ 210
5.14.1 Settings at the used PROFINET IO Controller (Proxy) ....................................211
5.15 Configuration Sercos Slave .................................................................................. 212
5.15.1 Sercos Slave Parameter................................................................................... 214
5.15.2 Settings at the used Sercos Master ................................................................. 218
5.16 Configuration CANopen Master ............................................................................ 219
5.17 Configuration CANopen Slave .............................................................................. 220
5.17.1 CANopen Slave Parameter .............................................................................. 222
5.17.2 Settings at the used CANopen Master ............................................................. 224
5.18 Configuration CC-Link Slave ................................................................................ 225
5.18.1 CC-Link Slave Parameter ................................................................................. 227
5.18.2 Settings at the used CC-Link Master................................................................ 229
5.19 Configuration CC-Link IE Field Slave ................................................................... 230
5.19.1 CC-Link IE Field Slave Parameter ................................................................... 231
5.20 Configuration DeviceNet Master ........................................................................... 232
5.21 Configuration DeviceNet Slave ............................................................................. 233
5.21.1 DeviceNet Slave Parameter ............................................................................. 235
5.21.2 Settings at the used DeviceNet Master ............................................................ 237
5.22 Configuration PROFIBUS DP Master ................................................................... 238
5.23 Configuration PROFIBUS DP Slave ..................................................................... 239
5.23.1 PROFIBUS DP Slave Parameter ..................................................................... 241
5.23.2 Settings at the used PROFIBUS DP Master ....................................................244
5.24 Configuration Modbus RTU Master/Slave ............................................................ 245
5.24.1 Modbus RTU Parameter................................................................................... 247
5.24.2 Modbus RTU Master ........................................................................................ 249
5.24.3 Modbus RTU Slave .......................................................................................... 256
5.24.4 Modbus References ......................................................................................... 259
5.25 Configuration 3964R ............................................................................................ 260
5.25.1 3964R Settings ................................................................................................. 261
5.25.2 Settings for the 3964R Remote Device ............................................................ 263
5.26 Configuration ASCII ............................................................................................. 264
5.26.1 ASCII Settings .................................................................................................. 266
5.26.2 ASCII Parameters............................................................................................. 266
5.26.3 Settings for the remote ASCII Device ............................................................... 280
5.27 Configuration ‘Serial with netSCRIPT’ .................................................................. 281
5.27.1 netSCRIPT Settings ......................................................................................... 282
5.27.2 Settings for the netSCRIPT Remote Device ....................................................282
5.28 Signal Configuration ............................................................................................. 283
6 DIAGNOSIS ............................................................................................................ 284

6.1 Overview Diagnosis ............................................................................................. 284

Introduction 6/355
6.2 General Diagnosis................................................................................................ 285
6.3 Firmware Diagnosis ............................................................................................. 287
7 ONLINE FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................. 288

7.1 Connecting/Disconnecting Device ........................................................................ 288
7.2 Download Configuration ....................................................................................... 289
8 ACYCLIC COMMUNICATION OF PROXY DEVICES ............................................. 290

8.1 Overview .............................................................................................................. 290
8.2 Adress Mapping ................................................................................................... 290
8.3 Read/Write – Controlled by the PROFINET IO Controller..................................... 291
8.4 Alarms – Controlled by the PROFIBUS DP Slave ................................................ 293
9 ACYCLIC COMMUNICATION OF GATEWAY DEVICES ....................................... 294

9.1 Overview .............................................................................................................. 294
9.2 Request States..................................................................................................... 296
9.3 Sequence of a Reading Task ............................................................................... 297
9.4 Sequence of a Writing Task ................................................................................. 299
9.5 Gateway with Protocol Conversion PROFINET IO-Device to EtherNet/IP Scanner
............................................................................................................................. 301
9.5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 301
9.5.2 Reading Data from an EtherNet/IP Adapter .....................................................303
9.5.3 Writing Data into an EtherNet/IP Adapter.........................................................309
9.5.4 PNIO Error Codes for WRREC and RDREC....................................................314
10 ACYCLIC COMMUNICATION OF NT 151-CCIES-RE ............................................ 315

10.1 Overview .............................................................................................................. 315
10.2 Message Interface Buffer ..................................................................................... 316
10.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 316
10.2.2 Cyclic Status Reports of Message Interface Buffers ........................................317
10.2.3 Sequence of Acyclic Data Transfer from PROFINET to CC-Link IE Field .......318
10.2.4 Sequence of Acyclic Data Transfer from CC-Link IE Field to PROFINET .......320
10.3 User Defined Buffer .............................................................................................. 322
11 DIAGNOSIS AND STATUS MESSAGES OF NT 151-CCIES-RE ........................... 323

11.1 Overview .............................................................................................................. 323
11.2 Cyclic PROFINET Input Frame (Gateway to IO Controller) .................................. 323
11.3 CC-Link IE Field Master Input Frames (Gateway to Master)................................. 325
12 ERROR CODES ...................................................................................................... 327

12.1 Overview Error Codes .......................................................................................... 327
12.2 ODM Error Codes ................................................................................................ 327
12.2.1 General ODM Error Codes ............................................................................... 327
12.2.2 General ODM Driver Error Codes .................................................................... 328
12.2.3 cifX Driver Specific ODM Error Codes ............................................................. 329
12.3 ODM Error Codes DBM V4 .................................................................................. 332
13 APPENDIX .............................................................................................................. 337

13.1 User Rights .......................................................................................................... 337

Introduction 7/355
13.1.1 Settings ............................................................................................................. 337
13.1.2 Configuration .................................................................................................... 337
13.1 References........................................................................................................... 338
13.2 Conventions in this Manual .................................................................................. 338
13.3 Legal Notes .......................................................................................................... 339
13.4 Registered Trademarks ........................................................................................ 342
13.5 List of Figures ...................................................................................................... 343
13.6 List of Tables ........................................................................................................ 347
13.7 Glossary ............................................................................................................... 350
13.8 Contacts ............................................................................................................... 355

Introduction 8/355
1 Introduction
1.1 About this Manual
This manual provides information on how to set and configure the device
parameters of
• a netTAP device of the NT 50 device family
• a netTAP device of the NT 100 device family
• a netTAP device of the NT 151-RE-RE device family
• a netTAP device of the NT 151-CCIES-RE device family
• a netBRICK device of the NB 100 device family
• a netLINK proxy device
using the netGateway DTM, and what can be read from the diagnosis
panes.
Dialog Panes
The table below gives an overview for the individual dialog panes
descriptions:
Section Subsection Page

Settings Overview Settings 137
Driver 138
Device Assignment 147
Configuration Overview Configuration 150
Settings 151
Licenses 153
Signal Mapping 166
Memory Card Management 173
Diagnosis Overview Diagnosis 284
General Diagnosis 285
Firmware Diagnosis 287
Table 1: Descriptions Dialog Panes

Introduction 9/355
1.1.1 Online Help

The netGateway DTM contains an integrated online help facility.
 To open the online help, click on the Help button or press the F1 key.
1.1.2 List of Revisions

Index Date Version Chapter Revision
11 2018-08-07 1.1000 2 Chapter Safety added.
2.6 Section Safety Messages on Firmware or Configuration
Download added.
3.6 Section Configuration of the NT 151-CCIES-RE added.
5.19 Section Configuration CC-Link IE Field Slave added.
10 Chapter Acyclic Communication of NT 151-CCIES-RE
11 added.
Chapter Diagnosis and Status Messages of NT 151-
12 CCIES-RE added.
Chapter Error Codes revised.
12 2020-05-11 1.1100 1, 2, 13, Structure of the chapters Introduction, Safety and
4.2.3.2, Appendix revised.
5.7.1, 5.9.1, Section netX Driver - TCP/IP Connection updated.
5.10.1, 5.11.1, Sections EtherCAT Slave Parameter, EtherNet/IP
5.13.1, 5.15.1, Adapter Parameter, Open Modbus/TCP Parameter,
POWERLINK Controlled Node Parameter, PROFINET
IO Device Parameter, Sercos Slave Parameter:
Bus startup for NT151-RE-RE “Application controlled”.
5.17.1, Section CANopen Slave Parameter updated.
5.23.1 Section PROFIBUS DP Slave Parameter completed: use
of the Manual input field explained and list with identifier
bytes added.
Table 2: List of Revisions

Introduction 10/355
1.2 About netGateway DTM

You can use the netGateway DTM to configure
• a netTAP device of the NT 50 device family as a gateway,
• a netBRICK device of the NB 100 device family as a gateway,
• a netTAP device of the NT 100 device family as a proxy respectively
• a netLINK proxy device of the type NL 51N-DPL as a proxy
within a FDT Framework.
1.2.1 Requirements
System Requirements
• PC with 1 GHz processor or higher
• Windows® XP SP3,
Windows® Vista (32-Bit) SP2,
Windows® 7 (32-Bit and 64-Bit) SP1,
Windows® 8 (32-Bit and 64-Bit),
Windows® 8.1 (32-Bit and 64-Bit),
Windows® 10 (32-Bit and 64-Bit)
• Administrator privilege required for installation
• Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher
• RAM: min. 512 MByte, recommended 1024 MByte
• Graphic resolution: min. 1024 x 768 pixel
• Keyboard and Mouse
• Restriction: Touch screen is not supported.
Note: If the project file is used on a further PC,

 this PC must also comply with the above system requirements,
 the device description files of the devices used in the project must be
imported into the configuration software SYCON.net on the new PC,
 and the DTMs of the devices used in the project must also be installed
on that further PC.
Requirements netGateway DTM

To configure a netTAP NT 50 device, a netTAP NT 100 device, a netTAP
NT 151 device, a netBRICK NB 100 device or a netLINK proxy NL 51N-
DPL device with a DTM the following requirements have to be
accomplished:
• Completed hardware installation of a netTAP NT 50 device, a netTAP
NT 100 device, a netTAP NT 151 device, a netBRICK NB 100 device
respectively a netLINK proxy device, where at least a base firmware has
to be loaded in the device
• Installed FDT/DTM V 1.2 compliant frame application
• Loaded DTM in the Device Catalog of the FTD Framework

Introduction 11/355
For more information on the hardware installation, please refer to the

corresponding User Manual of your device.
1.3 Dialog Structure of the netGateway DTM

The graphical user interface of the DTM is composed of different areas and
elements listed hereafter:
1. A header area containing the General Device Information,
2. The Navigation Area (area on the left side),
3. The Dialog Pane (main area on the right side),
4. OK, Cancel, Apply, Help,
5. The Status Line containing information e. g. the online-state of the
DTM.
Figure 1: Dialog Structure of netGateway DTM

Introduction 12/355
1.3.1 General Device Information

Parameter Meaning
IO Device Name of the device
Vendor Vendor name of the device
Device ID Identification number of the device
Vendor ID Identification number of the vendor
Table 3: General Device Information
1.3.2 Navigation Area

The Navigation Area contains folders and subfolders to open the dialog
panes of the DTM.
Figure 2: Navigation Area
 Select the required folder and subfolder.

 The corresponding Dialog pane is displayed.
Hide / display Navigation

Hiding the navigation area (above right side).
Opening the navigation area (below left side).

Introduction 13/355
1.3.3 Dialog Panes

At the dialog pane the Settings, Configuration, Diagnosis/Extended
Diagnosis or the Additional Tools panes are opened via the
corresponding folder in the navigation area.
Settings
Driver On the pane Driver you can select a driver from the driver list. For further information, refer to
section Driver on page 138.
Device Assignment On the pane Device Assignment you must select the device and assign the device to the
driver. For further information, refer to section Device Assignment on page 147.
Configuration
Setting The Settings pane serves for selection of the protocols for the Gateway respectively the
Proxyfunctionality. For further information, refer to section Settings on page 151.
Licensing On the pane Licensing you can verify which licenses are available in the netTAP NT 100
device, order licenses and transfer license files into the netTAP NT 100 device. For further
information, refer to section Licenses on page 153.
Signal Mapping On the pane Signal Mapping you can map the signals (I/O Data) of port X2 to the signals (I/O
data) of port X3. For further information, refer to section Signal Mapping on page 166.
Memory Card On the pane Memory Card Management you can backup and restore the firmware and the
Management configuration to respectively from an MMC card. For further information, refer to section
Memory Card Management on page 173.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis At the Diagnosis panes diagnosis information can be read. For further information, refer to
section Overview Diagnosis on page 284.
Table 4: Overview Dialog Panes
Note: Accessing the Diagnosis panes of the netGateway DTM requires

an online connection from the netGateway DTM to the device.
For further information, refer to section Connecting/Disconnecting Device

on page 288.

Introduction 14/355
1.3.4 OK, Cancel, Apply and Help

OK, Cancel, Apply and Help you can use as described hereafter.
Meaning
OK To confirm your latest settings, click OK. All changed values will be applied on the frame application
database.
The dialog then closes.
Cancel To cancel your latest changes, click Cancel.
Answer to the safety query Configuration data has been changed. Do you want to save the data?
by Yes, No or Cancel.
Yes: The changes are saved or the changed values are applied on the frame application database.
No: The changes are not saved or the changed values are not applied on the frame application
database.
Cancel: Back to the DTM.
Apply To confirm your latest settings, click Apply. All changed values will be applied on the frame application
database.
The dialog remains opened.
Help To open the DTM online help, click Help.
Table 5: OK, Cancel, Apply and Help
1.3.5 Table Lines

In the DTM dialog pane table lines can be selected, inserted or deleted.
Meaning
To select the first line of a table use First Line.
To select the previous line of a table use Previous Line.
To select the next line of a table use Next Line.
To select the last line of a table use Last Line.
Create a new Line inserts new lines into the table.
Delete selected Line deletes the selected line from the table.
Table 6: Selecting, inserting, deleting Table Line

Introduction 15/355
1.3.6 Status Bar

The Status Bar displays information about the current state of the DTM.
The current activity, e.g. download, is signaled graphically via icons in the
status bar.
Figure 3: Status Bar – Status Fields 1 to 6
Status Icon / Meaning

Field
1 DTM Connection States
Connected: Icon closed = Device is online
Disconnected: Icon opened = Device is offline
2 Data Source States

Data set: The displayed data are read out from the instance data set
(database).
Device: The displayed data are read out from the device.
3 States of the instance Date Set

Valid Modified: Parameter is changed (not equal to data source).
4 Changes directly made on the Device

Load/configure diagnosis parameters: Diagnosis is activated.
6 Device Diagnosis Status

Save operation succeeded: The save operation has been successful.
Further messages due to successful handling of device data.
Firmware Download: Firmware Download is running
Save operation failed: The save operation has failed.
Further fail operation messages due to incorrect communication due to
malfunction in the field device or its peripherals.
Table 7: Status Bar Icons [1]
Offline State
Save operation
succeeded
Firmware Download
Firmware Download
successful
Online State and

Diagnosis
Figure 4: Status Bar Display Examples

Safety 16/355
2 Safety
2.1 General Note
The documentation in the form of a user manual, an operating instruction
manual or other manual types, as well as the accompanying texts have
been created for the use of the products by educated personnel. When
using the products, all Safety Messages, Integrated Safety Messages,
Property Damage Messages and all valid legal regulations must be obeyed.
Technical knowledge is presumed. The user has to assure that all legal
regulations are obeyed.
2.2 Intended Use

Refer to section section About netGateway DTM on page 10 .
2.3 Personnel Qualification

Personnel responsible for the application of the network system shall be
aware of the system behavior and shall be trained in using the system.
2.4 Safety Instructions

To ensure your own personal safety and to avoid personal injury, you
necessarily must read, understand, and comply with the safety instructions
and safety messages in this manual before you install and operate your
system.
For cases if both, personal injury as well as property damage (damage of
equipment or device) may occur together, you find the safety instructions in
this section.

Safety 17/355
2.4.1 Communication Stop during Firmware or Configuration

Download
If you want to perform either a firmware update (as a download) or a
configuration download, both via the netGateway DTM, be aware of the
following:
• Together with the firmware download, an automated reset to the device
is performed that will interrupt all network communication and all
established connections will drop.
• If you download the configuration during bus operation, the
communication between master and slaves is stopped.
Possible faulty System Operation

• An unpredictable and unexpected behavior of machines and plant
components may cause personal injury and property damage.
 Stop the application program, before starting the firmware update or
before downloading the configuration.
 Make sure that your equipment operates under conditions that prevent
personal injury or property damage. All network devices should be
placed in a fail-safe mode, before starting the firmware update or before
downloading a configuration.
Loss of Device Parameters, Overwriting of Firmware

• Both the firmware download and the configuration download erase the
configuration data base. The firmware download overwrites the existing
firmware in the network device.
 To complete the firmware update and to make the device operable
again, re-load the configuration after the firmware update has been
finished.
For devices with Ethernet technology
 Device parameters that have been saved volatile, e. g. as the
temporarily set IP address parameters, are getting lost during the reset.
 In order to prevent loss of configuration data, make sure that your
project configuration data are saved non-volatile, before you initiate a
firmware update or download the configuration.
2.4.2 Mismatching System Configuration

Mismatching system configuration loaded into the device could result in
faulty data mapping in the application program and thus unexpected
equipment operation may cause personal injury or damage of equipment.
 In the device use only a configuration suitable for the system.

Safety 18/355
2.5 Property Damage

To avoid property damage and damage to your system or to your
equipment, you necessarily must read, understand, and comply with the
safety instructions and safety messages in this manual before you
configure your system.
2.5.1 Power Disconnect while dowloading Firmware or Configuration

If during the process of downloading a firmware or configuration
• the power supply to a PC with the software application is interrupted,
• or the power supply to the device is interrupted,
• or a reset to the device is done,
this may lead to the following consequences:
Loss of Device Parameters, Firmware Corruption

• The firmware download or the configuration download will be interrupted
and remains incomplete.
• The firmware or the configuration database will be corrupted and device
parameters will be lost.
• Device damage may occur as the device cannot be rebooted.
Whether these consequences occur depends on when the power
disconnect occurs during the download.
Power Drop during Write and Delete Accesses in the File System
The FAT file system in the netX firmware is subject to certain limitations in
its operation. Write and delete accesses in the file system (firmware
update, configuration download etc.) can destroy the FAT (File Allocation
Table) if the accesses cannot be completed if the power drops. Without a
proper FAT, a firmware may not be found and cannot be started.
Make sure that the power supply to the device is not interrupted during
write and delete accesses in the file system (firmware update, configuration
download, etc.).
2.5.2 Invalid Firmware

Loading invalid firmware files could render your device unusable.
 Only download firmware files to the device that are valid for this device.
Otherwise you might be forced to return your device for repair.

Safety 19/355
2.6 Safety Messages on Firmware or Configuration Download

If you perform a firmware download or a configuration download via the
netGateway DTM be aware of the following:
Communication Stop caused by Firmware or Configuration Download

Initiating a firmware or configuration dowload process during bus operation
will stop the communication and a subsequent plant stop may cause
unpredictable and unexpected behavior of machines and plant
components, possibly resulting in personal injury and damage to your
equipment.
The firmware download overwrites the existing firmware. The
communication stop may cause loss of device parameters and possible
device damage may occur.
 Stop the application program, before you start the firmware or
configuration dowload.
 Make sure that all network devices are placed in a fail-safe condition.
Mismatching System Configuration

Mismatching system configuration loaded into the device could result in
faulty data mapping in the application program and thus unexpected
equipment operation may cause personal injury or damage of equipment.
 In the device use only a configuration suitable for the system.
Power Disconnect while dowloading Firmware or Configuration

If the power supply to the PC or device is interrupted while the firmware or
configuration is being downloaded, the download will be aborted, the
firmware may be corrupted, the device parameters may be lost, and the
device may be damaged.
 During firmware or configuration download process do not interrupt the
power supply to the PC, or to the device and do not perform a reset to
the device!
Invalid Firmware
Loading invalid firmware files could render your device unusable.
 Only proceed with a firmware version valid for your device.

Configuration Sequence for Gateway and Proxy 20/355
3 Configuration Sequence for Gateway and Proxy

3.1 Gateway and Proxy Device
Two networks are connected via a gateway or a proxy device together. For
the data transfer from one network into the other it is necessary that these
data are mapped. This mapping is done within SYCON.net.
Gateway Devices
The mapping of the data can be done by the user and be configured within
SYCON.net.
The following gateway devices are in the device catalog.
• netTAP NT 50
• netTAP NT 100
• netTAP NT 151-RE-RE
• netTAP NT 151-CCIES-RE
• netBRICK NB 100
Proxy Devices
The mapping of data is already specified and done automatically by
SYCON.net.
The following proxy devices are in the device catalog.
• netTAP NT 100
• netLINK Proxy
Note: The gateway or proxy device can only be used at the (gray) main
line.

3.2 Configuration of a NT 50 as a Gateway

This section is valid for netTAP NT 50 devices as a gateway. These
devices are called gateway devices in the following description.
The configuration of the NT 50 devices is explained exemplarily with the
protocol conversion PROFIBUS DP Slave to Modbus RTU Slave.
The device NT 50-DP-RS is necessary for the protocol conversion from
PROFIBUS DP Slave to Modbus RTU Slave.
The following steps have to be done to configure the device:
3.2.1 Requirement for the Configuration

The device is configured via the Ethernet port. Therefore it is necessary
that the device gets an IP address assigned before.
Therefore do the followings steps:

1. Establish an Ethernet connection between the Ethernet network port of
your PC and the Ethernet port of the netTAP NT 50 device
2. Start the “Ethernet-Device Setup” software. Therefore select Start >
Programs > SYCON.net System Configurator > Ethernet Device
Setup.
3. Search for connected devices. Therefore click on Search Devices.
Devices are searched in the local network using broadcast telegrams.
4. Assign an IP address to the NT 50 device, which should be used for the
device configuration.
This address can be stored in a non volatile memory of the device.
3.2.2 Start SYCON.net and User Login

1. Start SYCON.net
 Select Start > Programs > SYCON.net System Configurator >
SYCON.net
 SYCON.net is started
2. User Login
 In the window SYCON.net User Login click OK to login or enter your
password and then click OK to login
 SYCON.net frame application appears

3.2.3 Insert the Gateway Device into the Configuration Window

 Go to the device catalog under vendor Hilscher GmbH to the category
Gateway / Stand-Alone Slave. Use drag and drop with the NT 50-XX-
XX gateway device to insert it at the (gray) main line.
Figure 5: Insert Gateway Device into the Project
 The gateway device appears in the project
Figure 6: Gateway Device in the Project

3.2.4 Select the Protocol Conversion of the Gateway

1. Open the Gateway configuration window
 Double click the gateway device symbol
or
select from the context menu of the gateway device symbol the entry
Configuration > Gateway
 The Gateway configuration window opens
Figure 7: Device Assignment without Device

2. Open dialog for protocol selection

 Select in the navigation area Configuration > Settings
 The configuration window Settings opens
Figure 8: Gateway Protocol Selection (1)

3. Select the protocol for the primary network and for the secondary
network and apply.
 Select in the window Configuration > Settings at Protocol
Combinations for the Primary Network (Port X2) the protocol
PROFIBUS DP Slave
 Select then at Protocol Combinations for the Secondary Network
(Port X3) the protocol Modbus RTU
 Click Apply
 The Gateway configuration window shows the following
The Required gateway as shown above depends on the selected

protocols.

4. Enable address switch.

 Check Enable to enable that the PROFIBUS station address is set by
the rotary switch at the device.
If Enable is uncheked, the the PROFIBUS station address is set by the
configuration software.
5. Close the Gateway configuration window

 Click OK
 The Gateway configuration window closes

3.2.5 Configuration of the secondary Network

1. Configure the protocol at the secondary network (Port X3)
 Select from the context menu of the NT 50-XX-XX symbol the entry
Configuration > Modbus RTU
 The Modbus RTU configuration window opens
Figure 11: Protocol Configuration
2. Set protocol parameter

 Set the parameters. To configure the device as a Modbus RTU Slave
set for Protocol Mode the value IO Slave. Set the following
important parameter: Modbus Address, Interface type, RTS
Control, Baud Rate, Stop Bits and Parity. These parameter
are important that the used Modbus RTU Master can communicate with
the gateway device.
More information about Modbus RTU parameter is in section Modbus
RTU Parameter on page 247.
3. Close the configuration window
 Click OK
 The configuration window closes

3.2.6 Configuration of the primary Network

1. Configure the protocol at the primary network (Port X2)
 Select from the context menu of the NT 50-XX-XX symbol the entry
Configuration > PROFIBUS DP Slave
 The PROFIBUS DP Slave configuration window opens
2. Set parameter for protocol at the primary network (port X2).

 If the PROFIBUS station address is set by the rotary switch at the
device, then the field Station Address is grayed out.
If the PROFIBUS station address is set by configuration software, then
enter in Station Address the PROFIBUS station address for the
gateway device.
 Set size and type of the modules for Output and Input .

 Default values can be used normally for the other parameters.
Depending on additionally requirements and the design of the
PROFIBUS network as well as the used devices parameters needs to
be adjusted if necessary.
More information about PROFIBUS DP Slave parameter is in section
PROFIBUS DP Slave Parameter on page 241.
3. Close the configuration window.

 Click OK.
 The configuration window closes.
3.2.7 Configure the Gateway – Signal Mapping

 Select from the context menu of the gateway device symbol the entry
2. Open the Signal Mapping window
 Select Configuration > Signal Mapping
 The window Signal Mapping opens
Figure 13: Gateway Signal Mapping

3. Signal Mapping: Data transfer from Port X2 to Port X3

 Map the signals, which are received on Port X2 (Port X2 receive), with
signals, which should be sent on Port X3 (Port X3 send).
 For this, mark the signal received (Port X2) and the signal to be sent
(Port X3) and the click the button Map Signals
Or
Map the signal using drag and drop. For this, drag the signal received
(Port X2 receive) and drop it on the signal to be sent (Port X3 send)

Or
5. Signal Mapping: Transfer status info of Port X2 to Port X3

 If necessary, map the status information of Port X2 (Port X2 generated,
which are generated device internal) to signals which should be sent on
Port X3 (Port X3 send)
 For this mark the status signal (Port X2) and the signal which should be
sent (Port X3) and click the button Map Signals
Or
Map the signal using drag and drop. For this, drag the status signal
(Port X2 generated) and drop it on the signal to be sent (Port X3 send)


Or
 An example of the Signal Mapping window shows the following figure
Figure 14: Gateway Signals mapped

3.2.8 Establish a Connection to the netTAP NT 50
1. Connect an Ethernet cable to the NT 50
 Build up an Ethernet connection between the Ethernet port of the NT 50
device and to the Ethernet port of the configuration PC.
2. Set the IP address of the NT 50 device
 Set with the Ethernet Device setup software, which is part of the
SYCON.net installation, the IP address for the NT 50. With this software
it is also possible to read an already assigned IP address from the
NT 50 device.
The IP address is required for the communication with the SYCON.net
software.
To communication from the SYCON.net software with the NT 50 device,

an IP address has to be assigned before to the NT 50 device. How to
assign an IP address is described in the document „Ethernet Device
Configuration OI xx DE.pdf“.
3. Open the gateway configuration window

 Select from the context menu of the gateway device symbol
 The gateway configuration window opens
4. Select driver
 Select in the navigation area Settings > Driver and then check netX
Driver.
 The following figure shows the selected driver.
Figure 15: Select Driver

5. Set the IP search range

 Select in the navigation area Settings > Driver > netX Driver.
 The window for driver settings opens.
Figure 16: Set IP Address Search Range (1)
An IP address (one) or IP addresses (several, address range) are set in

this window which SYCON.net uses to build up a connection to the proxy
device.
 Select (as shown in the figure above):
Select the tap TCP Connection.
Is the Select IP Range grayed out (as shown above), then no IP
range is defined.
Click on + to add a new range, which enables the field below.
Otherwise an address range configured earlier can be selected or by a
mouse click on + a new address range can be configured. Set the IP
(start) address (and end address) the proxy devices are searched for.
Make sure that the proxy device can be reached via Ethernet and is
reachable via the address range.
 The fields to configure an IP address range are enabled.

 You can enter one IP address of the proxy device at as shown

above or you can set an IP address range by a check at Use IP
Range and set the IP end address at . Make sure that the proxy
device can be reached via Ethernet and is reachable via the address
range.
Note: Set the IP address range not to large, which results in a long scan
time.
 After the address range was set click on Save.

3.2.9 Device Assignment

 Select Settings > Device Assignment
 Click on Scan.
 The search process is started. Devices found are display in a list then.
Figure 18: Select Device
 Select the device from the list by a check in the field of the device as
shown above.
 Click on the button OK

3.2.10 Load Firmware

The firmware has to be loaded into the netTAP only for first commissioning
only. Therefore do the following steps:
2. Open the Settings window

 Select Configuration > Settings
 The window Settings opens
Figure 19: Firmware Download
3. Select Firmware
 Mark at Available Firmware the firmware file : N5DPSMBR.NXF
(Firmware for PROFIBUS DP Slave to Modbus RTU).
4. Load firmware into the device
 Click on Download
 The firmware is loaded into the netTAP device
Important: Do not remove the cable during the firmware download.

Do not disconnect the power supply of the device during the firmware
download.

5. Download of firmware
 Wait until the firmware was transferred completely into the device.
6. Close the Gateway configuration window after the download
 Click OK
3.2.11 Load Configuration

1. Download configuration
Download
 Answer the security question with Yes, if the download should start
 SYCON.net builds up an online connection to the device. This the
indicated by a green highlighted device name.
 The configuration is transferred info the gateway device
 The device performs a reset and then starts with the new configuration.
Note: The device performs a reset after the download. Because of that,
the Ethernet connection gets lost and (has to be stopped from SYCON.net
and then) has to be established again.
Stop the online connection to the device, which was established

automatically to the device before.
2. Disconnect
 Select from the context menu of the proxy device symbol the entry
Disconnect.
Note: To establish a connection again, do the steps described in section

Device Assignment on page 35.

3.2.12 Save Project

Note: The configuration downloaded from SYCON.net into the device
can’t be uploaded from the device. Only the SYCON.net project can be
downloaded into additional devices.
Save the SYCON.net project. In case of a device replacement the saved

project can be opened with SYCON.net and loaded into the device.
 To save a project select menu File > Save respectively File > Save As
or click on icon .
When you exit the program and the current configuration differs from the
last saved configuration, then the following question appears:
Figure 20: Security Question – Save Project
When you answer with Yes, then the project is saved. When you answer
with No, then the project is not saved and the changes are lost. When you
answer with Cancel, then the project is not saved.

3.3 Configuration of a NT 100 or NB 100 as a Gateway

This section is valid for netTAP NT 100 and netBRICK NB 100 devices as a
gateway. These devices are called gateway devices in the following
description.
The configuration of a netTAP NT 100 device is described as example.
Differences and extras to other devices are pointed out respectively are
described in own sections.
The configuration of the NT 100 devices is explained exemplarily with the
protocol conversion PROFINET IO Device to PROFIBUS DP Master.
The device NT 100-RE-DP with one master license is necessary for the
protocol conversion from PROFINET IO Device to PROFIBUS DP Master.

1. Start SYCON.net
SYCON.net
2. User Login


XX respectively NB 100-XX-XX gateway device to insert it at the (gray)
main line.
 The gateway device appears in the project
NT 100 is shown as example.


The entry Memory Card Management in the navigation area is only

available for netTAP NT 100 devices.


 Select in the Navigation area Configuration > Settings


network and apply
 Select in the window Configuration > Settings at Protocol
Combinations for the Primary Network (Port X2) the protocol
PROFINET IO Device
(Port X3) the protocol PROFIBUS DP Master
 Click the button Apply
 The Gateway configuration window shows the following

The Required gateway as shown above depends on the selected
protocols.
4. Close the Gateway configuration window


1. Configure the protocol at the primary network (Port X2)
Configuration > PROFINET IO Device
 The PROFINET IO Device configuration window opens
 Set the parameters. Set especially the number of Input Data Bytes and
Output Data Bytes.
More information about PROFINET IO Device parameter is in section
Configuration PROFINET IO Device (Gateway) on page 205.
 Click on OK


If the slave device is not listed in the device catalog, then it has to be
imported into the device catalog first.
3.3.5.1 Expand PROFIBUS DP Slave Device Catalog
If you want to use a PROFIBUS DP slave device that is not listed in the
device catalog, then you have to import the GSD file into the SYCON.net
device catalog.
 Proceed as follows:
1. Missing PROFIBUS DP Slave devices can be added to the device
catalog using the menu Network > Import Device Descriptions.
2. Select the new GSD file.
3. Answer the question “Do you want to reload the device catalog?“ with
Yes to reload the catalog.
More information about the device catalog is in the document

„SYCONnet_netDevice_en.pdf“ in the directory „Documentation“ on the
product DVD.
3.3.5.2 Insert PROFIBUS DP Slave Device to the PROFIBUS Network

 Go to the device catalog. Use drag and drop with one or more
PROFIBUS DP Slave devices to insert it/them at the PROFIBUS bus
line.
 The PROFIBUS DP Slave device icons appear at the PROFIBUS
network line (Secondary network)
Figure 27: Gateway Device with Slave

3.3.5.3 Configure the PROFIBUS DP Slave device

 Open the configuration window with a double click on the device icon of
the PROFIBUS DP Slave
 The configuration window of the PROFIBUS DP Slave device opens
 Select in the navigation area Configuration > Modules.
 Select from Available Modules the module(s) and add it/them to the
Configured Modules to configure the Slave. The Configured Modules
has to match the configuration of the used PROFIBUS DP slave device.
More information about the configuration of PROFIBUS DP Slave devices

are in the document PROFIBUS_Generic_Slave_DTM_en.pdf on the
product DVD in section Configuration.
3.3.5.4 Configure PROFIBUS DP Master

1. Open the PROFIBUS DP Master (Port X3) configuration window
Configuration > PROFIBUS DP Master
 The PROFIBUS DP Master configuration window opens
Figure 28: PROFIBUS DP Bus Parameter

2. Configure the PROFIBUS DP Master

 Set the parameter. Set especially under
Configuration > Bus Parameter the bus parameter and under
Configuration > Stationtable the station addresses (stations
addresses of the PROFIBUS DP Slave devices)
Figure 29: PROFIBUS DP Slave Station Address
More information about the configuration of PROFIBUS DP Master

devices are in the document PROFIBUS_Master_netX_DTM_en.pdf in
section Configuration.


3.3.6 Configure the Gateway – Signal Mapping

2. Open the Signal Mapping window
 Select Configuration > Signal Mapping
 The window Signal Mapping opens



Or

Or

Or


Or
 An example of the Signal Mapping window shows the following figure


3.3.7 Establish a Connection to the Gateway Device

1. Connect the USB cable
 Connect with an USB cable the USB connector of the netTAP
(respectively the netBRICK NB 100) device with the USB connector of
the PC.
2. Select the driver

 Select Settings > Driver and then check netXDriver
 The following figure shows the selected Driver
Figure 32: Select USB Driver (1)


4. Select the netXDriver

 Select Settings > Driver > netXDriver

 Select the tab USB/RS232 Connection.
 Check Enable USB/RS232 Connector.
 Click on Save.
Note: The standard setting of the netX Driver USB/RS232 can be used for
netTAP respectively netBRICK devices without changes.


 Click on Scan.
shown above.
 Click on OK


3.3.9 Load Firmware


3. Select Firmware
 Mark at Available Firmware the firmware file : NTPNSDPM.NXF
(Firmware for PROFINET IO Device to PROFIBUS DP Master).

download.

 Click OK

Download
 The configuration is transferred info the gateway device
3.3.11 Save Project


or click on icon .

3.3.12 Device Description File to configure the Master

A GSDML file is required to configure the PROFINET IO Controller.
 To configure the PROFINET IO Controller use the following GSDML file
from the product DVD directory EDS/PROFINET.
for NT 100: GSDML-V2.1-HILSCHER-NT 100-RE PNS-20090123.xml,
for NB 100: GSDML-V2.1-HILSCHER-NB 100-RE PNS-20100226.xml,
for NT 50: GSDML-V2.1-HILSCHER-NT 50-EN PNS-20100226.xml
Note: The product IDs are different for devices used as gateway and
devices used as proxy. Make sure to use/import the right GSDML file at
the PROFINET IO Controller.
 Load the GSDML file into the configuration software of the PROFINET
IO Controller.

3.4 Configuration of a NT 100 as Proxy

For the conversion from PROFINET IO Device to PROFIBUS DP Master
with proxy functionality the device NT 100-RE-DP can be used. Therefore
use the device NT 100-RE-XX/PROXY from the device catalog.
These devices are called proxy device in the following description.
The device NT 100-RE-DP with one master license is necessary for the
protocol conversion from PROFINET IO Device to PROFIBUS DP Master.

1. Start SYCON.net
SYCON.net
2. User Login

3.4.2 Insert the Proxy Device into the Configuration Window

XX proxy device to insert it at the (gray) main line.
Figure 37: Insert Proxy Device into the Project
 The proxy device appears in the project
Figure 38: Proxy Device in the Project

3.4.3 Select the Protocol Conversion of the Proxy

1. Open the Proxy configuration window.
Configuration > Proxy.
 The Proxy configuration window opens.


 Select in the Navigation area Configuration > Settings
Figure 40: Proxy Protocol Selection (1)

network and apply
 In the window Configuration > Settings at Protocol Combinations for
the Primary Network (Port X2) the protocol PROFINET IO Device is
already preselected.
(Port X3) the protocol PROFIBUS DP Master
 The proxy configuration window shows the following.
Figure 41: Proxy Protocol Selection (2)
The Mapping Mode is preselected with Default (only selection) and works
as follows:
PROFIUS-DP Slave devices which are inserted at the bus line are
represented by a slot number on PROFINET. The PROFINET slot number
is equal to the PROFIBUS station address. The PROFIBUS modules are
represented by a PROFINET sub slot number.
4. Close the proxy configuration window
 Click on OK
 The proxy configuration window closes


device catalog.
More information about the device catalog is in the document

product DVD.

 Go to the device catalog. Use drag and drop with one or more
PROFIBUS DP Slave devices to insert it/them at the PROFIBUS bus
line.
 The PROFIBUS DP Slave device icons appear at the PROFIBUS
Figure 42: Proxy Device with Slave




1. Open the PROFIBUS DP Master (Port X3) configuration window

2. Configure the PROFIBUS DP Master

Configuration > Station Table the station addresses (stations
addresses of the PROFIBUS DP Slave devices)
Figure 44: PROFIBUS DP Slave Station Address
More information about the configuration of PROFIBUS DP Master devices

are in the document PROFIBUS_Master_netX_DTM_en.pdf in section
Configuration.



The PROFINET IO network is on port X2 of the proxy device.
1. Open PROFINET IO Device configuration window
Configuration > PROFINET IO Device.
 The PROFINET IO Device configuration window opens with the view of
the modules
Figure 45: PROFINET IO Device Table
Here the modules with its slot number and sub slot number are displayed,
as they will become visible at the PROFINET IO Controller. These slot
numbers and sub slot numbers will be exported into the GSDML file, which
is described later.
Slot 0 (NT 100-RE-DP/PROXY) and slot 1 (NT100 (PROFIBUS DP)) are
always present. Two additional slots (slot 2 in this case, which represent
the PROFIBUS DP Slave with station address 2; slot 3 in this case, which
represent the PROFIBUS DP Slave with station address 3) are
automatically displayed when the PROFIBUS DP Slaves were inserted to
the PROFIBUS DP network.
These Slot and sub slot numbers are used in the GSDML file. The GSDML
file can be created (exported) which is described later.

2. Set the name of station

 Select in the navigation area General.
 The following configuration window opens
Figure 46: PROFINET IO Name of Station
 Enter the Name of Station
Note: The name of station is very important and is used by the

PROFINET IO Controller to identify the proxy device.


3.4.6 Establish a Connection to the Proxy Device

1. Connect the USB cable
 Connect with an USB cable the USB connector of the netTAP device
with the USB connector of the PC.
2. Select the driver

 Select Settings > Driver and then check netXDriver


 Select Settings > Driver > netXDriver

 Select the tab USB/RS232 Connection.
 Click on Save.
Note: The standard setting of the netX Driver USB/RS232 can be used for
netTAP respectively netBRICK devices without changes.


 Click on Scan.
shown above.
 Click on OK

3.4.8 Load Firmware

1. Open the proxy configuration window
Configuration > Proxy
 The proxy configuration window opens

3. Select Firmware
 Mark at Available Firmware the firmware file : NTPNSDPM.NXF
(Firmware for PROFINET IO Device to PROFIBUS DP Master).

download.

 Click OK

Download
 The configuration is transferred info the proxy device
3.4.10 Save Project


or click on icon .

3.4.11 Device Description File to configure the PROFINET IO

Controller
A GSDML file is required to configure the PROFINET IO Controller. This file
is creates as follows:
Additional Functions > PROFINET IO Device > Export GSDML.
 The dialog to save the XML file appears.
 Select the directory the GSDML file should be saved into.
 A name for the GSDML file is proposed. Accept it or change it useful.
 Click on Save.
 The GSDML file is saved.
The structure of the file name is:
Fixed prefix
Version number of the GSDML specification
Manufacturer name
Device type
Date: Format yyyymmdd
Time: Format hhmmss
File extension (always): xml
 Use the GSDML file to configure the PROFINET IO Controller

3.5 Configuration of the NT 151-RE-RE (netTAP Real-Time

Ethernet Gateway)
This section provides step-by-step instructions for configuring the netTAP
NT 151-RE-RE device. In the following description, this device is also
called “gateway device”.
The configuration is exemplified by using the protocol conversion
PROFINET IO Device to PROFINET IO Device.
Information on how to use an SD memory card to copy configuration data

from one netTAP into another netTAP device (e.g. in order to “clone“ a
spare device) can be found in the user manual netTAP NT 151-RE-RE,
DOC150802UMxxEN.

1. Start SYCON.net.
 Choose Start > Programs > SYCON.net System Configurator >
SYCON.net
 SYCON.net is started.
2. User Login
password and then click OK to login.
 SYCON.net frame application appears.


There are two options of inserting the gateway device:
• Option 1: You can insert the NT 151-RE-RE dummy gateway element,
which is not equipped with a preset protocol conversion. In this case,
you afterwards have to configure the protocol conversion as described in
section Select the Protocol Conversion of the Gateway on page 77.
• Option 2: You can insert a gateway element featuring a preset protocol
conversion. In this case, you can proceed as described in section
Configuration of the primary Network on page 80.
Option 1
 In the device catalog, open Vendor tab, then open Hilscher GmbH >
Gateway / Stand-Alone Slave folder. Select the NT 151-RE-RE
gateway, then “drag and drop” the device onto the (gray) main line.
 The gateway device appears in the project:
 Proceed as described in section Select the Protocol Conversion of the

Gateway on page 77.

Option 2
Gateway / Stand-Alone Slave folder. Select the gateway element that
represents your desired protocol conversion (e.g. NT 151-RE-
RE/PNS/PNS), then “drag and drop” the device onto the (gray) main
line.
Figure 54: Insert pre-configured Gateway Device into the Project
 The gateway device appears in the project:
Figure 55: Pre-configured Gateway Device in Project
 Proceed as described in section Configuration of the primary Network

on page 80.

Abbreviations of the protocol conversions

The protocol conversions of the elements in the device catalog can be
inferred from the abbreviations:
Figure 56: Protocol conversions
The combination NT 151-RE-RE/ECS/ECM for example means that the

gateway is pre-configured for acting as EtherCAT Slave at the X2 primary
network and as EtherCAT Master at the X3 secondary network.
Abbreviation Meaning
PNM PROFINET IO Controller
PNS PROFINET IO Device
ECM EtherCAT Master
ECS EtherCAT Slave
S3M Sercos Master
S3S Sercos Slave
EIM EtherNet/IP Scanner
EIS EtherNet/IP Adapter
PLS POWERLINK Controlled Node
OMB OpenModbus/TCP
Table 8: Abbreviations of the protocols


1. Open the Gateway configuration window.
 In the context menu of the gateway device symbol, choose
Configuration > Gateway.
 The Gateway configuration window opens:

2. Open dialog for protocol selection.

 In the Navigation area, select Configuration > Settings.
 The configuration window Settings opens:

network.
 In the Protocol Combinations area, select PROFINET IO Device
from the the Primary Network (Port X2) drop-down list.
 From the Secondary Network (Port X3) drop-down list, also select
PROFINET IO Device.
 Click Apply button.
 The Gateway configuration window now looks as depicted below:
4. Close the Gateway configuration window.

 Click OK button.
 The Gateway configuration window closes.


1. Open the configuration window.
Configuration > PROFINET IO Device (choose the upper of the two
PROFINET IO Device entries).
Figure 60: Open Port X2 via context menu
 The PROFINET IO Device configuration window opens for the primary

network at Port X2:
Figure 61: Configuring PROFINET IO Device at X2 (1)

2. Configure input data for primary network at Port X2.

 Click Add Module button to add a module for input data.
 In the Modules table, click on the newly added module entry, then
select the number of input bytes for your gateway device at Port X2
from the drop-down list. For receiving e.g. 16 bytes of input data, select
16 Bytes Input entry from the drop-down list.

3. Configure output data for primary network at Port X2.

 Click Add Module button again to add a module for output data.
 In the Modules table, click on the newly added second module entry,
then select the number of output bytes for your gateway device at Port
X2 from the drop-down list. For sending e.g. 32 bytes of output data,
select 32 Bytes Output entry from the drop-down list.
Detailed information on how to configure a PROFINET IO Device at Port

X2 can be found in the operating instruction manual Generic DTM for
PROFINET IO Devices, DOC060305OIxxEN stored on the Gateway
Solutions DVD in the directory
Documentation\english\1.Software\SYCON.net
Configuration Software\Master Configuration\PROFINET
IO Controller\IO Device Configuration.
If you are using the EtherCAT Slave protocol at X2, see section
Configuration EtherCAT Slave on page 175 for further information.
If you are using the EtherNet/IP Adapter protocol at X2, see section
Configuration EtherNet/IP Adapter on page 179 for further information.
If you are using the Sercos Slave protocol at X2, see section
Configuration Sercos Slave on page 212 for further information.
If you are using the POWERLINK Controlled Node protocol at X2, see
section Configuration POWERLINK Controlled Node on page 199 for
further information.
As an alternative, you can open the corresponding online help by clicking
the Help button in the opened configuration dialog window of the slave
DTM, or by pressing the F1 key on your keyboard.


 Click OK.


Configuration > PROFINET IO Device (choose the lower of the two
PROFINET IO Device entries).
Figure 64: Open Port X3 via context menu
 The PROFINET IO Device configuration window opens for the

secondary network at Port X3:
Figure 65: PROFINET IO Device Configuration Window

2. Configure input data for secondary network at Port X3.

 Click Add Module button to add a module for input data.
 In the Modules table, click on the newly added module entry, then
select the number of input bytes for your gateway device at Port X3
from the drop-down list. For receiving e.g. 16 bytes of input data, select
16 Bytes Input entry from the drop-down list.

3. Configure output data for secondary network at Port X3.

 Click Add Module button again to add a module for output data.
 In the Modules table, click on the newly added second module entry,
then select the number of output bytes for your gateway device at Port
X3 from the drop-down list. For sending e.g. 32 bytes of output data,
select 32 Bytes Output entry from the drop-down list.
Detailed information on how to configure a PROFINET IO Device at Port

X3 can be found in the operating instruction manual Generic DTM for
PROFINET IO Devices, DOC060305OIxxEN stored on the Gateway
Solutions DVD in the directory
If you are using the EtherCAT Slave protocol at X3, see section
Configuration EtherCAT Slave on page 175 for further information.
If you are using the EtherNet/IP Adapter protocol at X3, see section
Configuration EtherNet/IP Adapter on page 179 for further information.
If you are using the Sercos Slave protocol at X3, see section
Configuration Sercos Slave on page 212 for further information.
If you are using the OpenModbus/TCP protocol at X3, see section
Configuration Open Modbus/TCP on page 185 for further information.
the Help button in the opened configuration dialog window of the slave

Detailed information on how to configure a master protocol at Port 3 can

be found in the operating instruction manual of the corresponding Master
DTM. The Master DTM manuals are stored on the Gateway Solutions
DVD in the directory
Configuration Software\Master
Configuration\[protocol].
For EtherCAT Master, for example, you would need the operating
instruction manual DTM for Hilscher EtherCAT Master Device,
DOC080404OIxxEN.
the Help button in the opened configuration dialog window of the Master

 Click on OK.

3.5.6 Signal Mapping

 The Gateway configuration window opens.
2. Open the Signal Mapping window.

 In the Navigation area, select Configuration > Signal Mapping.
 The Signal Mapping window opens:

3. Configure data transfer from Port X2 to Port X3.

 Map the signals that are received on Port X2 (Port X2 Receive) with the
signals that should be sent on Port X3 (Port X3 Send).
 For this, first select the received signal at Port X2 , then select the
signal to be sent at Port X3 , then click Map Signals button .
Figure 69: Map signals (1)
Note: You can also map the signals by using drag and drop. For this, drag
the received signal (Port X2 Receive) and drop it on the signal that is to
be sent (Port X3 Send).
 Repeat the procedure with the other required signals.
Important: If you use the Auto Mapping function (see position in the
figure above), you cannot use the standard GSDML file GSDML-V2.31-
HILSCHER-NT 151-RE-RE PNS-20151021.xml delivered on the
Gateway Solutions DVD for configuring the PROFINET IO Controller.
In this case, you must generate and export a new GSDML after having
finished the configuration in SYCON.net.
To do so, select the gateway device symbol, then choose Additional
Functions > PROFINET IO Device > Export GSDML from the context
menu and save the file to your PC. Afterwards you can import this file in
your PROFINET engineering tool to configure your IO Controller.

4. Configure data transfer from Port X3 to Port X2

 Map the signals that are received on Port X3 (Port X3 Receive) with
the signals that should be sent on Port X2 (Port X2 Send).
 For this, first select the received signal at Port X3 , then select the
signal to be sent at Port X2 , then click Map Signals button .
Note: You can also map the signals by using drag and drop. For this, drag
the received signal (Port X3 Receive) and drop it onto the signal that is to
be sent (Port X2 Send).
 Repeat the procedure with the other required signals.

5. Transfer status info of Port X2 to Port X3

 If necessary, map the internally generated status information of Port X2
(Port X2 Generated) to signals which should be sent on Port X3 (Port
X3 Send)
 For this, select the status signal Port X2 Generated , then the signal
that should be sent (Port X3 Send) , then click the Map Signals
button.
(You can also map the signals by using “drag and drop”.)
6. Transfer status info of Port X3 to Port X2

 If necessary, map the internally generated status information of Port X3
(Port X3 Generated) to signals which should be sent on Port X2 (Port
X2 Send)
 For this, select the status signal Port X3 Generated , then the signal
which should be sent (Port X2 Send) , then click the button Map
Signals
(You can also map the signals by using “drag and drop”.)

 An example of mapped signals shows the figure below:

3.5.7 Establish Connection to Gateway Device and Select Driver
1. Connect the netTAP device to the configuration PC via USB.
 Use a USB cable to connect the netTAP device to the configuration PC.

3. Select the driver.

 In the Navigation area, open Settings > Driver window, then select
netX Driver entry in the main window:

4. Configure the netX Driver.

 In the Navigation area, open Settings > Driver > netX Driver window.
 The following figure shows the USB settings of the netX Driver:
5. Configure USB connection.

 Open the USB/RS232 Connection tab.
 Click Save button.
Note: The standard settings of the netX Driver USB/RS232 can be used
for netTAP devices without changes.


 In the Navigation area, select Settings > Device Assignment.
 The netTAP DTM automatically starts searching for connected devices.
 Wait for a short while until the device is found and displayed in the list.
If the device is not found, select suitable only entry from the device
selection drop-down list, then click Scan button.
Figure 76: Found Device

 Select the NT 151-RE-RE device by checking the field in front of the

device.
 Click OK.

3.5.9 Loading or Updating Firmware (Firmware Download)
Note: The firmware download procedure described in this section is only

necessary on first commissioning of a device delivered without pre-loaded
firmware, or if updating of an old firmware file already existing in the
device has become necessary.
In a firmware download, the firmware file is remanently stored in the flash
memory of the netTAP device.
For downloading firmware, proceed as follows:

2. Open Settings window.

 The Settings window opens:

3. Select Firmware.
 In the Available Firmware field, select the firmware file that you want to
download . In this example, it is the T120D0D0.NXF file (firmware for
protocol conversion PROFINET IO Device to PROFINET IO Device).
Note: The firmware files displayed in the Available Firmware field

depend on the the chosen protocol combination. If you haven’t selected
any protocols in the Primary network (Port X2) and Secondary network
(Port X3) drop-down lists yet, all loadable firmware files for the NT 151-
RE-RE that are available on your PC will be displayed here.
Device Damage Due to Power Disconnect While Downloading

Firmware
If the power supply to the PC or to the device is interrupted while the
firmware is being downloaded, the download will be aborted and the
firmware database may be corrupted, leading to loss of device parameters
and possibly to device damage.
 Do not interrupt the power supply to the PC or to the device during
firmware download!
 Do not perform a device reset during firmware download!
4. Load firmware into the device.

 Click on Download .
5. Download of firmware.
 Wait until the firmware has been completely transferred to the device.
6. Close the Gateway configuration window after the download.
 Click OK.


After having configured the gateway in SYCON.net and having established
a connection to the device (as described in the previous sections), you can
download the configuration to the device via USB.

Configuration
configuration is being downloaded, the download will be aborted and the
configuration database may be corrupted, leading to loss of device
parameters and possibly to device damage.
configuration download!
 Do not perform a device reset during configuration download!
 In the context menu of the gateway device symbol, select Download

entry.
 Answer the security question with Yes.
 SYCON.net builds up an online connection to the device.
 The configuration is transferred info the gateway device.

3.5.11 Save Project

Save the SYCON.net project. In case of a device replacement, the saved
project can be opened and re-edited (if necessary) with SYCON.net and
then loaded into the spare device.
 To save a project, select menu File > Save respectively File > Save As
or click on icon .
When you answer with Yes, the project is saved. When you answer with
No, the project is not saved and the changes are lost. When you answer
with Cancel, then the project is not saved.
3.5.12 Device Description File to configure the Master

The network master device, to which the NT 151-RE-RE device is to be
connected, requires for its configuration a device description file containing
the slave parameters of the NT 151-RE-RE for the corresponding protocol.
These files are stored on the Gateway Solutions DVD in the folder:
Electronic Data Sheets (e.g. EDS,GSD,GSDML)\[protocol].
Thus the network master (in this example the PROFINET IO Controller),
requires a GSDML file containing the parameters of the NT 151-RE-RE
acting as PROFINET IO Device.
 To configure the PROFINET IO Controller use the following GSDML file:
GSDML-V2.31-HILSCHER-NT 151-RE-RE PNS-20151021-1.xml
This file is stored on the Gateway Solutions DVD in the folder:
Electronic Data Sheets (e.g. EDS,GSD,GSDML)\PROFINET.
 Load (import) the GSDML file into the configuration software of your
PROFINET IO Controller.
Important: If you are using the netTAP as PROFINET IO Device and if

you did map its signals by using the Auto Mapping function, you cannot
use the standard GSDML file GSDML-V2.31-HILSCHER-NT 151-RE-RE
PNS-20151021.xml delivered on the Gateway Solutions DVD for
configuring the PROFINET IO Controller.
In this case, you must generate and export a new GSDML after having
finished the configuration in SYCON.net.
To do so, select the gateway device symbol, then choose Additional
Functions > PROFINET IO Device > Export GSDML from the context
menu and save the file to your PC. Afterwards you can import this file in
your PROFINET engineering tool to configure your IO Controller.

3.6 Configuration of the NT 151-CCIES-RE

This section provides step-by-step instructions for configuring the netTAP
NT 151-CCIES-RE device. This device is currently only available with the
protocol conversion CC-Link IE Field Slave to PROFINET IO Device.
Information about how to use an SD memory card to copy configuration

data from one netTAP into another netTAP device (e.g. in order to “clone“
a spare device) can be found in the user manual netTAP NT 151-CCIES-
RE – CC-Link IE Field Slave to PROFINET IO-Device gateway,
DOC180403UMxxEN

1. Start SYCON.net.
 Choose Start > Programs > SYCON.net System Configurator >
SYCON.net
 SYCON.net is started.
2. User Login
 In the SYCON.net User Login window, click OK to login or enter your
password and then click OK to login.
 SYCON.net frame application appears.


Gateway / Stand-Alone Slave folder. Select the NT 151-CCIES-
RE/PNS gateway, then “drag and drop” the device onto the (gray) main
line.
 The gateway device symbol “hangs” from the gray main line in the
project:

3.6.3 Define Variables for Cyclic Data

 Double-click the gateway device symbol on the main line
or choose Configuration > Gateway from the context menu.
Figure 82: Open configuration via context menu.
 The Gateway configuration window opens:

2. Open Coupler Variables window.

 In the Navigation area, select Configuration > Coupler Variables.
 The configuration window Coupler Variables opens:
Figure 84: Gateway Coupler Variables Configuration Window
3. Add variables for input and output data.

 Use the Add button to add as many variables as needed for exchanging
cyclic data between the CC-Link IE and the PROFINET network.

4. Configure variables.
 Click in the Direction field of a variable and use the drop-down list to
set the direction of the data flow, e.g. from PROFINET (output data) to
CC-LINK IE (input data).
 Click in the Data Type field of a variable and use the drop-down list to
select the required data format.
 If necessary, you can use the Name field to enter an appropriate name
for the variable (max. 255 characters).
You can also enter a descriptive note in the Description field (the
description will be visible only in the Coupler Variables dialog window).
 If you want to exchange four data words (each UINT16) from
PROFINET to CC-Link IE, and eight data words (also each UINT16)
from CC-Link IE to PROFINET, the variable list would look as follows:
Figure 85: Define Coupler Variables
 After having finished the configuration of the variables, click Apply

button.
Note: The Consistency Key (in the footer of the configuration window) is
newly generated each time the configuration is created or updated.
The key is transferred by configuration download to the gateway, and via
device description file export to the PROFINET IO Controller and the CC-
Link IE Field Master devices.
When the gateway establishes the network connections, it checks the
keys for concordance (thus checking for the same configuration status).
Differences in the consistency key will be reported by the gateway in its
cyclical Error Codes (see chapter Diagnosis and Status Messages of NT
151-CCIES-RE on page 323), or in the Overview.

3.6.4 Configuring Acyclic Communication

The NT 151-CCIES-RE supports acyclical data exchange between the two
networks. In the Acyclic Buffers configuration window, you can configure
how to treat the acyclical data buffers in case of an error.
In the User Defined Buffers window, you can define additional acyclic
message buffers that allow independent read and write access from both
networks sides.
For further information about acyclical communication, see chapter Acyclic
Communication of NT 151-CCIES-RE on page 315, in the Overview.
1. Define clearance of acyclic buffers in Acyclic Buffers window.
 In the Navigation area, select Configuration > Acyclic Buffers.
 The Acyclic Buffers configuration window opens:
Figure 86: Configure Clearance of Acyclic Buffers in Case of Error
 If you want the gateway to clear Buffer 2 (acyclic messages from

PROFINET to CC-Link IE, see section Message Interface Buffer on
page 316) in case of PROFINET connection loss, select Clear buffers
written by PROFINET side in case of connection timeout in
PROFINET side
 If you want the gateway to clear Buffer 1 (acyclic messages from CC-
Link IE to PROFINET) in case of CC-Link IE Field connection loss,
select Clear buffers written by CC-Link/IE side in case of
connection timeout in CC-Link/IE side
 If you do not want to create User Defined Buffers for acyclic messages
(as described in the following step), click OK button to close the
gateway configuration window.

2. Create User Defined Buffers (optional).
 In the Navigation area, select Configuration > User Defined Buffers.
 The User Defined Buffers configuration window opens:
Figure 87: Create User Defined Buffers
 Use the Add button to add as many “user buffers” as needed for
exchanging acyclic data between the CC-Link IE and the PROFINET
network (max. 256).
 If necessary, you can use the Name field to define an appropriate name
for a buffer.
For more information on user defined buffers, see section User Defined
Buffer on page 322 .
 After having finished the configuration, click Apply button, then OK.
 The gateway configuration window closes.

3.6.5 Configuration of the CC-Link IE Field Slave

Configuration > CC-Link/IE Slave.
Figure 88: Open configuration via context menu
 The CC-Link IE Slave configuration window opens:
Figure 89: Configuration dialog CC-Link IE Slave
2. Define station number.

 In the Navigation Area, select Configuration > Network.
 In the Station number field, enter the number that shall be used by the
gateway to communicate with the master of the CC-Link IE Field
network.
 Enter the corresponding number in the Network number field.

3. Check signal configuration (optional).

 You can check on the variables/signals, which you have defined in the
Define Variables section, by choosing Configuration > Signal
Configuration from the Navigation Area:
Figure 90: Signal Configuration dialog CC-Link IE Slave
 After having finished the configuration of the CC-Link IE Slave, click OK

button.

3.6.6 Configuration of the PROFINET Device

Configuration > PROFINET IO Device.
Figure 91: Open configuration via context menu
 The PROFINET Device configuration window opens:
Figure 92: Configuration dialog PROFINET Device

2. Define station name.

 In the Navigation Area, select Configuration > General.
 The General configuration window opens:
Figure 93: “General” Configuration dialog PROFINET Device
 In the Name of station field, enter the name that shall be used by the
gateway to communicate with the IO Controller of the PROFINET
network.

3. Check signal configuration (optional).

 You can check on the variables/signals, which you have defined in the
Define Variables section, by choosing Configuration > Signal
Configuration from the Navigation Area:
Figure 94: Signal Configuration dialog PROFINET IO Device
 After having finished the configuration of the PROFINET Device, click

OK button.

3.6.7 Establish Connection to Gateway Device and Select Driver

1. Connect USB cable.
 Use a USB cable to connect the NT 151-CCIES-RE to the configuration
PC.

3. Select driver.
 In the Navigation area, open Settings > Driver window, then select
netX Driver entry from the list in the main window:
Figure 95: Select netX Driver

4. Configure netX Driver.

 In the Navigation area, open Settings > Driver > netX Driver window.
 The following figure shows the USB settings dialog:
5. Configure USB connection.

 Open the USB/RS232 Connection tab.
 Click Save button.
Note: The standard settings of the netX Driver USB/RS232 can be used
for netTAP devices without changes.


 In the Navigation area, select Settings > Device Assignment.
 The netTAP DTM automatically starts searching for connected devices.
 Wait for a short while until the device is found and displayed in the list.
If the device is not found, select suitable only entry from the device
selection drop-down list, then click Scan button.

 Select the NT 151-CCIES-RE device by checking the check box in front

of the device.
 Click OK to close the gateway configuration dialog.

3.6.9 Updating Firmware (Firmware Download)
Note: The NT 151-CCIES-RE is shipped with pre-installed firmware.

The firmware download described in this section is therefore only
necessary if you want to update an old firmware file already existing in the
device.
In a firmware download, the firmware file is remanently stored in the flash
memory of the netTAP device.
For downloading firmware, proceed as follows:

2. Open Settings window.

 The Settings window opens:

3. Select Firmware.
 In the Available Firmware field, select the firmware file that you want to
download . For the NT 151-CCIES-RE, this is the T220X0D0.NXF file
(firmware for protocol conversion CC-Link IE Field Slave to PROFINET
IO Device).

Firmware
firmware is being downloaded, the download will be aborted and the
firmware database may be corrupted, leading to loss of device parameters
and possibly to device damage.
firmware download!
 Do not perform a device reset during firmware download!
4. Load firmware into the device.

 Click Download button.
5. Download of firmware.
 Wait until the firmware has been completely transferred into the device.
6. Close the Gateway configuration window after the download.
 Click OK.


After having configured the gateway in SYCON.net and having established
a connection to the device (as described in the previous sections), you can
download the configuration to the device via USB.

Configuration
configuration is being downloaded, the download will be aborted and the
configuration database may be corrupted, leading to loss of device
parameters and possibly to device damage.
configuration download!
 Do not perform a device reset during configuration download!
 In the context menu of the gateway device symbol, select Download

entry.
Figure 100: Start download via context menu
 Answer the security question with Yes.

 SYCON.net builds up an online connection to the device.
 The configuration is transferred info the gateway device.

3.6.11 Save Project

Save the SYCON.net project. In case of a device replacement, the saved
project can be opened and re-edited (if necessary) with SYCON.net and
then loaded into the spare device.
 To save a project, select menu File > Save respectively File > Save As
or click on icon .
When you answer with Yes, the project is saved. When you answer with
No, the project is not saved and the changes are lost. When you answer
with Cancel, then the project is not saved.

3.6.12 Export Device Description Files

The netTAP NT 151-CCIES-RE acts as slave in the CC-Link IE Field
network and as IO Device in the PROFINET network, therefore you require
device description files (containing adequate slave parameters) for
configuring your CC-Link IE Field Master and your PROFINET IO
Controller.
These device description files will be generated automatically after having
configured the netTAP in SYCON.net, and can then be exported as XML
files in order to use them for configuring the CC-Link master respectively
the IO Controller.
1. Export device description file (GSDML) to configure the PROFINET IO

Controller.
 In the context menu of the gateway device symbol, choose Additional
Functions > PROFINET IO Device > Export GSDML.
Figure 102: Export GSDML file via context menu
 A Save as dialog window opens.

 Save the GSDML file on your PC.
 Use the GSDML file in your PROFINET engineering tool. Use the import
function of your tool for this.
2. Export device description file (CSP+) to configure the CC-Link IE Field

Master.
 In the context menu of the gateway device symbol, choose Additional
Functions > CC-Link/IE Slave > Export CSP+.
Figure 103: Export CSP+ file via context menu
 A Save as dialog window opens.

 Save the CSP+ file on your PC.
 Use the CSP+ file in the configuration software of your CC-Link IE Field
Master. Use the import function of your configuration software for this.

3.7 Configuration of a NL 51N-DPL as Proxy

The netLINK Proxy NL 51N-DPL device can be used for the protocol
conversion from PROFINET IO Device to PROFIBUS DP Master with proxy
functionality. The device can communicate to one PROFIBUS DP Slave
device.
The following sections describe how to configure the device.
3.7.1 Requirement for the Configuration

The device is configured via the Ethernet port. Therefore it is necessary
that the device gets an IP address assigned before.
Therefore do the followings steps:

1. Establish an Ethernet connection between the Ethernet network port of
your PC and the Ethernet port of the NL 51N-DPL.
2. Start the „Ethernet-Device Setup“ software. Therefore select Start >
Programs > SYCON.net System Configurator > Ethernet Device
Setup.
3. Search for connected devices. Therefore click on Search Devices.
Devices are searched in the local network using broadcast telegrams.
4. Assign an IP address to the NL 51N-DPL device, which should be used
for the device configuration.
This address can be stored in a non volatile memory of the device.
Note: Use the IP address, which is later assigned by the PROFINET IO

Controller, that you can use SYCON.net for diagnostic later.

1. Start SYCON.net
SYCON.net
2. User Login

3.7.3 Insert the Proxy Device into the Configuration Window

Gateway / Stand-Alone Slave. Use drag and drop with the NL 51N-
DPL proxy device to insert it at the (gray) main line.
Or go to the device catalog under fieldbus PROFINET IO to the

category Gateway / Stand-Alone Slave. Use drag and drop with the
NL 51N-DPL proxy device to insert it at the (gray) main line.
Figure 104: Insert Proxy Device into the Project
 The proxy device appears in the project
Figure 105: Proxy Device in the Project


device catalog.
More information about the device catalog are in the document

product DVD.

 Go to the device catalog. Use drag and drop with one PROFIBUS DP
Slave device to insert it at the PROFIBUS bus line.
 The PROFIBUS DP Slave device icon appears at the PROFIBUS
Figure 106: Proxy Device with Slave
Note: The NL 51N-DPL proxy device support communication only to one

PROFIBUS DP Slave device.




1. Open the PROFIBUS DP Master configuration window
2. Configure PROFIBUS DP Master

Configuration > Station Table the station addresses (stations
addresses of the PROFIBUS DP Slave device).

More information about the configuration of PROFIBUS DP Master

devices are in the document PROFIBUS_Master_netX_DTM_en.pdf in
section Configuration.



The PROFINET IO network is at port X2 of the proxy device.
1. Open the PROFINET IO Device configuration window
Configuration > PROFINET IO Device
 The PROFINET IO Device configuration window opens and displays the
modules
Figure 108: PROFINET IO Device Table
Here the modules with its slot number and sub slot number are displayed,
as they will become visible at the PROFINET IO Controller. These slot
numbers and sub slot numbers will be exported into the GSDML file, which
is described later.
Slot 0 (NL 51N-DPL) and slot 1 (NL51N (PROFIBUS DP)) are always
present. An additional slot (slot 2 in this case, which represent the
PROFIBUS DP Slave with station address 2) is automatically displayed
when a PROFIBUS DP Slave was inserted to the PROFIBUS DP network.
These Slot and sub slot numbers are used in the GSDML file. The GSDML
file can be created (exported) which is described later.

2. Set the name of station

 Select in the navigation area General.
 The following configuration window opens
Figure 109: PROFINET IO Name of Station
 Enter the Name of Station
Note: The name of station is very important and is used by the

PROFINET IO Controller to identify the proxy device.


3.7.6 Establish a Connection to the netLINK NL 51N-DPL

1. Connect an Ethernet cable to the NL 51N-DPL
 Connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port of the NL 51N-DPL
device and to the Ethernet port of the configuration PC. It is also
possible to connect the NL 51N-DPL and the configuration PC to an
Ethernet switch.
2. Set the IP address of the NL 51N-DPL device
 Set with the Ethernet Device setup software, which is part of the
SYCON.net installation, the IP address for the NL 51N-DPL. With this
software it is also possible to read an already assigned IP address from
the NL 51N-DPL device.
The IP address is required for the communication with the SYCON.net
software.
To communication from the SYCON.net software with the NL 51N-DPL

device, an IP address has to be assigned before to the NL 51N-DPL
device. How to assign an IP address is described in the document
„Ethernet Device Configuration OI xx DE.pdf“.
3. Open the Proxy configuration window

 Select from the context menu of the NL 51N-DPL symbol
Configuration > Proxy
 The Proxy configuration window opens
4. Select driver
 Select in the navigation area Settings > Driver and then check netX
Driver.
 The following figure shows the selected driver.
Figure 110: Select Driver

5. Set the IP search range
 Select in the navigation area Settings > Driver > netX Driver.
 The window for driver settings opens.
An IP address (one) or IP addresses (several, address range) are set in

this window which SYCON.net uses to build up a connection to the proxy
device.
 Select (as shown in the figure above):
Select the tap TCP Connection.
Is the Select IP Range grayed out (as shown above), then no IP
range is defined.
Click on + to add a new range, which enables the field below.
Otherwise an address range configured earlier can be selected or by a
mouse click on + a new address range can be configured. Set the IP
(start) address (and end address) the proxy devices is searched for.
Make sure that the proxy device can be reached via Ethernet and is
reachable via the address range.
 The fields to configure an IP address range are enabled.

 You can enter one IP address of the proxy device at as shown

above or you can set an IP address range by a check at Use IP
Range and set the IP end address at . Make sure that the proxy
device can be reached via Ethernet and is reachable via the address
range.
Note: Set the IP address range not to large, which results in a long scan
time.
 After the address range was set click on Save.


 Click on Scan.
shown above.
 Click on OK


Download
 The configuration is transferred info the proxy device
Note: The device performs a reset after the download. Because of that,
the Ethernet connection gets lost and (has to be stopped from SYCON.net
and then) has to be established again.
Stop the online connection to the device, which was established

automatically to the device before.
Disconnect.
 To establish a connection again, do the steps described in section
Device Assignment on page 69.

3.7.9 Save Project


or click on icon .

3.7.10 Device Description File to configure the PROFINET IO

Controller
A GSDML file is required to configure the PROFINET IO Controller. This file
is creates as follows:
Additional Functions > PROFINET IO Device > Export GSDML.
 The dialog to save the XML file appears.
 Select the directory the GSDML file should be saved into.
 A name for the GSDML file is proposed. Accept it or change it useful.
 Click on Save.
 The GSDML file is saved.
The structure of the file name is:
Fixed prefix
Version number of the GSDML specification
Manufacturer name
Device type
Date: Format yyyymmdd
Time: Format hhmmss
File extension (always): xml
 Use the GSDML file to configure the PROFINET IO Controller

3.7.11 Update Firmware

To update the firmware an Ethernet connection to the device is necessary.
To establish a connection, do the steps described in section Device
Assignment on page 69.
To update the firmware proceed then as follows:

 Select from the context menu of the NL51N-DPL the entry
Configuration > Proxy.
 The following window opens
Figure 115: Firmware update
 Click with the left mouse on Browse

 The file dialog of the operating system opens.
 Select the new firmware file.
 The file name is displayed at .
 Select the new firmware file at . The file name is L51NPSDL.NXF.
 Click with the left mouse on Download.
 The firmware file is transferred into the NL 51N-DPL.
 Close the dialog with OK.

Settings 137/355
4 Settings
4.1 Overview Settings
Settings Dialog Panes
The table below gives an overview for the individual Settings dialog panes
descriptions:
Section Subsection Page
Driver 138
Selecting the Driver 138
Configuring the Driver 139
netX Driver 140
Device Assignment 147
Scanning for Devices 147
Selecting the Device 149
Table 9: Descriptions Settings
Figure 116: Navigation Area - Settings
Note: To edit the Settings dialog panes you need User Rights for
“Maintenance”.

Settings 138/355
4.2 Driver
The devices netTAP NT 100, netTAP NT 151 and netBRICK NB 100 are
configured via an USB interface of the device or diagnosis is performed via
the USB interface. The devices netTAP NT 50 and netLINK NL 51N-DPL
are configured via an Ethernet interface of the device or diagnosis is
performed via the Ethernet interface. Therefore a driver is necessary.
The Driver dialog pane displays the driver/s to be used for a connection
from the gateway DTM to the device.
Figure 117: Driver Selection List
Parameter Meaning
Driver Name of the driver
Version Version of the driver
ID ID of the driver (driver identification)
Table 10: Driver Selection List Parameters
4.2.1 Selecting the Driver

To establish a connection you need to select a driver first.
Note: Not all the drivers displayed necessarily support the device. The
used driver must be supported by the device or must be available for the
device. Use the netX Driver for the devices NT 50, NT 100, NT 151-RE-
RE, NT 151-CCIES-RE, NB 100 and NL 51N-DPL.
To select the driver/s to be used:

1. Select Settings > Driver in the navigation area.
 The available drivers are listed on the Driver dialog pane.
Figure 118: Driver Selection List - recognized or installed Drivers
2. Check the checkbox for the driver/s in the selection list.
Figure 119: Driver Selection List - Driver/s selected

Settings 139/355
4.2.2 Configuring the Driver

All drivers for which you can access to an individual driver dialog pane are
displayed in the navigation area under the Driver entry. In the driver dialog
panes you can configure the driver settings.
Figure 120: Navigation Area – Settings
To configure a driver:
1. Select Settings > Driver > [Name of the driver].
 The corresponding driver dialog pane is displayed.
2. Configure the driver settings.
 To get detailed information how to configure the single drivers, please
refer to the corresponding description of the driver.
You can access to the single descriptions of the drivers as online help via
the DTM user interface (F1 key).
To access to the online help with the descriptions of the drivers:

 Select Settings > Driver > [Name of the driver].
 Press the F1 key.

Settings 140/355
4.2.3 netX Driver

The netX Driver is used to connect the DTM to the device via different
connection types. The DTM communicates with the device via an USB
connection, a serial (RS232) connection or a TCP/IP connection. The netX
Driver establishes
• via the USB interface of the device and the USB port of the PC an USB
connection to the device,
• via the RS232 interface of the device and the COM port of the PC a
serial connection (RS232) to the device
• and via Ethernet a TCP/IP connection to the device.
To connect the DTM to the physical layer of the device the netX Driver
software works in combination with the software components:
• “USB/COM connector” for the USB connection and for the serial
connection (RS232) and
• “TCP/IP connector” for the Ethernet connection.
4.2.3.1 netX Driver - USB/RS232 Connection
Function and use

The communication from the DTM to the device via an USB/RS232
Connection is used when the DTM is installed on a PC and between the
PC and the device
• an USB connection
• or a serial connection (RS232) exists.
The DTM accesses the device via the USB interface or via the RS232
interface. This requires either to connect an USB port of the PC to the USB
interface of the device using an USB cable or to connect a physical COM
port of the PC to the RS232 interface of the device via a serial cable.
The netX Driver / USB/RS232 Connection supports all physical and
virtual COM ports available on the PC.
Via the RS232 interface or USB interface, the device is configured or
diagnosis is performed.

Settings 141/355
Driver Parameters for netX Driver - USB/RS232 Connection

The settings of the driver parameters for the USB/RS232 connection are
made via the netX Driver / USB/RS232 Connection configuration dialog.
 Open the USB/RS232 Connection dialog via navigation area Settings
> Driver > netX Driver.
 The USB/RS232 Connection dialog is displayed:
Figure 121: netX Driver > USB/RS232 Connection
Parameter Meaning Range of Value /

Default Value
Enable USB/RS232 checked: The netX Driver can communicate via the checked,
Connector (Restart of USB/RS232 interface. unchecked;
ODM required) unchecked: The netX Driver can not communicate via the Default:
USB/RS232 interface. unchecked
If the check mark for Enable USB/RS232 Connector is set
or removed, then the ODM server must be restarted1, to
make the new setting valid.
_______
1 Restart the ODM server via the ODMV3 Tray Application:
-In the foot line click on using the right mouse key.
- In the context menu select Service > Start.
Select Port Depending on the COM ports (interfaces) available on the COM 1 to COM N
PC, they will be listed under Select Port.
Port Configuration
Disable Port checked: No connection. checked,
unchecked: The netX Driver tries to establish a connection unchecked (Default)
using the configured USB/RS232 interface.
Baud rate Transfer rate: number of bits per second. 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6 or
The device must support the baud rate. 115.2 [kBit/s];
Default (RS232): 115.2
[kBit/s]
Stop bits Number of stop bits sent after the transfer of the send data Stop bit: 1, 1.5, 2;
for synchronization purposes to the receiver. Default (RS232): 1

Settings 142/355
Default Value
Send Timeout Maximum time before the transfer of the transmission data is 100 … 60.000 [ms];
canceled, when the send process fails, for example, because Default (RS232 and
of the transfer buffer is full. USB): 1000 ms
Reset Timeout Maximum time for a device reset, including the re- 100 … 60.000 [ms];
initialization of the physical interface used for the Default (RS232 and
communication. USB): 5000 ms
Byte size Number of bits per byte by byte specification 7 Bit, 8 Bit;
Default (RS232): 8 Bit
Parity In the error detection in data transmission using parity bits, No Parity,
"parity" describes the number of bits occupied with 1 in the Odd Parity,
transmitted information word. Even Parity,
No Parity: no parity bit Mark Parity,
Odd Parity: The parity is "odd" if the number of bits occupied Space Parity;
with 1 in the transmitted information word will be odd. Default (RS232):
Even parity: The parity is "even" if the number of bits No Parity
occupied with 1 in the transmitted information word will be
even.
Mark Parity: if the parity bit is always 1, this will be named
mark-parity (the bit does not contain any information).
Space Parity: if the parity bit always 0, this will be named
space-parity (the bit represents an empty space).
Keep Alive Timeout The "Keep Alive" mechanism is used to monitor whether the 100 … 60.000 [ms];
connection to the device is active. Connection errors are Default (RS232 and
detected using a periodic heartbeat mechanism. The USB): 2000 ms
heartbeat mechanism will be initiated after the set time has
elapsed if the communication has failed.
Restore Resets all settings in the configuration dialog to the default
values.
Save Saving all settings made in the configuration dialog netX
Driver > Save USB/RS232 Connection, i. e. only for the
selected connection type.
Save All Saving all settings made in the configuration dialog netX
Driver, i. e. for all connection types.
Table 11: Parameters netX Driver > USB/RS232 Connection

Settings 143/355
4.2.3.2 netX Driver - TCP/IP Connection
Function and use

The communication from the DTM to the device via a TCP/IP Connection
is used in the following typical application:
The device has its own Ethernet interface. The DTM is installed on a PC
and the TCP/IP connection is established from this PC to the stand-alone
device. The IP address of the device is used.
Via the TCP/IP interface of the device or of the remote PC, the device is
configured or diagnosis is performed.

Settings 144/355
Driver Parameters for netX Driver - TCP/IP Connection

The settings of the driver parameters for the TCP/IP connection are made
via the netX Driver / TCP Connection configuration dialog.
 Open the TCP Connection dialog via navigation area Settings >
Driver > netX Driver.
 The dialog netX Driver is displayed:
 Select TCP Connection.
Figure 122: netX Driver > TCP Connection

Default Value
Enable TCP Connector checked: The netX Driver can communicate via the TCP/IP checked,
(Restart of ODM interface. unchecked;
required) unchecked: The netX Driver can not communicate via the Default:
TCP/IP interface. unchecked
If the check mark for Enable TCP Connector is set or
removed, then the ODM server must be restarted1, to make
the new setting valid.
_______
1 Restart the ODM server via the ODMV3 Tray Application:
-In the foot line click on using the right mouse key.
- In the context menu select Service > Start.
Select IP Range Via Select IP Range already created IP ranges can be
selected.
Via an additional IP range can be added.
Via an IP range can be deleted.

Scan Timeout [ms] With Scan Timeout can be set, how long to wait for a 10 … 10,000 [ms];
response while a connection is established. Default: 100 ms
IP Range Configuration

Settings 145/355
Default Value
Disable IP Range checked: No connection. checked,
unchecked: The netX Driver tries to establish a connection unchecked (Default)
using the configured TCP/IP interface.
IP Address (left) Enter the IP address of the device, (if Use IP Range is not valid IP address;
checked). Default: 192.168.1.1
Enter the start address of the IP scanning range, (if Use IP
Range is checked).
Use IP Range checked: An IP address range is used. checked,
unchecked: Only one IP address is used. unchecked;
Default:
unchecked
IP Address (right) Enter the ending address of the IP scanning range, (only if valid IP address;
Use IP Range is checked). Default: 0.0.0.0
Address Count Displays the scanning range address count, depending on recommended: 10
the selected IP-start or IP-end address. (For this read the
note given below.)
TCP Port Identifies the endpoint of a logical connection or addresses a 0 – 65535;
specific endpoint on the device or PC. Default Hilscher device:
50111
Send Timeout [ms] Maximum time before the transfer of the transmission data is 100 … 60,000 [ms];
canceled, when the send process fails, for example, because Default (TCP/IP): 1000
of the transfer buffer is full. ms
Reset Timeout [ms] Maximum time for a device reset, including the re- 100 … 99,999 [ms];
initialization of the physical interface used for the Default (TCP/IP):
communication. 20.000 ms
Keep Alive Timeout The "Keep Alive" mechanism is used to monitor whether the 100 … 60,000 [ms];
[ms] connection to the device is active. Connection errors are Default (TCP/IP):
detected using a periodic heartbeat mechanism. The 2000 ms
heartbeat mechanism will be initiated after the set time has
elapsed if the communication has failed.
Restore Resets all settings in the configuration dialog to the default
values.
Save Saving all settings made in the configuration dialog netX
Driver > Save TCP/IP Connection, i. e. only for the selected
connection type.
Save All Saving all settings made in the configuration dialog netX
Driver, i. e. for all connection types.
Table 12: Parameters netX Driver > TCP Connection
Note: Do not use large IP ranges in combination with a low scan timeout. Microsoft
introduced in Windows® XP SP2 a limit of concurrent half-open outbound
TCP/IPconnections (connection attempts) to slow the spread of virus and malware from
system to system. This limit makes it impossible to have more than 10 concurrent half-
open outbound connections. Every further connection attempt is put in a queue and
forced to wait. Due to this limitation a large IP range used in combination with a low scan
timeout could prevent the connection establishment to a device.

Settings 146/355
4.2.4 Configure netX Driver

The following steps are required to configure the netX Driver:
USB/RS232 Connection
To set the driver parameters for an USB/RS232 connection note:
Note: Adjust the driver parameters netX Driver USB/RS232 only if they
differ from the default settings. After saving the changed driver
parameters, these parameters are used for the device assignment when
scanning devices.
For setting the driver parameters for an USB connection or a serial

connection:
1. Select Settings > Driver > netX Driver > USB/RS232 Connection.
 Set the driver netX Driver USB/RS232 parameters.
TCP/IP Connection
For setting the driver parameters for a TCP/IP connection:
1. Select Settings > Driver > netX Driver > TCP Connection.
2. Set IP Address of the device:
 Add an IP Range via Select IP Range .

3. Under IP Range Configuration > IP Address enter the IP Address of
the device (Use IP Range is unchecked).
Or
4. Set IP Range:
 Check Use IP Range.
 Under IP Range Configuration > IP Address enter the start address
(left side) and the ending address of the IP scanning range (right side).
5. Click Save, to save the IP address or the IP range.
 After saving the changed driver parameters, these parameters are used
for the device assignment when scanning devices.

Settings 147/355
4.3 Device Assignment

Note: In the Device Assignment you first must assign the device to the
DTM by checking the check box. This is essential to establish an online
connection from the DTM to the device later, as described in section
Connecting/Disconnecting Device on page 288.
Therefore in the Device Assignment dialog pane you scan for the
device(s) and select it.
4.3.1 Scanning for Devices

1. Select Settings > Device Assignment in the navigation area.
 The dialog pane Device Assignment is displayed.
Figure 123: Device Assignment - detected Devices
2. Select the list box entry suitable only.

3. Select the Scan button, to start the scanning process.
 Under Device Selection all devices are displayed, which can be
connected to the DTM via the preselected driver.

Settings 148/355

Value
Device selection Selecting suitable only or all devices. suitable only, all
Device Device name.
Hardware Port Shows, which hardware is assigned to which communication
0/1/2/3 interface.
Slot number Shows the Slot Number (Card ID) preset at the cifX card via 1 to 9,
the Rotary Switch Slot Number (Card ID). n/a
The indication n/a means, that no Slot-Nummer (Karten-ID)
exists. This occurs, if the cifX card is not equipped with a
Rotary Switch Slot Number (Card ID) or for cifX cards
equipped with a Rotary Switch Slot Number (Card ID), if the
rotary switch is set to the value 0 (zero) or all other device
types.
Serial number Serial number of the device
Driver Name of the driver
Channel Protocol Shows, which firmware is loaded to which device channel.
The data for the used channel consists of the protocol class
and the communication class.
a.) For devices without firmware: Undefined Undefined,
b.) For devices with firmware: Protocol name corresponding
to the used Firmware
Access path Depending on the used driver in the column Access path Depending on the
(under Device different data to the device are displayed. device and on the
selection last For the cifX Device Driver the following data are displayed: driver:
column on the a.) For devices without firmware: …\cifX[0toN]_SYS, board or channel
right) b.) For devices with firmware: …\cifX[0toN]_Ch[0to3]. number, IP address
cifX[0toN] = Board number 0 to N or COM interface
Ch[0to3] = Channel number 0 to 3
Access path If under Device selection the check box for a device is driver identification
(at the lower side checked, under Access path (at the lower side of the dialog (ID)
of the dialog pane) the driver identification or depending on the used driver depending on the
pane) additional data to the device. device and on the
For the cifX Device Driver the following data are displayed: driver:
a.) For devices without firmware: …\cifX[0toN]_SYS, board or channel
b.) For devices with firmware: …\cifX[0toN]_Ch[0to3]. number, IP address
cifX[0toN] = Board number 0 to N or COM interface
Ch[0to3] = Channel number 0 to 3
Table 13: Parameters of the Device Assignment

Settings 149/355
4.3.2 Selecting the Device

Note: A connection with the DTM can only be established with one
device.
To select the physical EtherNet/IP Scanner device (with or without

firmware):
1. In the Device Assignment pane in the selection list Device selection
check the check box for the device.
Figure 124: Device Assignment - Selecting the Device
 Under Access path (below in the dialog pane) the access path to the
device, e. g. the driver identification, or depending on the used driver
additional access data of the device are displayed.
2. Select the Apply button, to apply the selection.

Configuration 150/355
5 Configuration
5.1 Overview Configuration
Configuration Dialog Panes
The table below gives an overview for the Configuration dialog panes
descriptions:
Section Page
Settings 151
Licenses 153
Signal Mapping 166
Memory Card Management 173
Table 14: Descriptions of the Dialog Panes Configuration
Figure 125: Navigation Area – Configuration
The following table shows the configuration panes for each device type.
Device Type Configuration
NT 50 as gateway
NT 100 as gateway
NT 100 as proxy
NB 100 as gateway
NT 151-RE-RE as gateway
NT 151-CCIES-RE as gateway
NL 51N-DPL as proxy
Table 15: Navigation Area – Configuration – Device-dependent

5.2 Settings
In the Settings pane you can:
• select the protocol for Port X2 respectively for Port X3,
• transfer the firmware into the device,
• set the cycle time of the Gateway and
• enable the address switch for a slave protocol.
Figure 126: Settings
No. Name Description

General
Description Here you can enter a descriptive name also known as symbolic name for the
device. This name ist displayed in front of the device.
Protocol Combination
Primary network (Port X2) Here you can select the protocol for the primary network, which becomes active
on port X2.
Secondary network (Port Here you can select the protocol for the secondary network, which becomes
X3) active on port X3.

No. Name Description
Required gateway The required gateway device is shown here after you have select the protocols
at and .
It is also possible to select the gateway device first. Then you can select at
and protocols that are suitable for this gateway device.
Required license If you have selected a protocol with master functionality at and / or , then
the number of master licenses required in the device is displayed here. How to
order and transfer master licenses is described in section Licenses on
page 153.
Available Firmware Available firmware files for the selected protocols are listed in this area.
The firmware files are stored in the SYCON.net installation directory of the PC
in the sub folder “\netGatewayDTM\Firmware\“.
Browse Browse opens a dialog to select a firmware file. The selected firmware file is
shown in area .
Download Download transfers the selected firmware file into the device, which is selected
in area . This is possible even when no protocols have been selected at
and .
Software class The Software class of the selected firmware is displayed (for information only).
Software version The firmware version of the selected firmware is displayed.
Basic Settings
Mapping Cycle time 1 – 1000 ms (Default = 1 ms, is the cycle time for the device internal transfer of
the input and output data from the buffer of port X2 to the buffer of X3 and visa
versa.
Mapping mode Always default (only displayed).
Netzwork Address Switch

enable Not checked (default): The address is set by the configuration software and
transferred by a download into the device.
Checked: The address is used from the slave protocol, which is set by the
rotary switches at the device and can be used fort he following protocols:
- CANopen Slave (to set the node address),
- CC-Link Slave (to set the station address),
- DeviceNet Slave (to set the MAC-ID) and
- PROFIBUS DP Slave (to set the station address).
Firmware version 1.1 (or higher) is required for the netTAP NT 50 device.
Firmware version 1.5 (or higher) is required for netTAP NT 100 device.
The address set and downloaded by the configuration software is always used
for master protocols.
Used by When two slave protocols are used, then you have to set if the address
switches are valid for the primary network or for the secundary network .
Common Buttons
OK The current settings are saved and then the dialog window is closed.
Cancel The changed settings are discarded and then the dialog window is closed.
Apply The current settings are saved and the dialog window stays open.
Help Opens the online help in a separate window.
Table 16: Settings

5.3 Licenses
Using the license dialog, you can order licenses for Master protocols or
Utilities and download them to your device.
5.3.1 Open License Dialog
Note: A connection to the device is necessary to open the license dialog.
1. Open the configuration dialog

 Select from the context menu of the netTAP respectively netBRICK
symbol Configuration > Gateway respectively Configuration > Proxy.
 The configuration dialog opens.
2. Open license dialog

 Select in the navigation area under the folder Configuration the entry
Licensing.
 The license dialog opens.

5.3.2 License Dialog

In the License1 pane you can:
• check, which licenses for Master protocols or Utilities are present in the
device (Position in the figure below),
• order licenses (Positions to ),
• transfer licenses to the device .
Figure 127: License Pane
Note: To display further entries under License Type, move the scroll box
downwards or upwards. To display further entries under Request
Form, please fill out, move the scroll box downwards or upwards.
__________________________________________
1 The title bar contains the notation of the device description:

Symbolic Name [Device Description] <Station Address > (#Network ID).

5.3.3 Which Licenses are present in the Device?

Check, which licenses are present in the device.
How to proceed:
 Open the License pane as described.
Figure 128: License Pane - License Type
 Under License Type click at Master protocols.

 The Master protocols overview opens:
Figure 129: License Pane – License Type / Master protocols
 Or click at Utilities.
 The Utilities overview opens:
Figure 130: License Pane – License Type / Utilities
 The column Existing indicates which licenses are present in the device.
Yes = License is present in the device.
No = License is not present in the device.
Note: In newer versions of the present configuration software under
License Type may be displayed additional licenses or other protocols that
can be ordered later.

5.3.3.1 License for Master Protocols

One General Master License:
On the device maximally 1 communication protocol with master function
can be implemented.
Two General Master Licenses:
On the device maximally 2 communication protocols with master function
can be implemented.
The license includes the following Master protocols:
• AS-Interface Master
• CANopen Master
• DeviceNet Master
• EtherCat Master
• EtherNet/IP Scanner
• PROFIBUS Master
• PROFINET IO RT Controller
• Sercos Master
5.3.3.2 License for Utilities

• SYCON.net
• OPC Server
• QVis Minimum Size
• QVis Standard Size
• QVis Maximum Size
• CoDeSys Minimum Size
• CoDeSys Standard Size
• CoDeSys Maximum Size
For the utilities QVis and CoDeSys, only one license each may be chosen
alternatively as:
• Minimum Size,
• Standard Size or
• Maximum Size.

5.3.4 How to order a License

To order a license, proceed as follows:
Refer to Section: Page
1. Open the license dialog. Open License Dialog 153
2. Select the required licenses. Selecting License 157
3. Enter the ordering data. Ordering Data 158
4. Place your order. Ordering the License 160
5.3.5 Selecting License(s)

You can select licenses for Master protocols and / or utilities.
1. Selecting license(s) for Master protocol(s):
 Under License Type click at Master protocols in the License pane.
 Under Order check as many licenses must run simultaneously on your
device:
One General Master License or
Two General Master Licenses.
2. And/or select license(s) for utility(utilities):

 In the License pane under License Type click at Utilities.
 Under Order check the required utility(utilities)
(single or several)2:
• SYCON.net
• OPC Server
• QVis Minimum Size*
• QVis Standard Size*
• QVis Maximum Size*
• CoDeSys Minimum Size**
• CoDeSys Standard Size**
• CoDeSys Maximum Size**
2 For *) and **) minimum size, standard size or maximum size can be selected only as
an alternative.

5.3.6 Ordering Data
1. Device Information
 The Device Information required for the order are read from the device
and automatically filled in the order.
2. Ordering Data
Enter the Ordering Data into the License pane.
 Enter the Data to manage the Order.
5.3.6.1 Device Information (Ordering data read from the Device)

The following ordering data are read from the device and displayed in the
License pane:
• Manufacturer
• Device number
• Serial number
• Chiptype
• Step (chip revision)
• Romcode revision
• Checksum (checksum of the device data)
 The gray fields under Request Form, please fill out contain the
ordering data read from the device:
Figure 131: License Pane - Request Form, please fill out / Device Information
 These ordering data read out from the device are displayed
automatically from the device.

5.3.6.2 Data to manage the Order (License Information)

For your order you must enter the following data to the License pane:
1. License Type (User Single Device License).
Figure 132: License Pane - Request Form, please fill out / License Type
 Select the license type under Request Form, please fill out > Value,
(for future application, currently only User Single Device License can be
selected).
2. Mandatory data to the order request (editable fields):
• First Name
• Surname
• E Mail (address, to which the license download link shall be send.)
• Telephone
• Company
• Address
• Country
• City, State, Zip
Figure 133: License Pane - Request Form, please fill out / Mandatory data
 Enter all mandatory fields under Request Form, please fill out > Value
(marked with*).
3. Additional order data, not mandatory (editable fields):
• Fax
• Customer Number
• Order Number
• Value added tax identification number
 Under Request Form, please fill out > Value enter all fields for the
additional data, which are not mandatory.

5.3.7 Ordering the License

Place your order in the License pane. Therefore:
Figure 134: License Pane – Selecting the Subsidiary / Ordering / Contacts
1. Select the Subsidiary , to which the order shall be send.

2. Place the order:
Refer to Section: Page

• by E-Mail , Ordering the License by E Mail 161
• or by Fax Ordering the License by Fax or 162

by Telephone
or by Telephone ,
• or in a File . Exporting License Request to 164
a File
 The Contact Data of the selected subsidiary are displayed under

Position , and .

5.3.7.1 Ordering the License by E Mail

You can place your order by e-mail.
Figure 135: License Pane – placing the order by E-mail
 Click E-mail… .
 The order E-mail License request opens:
Figure 136: Example: Order E-Mail License request
 The order e-mail License request contains:

• the E-mail… of the selected subsidiary ,
• the automatically generated XML file EmailOrderRequest_-

[Devicenumber]_[Serialnumber].xml with a summary info of the order
information,
• the Order Address ,
• the License Information ,
• the License Type ,
• the Device Data ,
• the ordered Licenses .
 Send the order e-mail License request.

 The order process is complete.

5.3.7.2 Ordering the License by Fax or by Telephone

You can place your order by Fax or by Telephone.
Figure 137: License Pane - placing the order by Fax or by Telephone
 Click Print Fax Form or Telephone… .

 The summary of the ordering data PrintOrderRequest_[Devicenum-
ber]_[Serialnumber].html is opened in a browser window.
Note: If your browser does not display the order data or the window Move
Element or Copy Element are displayed, check the safety settings of
your system.
Figure 138: Example: Order Data Form PrintOrderRequest

 The order data form contains:

 the Order Address ,
 the License Information ,
 the License Type ,
 the Device Data ,
 the ordered Licenses .
 Print the order data form, sign it and send it by Fax.
Figure 139: License Pane – Fax Number of the selected Subsidiary
 Use the Fax number , which is displayed after the subsidiary was
selected in the License pane.
Or:
 Keep ready the order data form and communicate the order data via
telephone.
Figure 140: License Pane – Telephone Number of the selected Subsidiary
 Use the telephone number , which is displayed after the subsidiary

was selected in the License pane.

5.3.7.3 Exporting License Request to a File

If you are working on a process computer without an e-mail client, you can
export your order information to a file, save the file to a removable disk and
place your order manually via e-mail from a different PC.
Figure 141: License Pane - Ordering by exported File and E-Mail
 Click Export License Request… .

 The window Browse For Folder is displayed.
 Choose for or create a new folder on a removable disk.
 Save the automatically generated XML file EmailOrderRequest_-
[Devicenumber]_[Serialnumber].xml with a summary info of the order
information to this folder.
 Send this file from a PC with an e-mail client manually via e-mail.
 Therefore, use an e-mail address, which is displayed after the
subsidiary was selected in the License pane (see Position Figure
License Pane).

5.3.8 How to get the License and transfer it to the Device
Note: License files can only be delivered via e-mail. The e-mail contains a
link to download the license file.
According to the license you ordered, you will receive an e-mail containing
a Link to download the License File. This leads to a server PC on which
the license file is provided. Using the received link you will have to save the
license file on your PC and then transfer the license to your device. If your
e-mail client is on another PC as your device, you must save your license
file e. g. to an USB stick.
Steps how to proceed

1. Save the license file to a PC or a disk.
 Click to the Link to download the License File in the e-mail.
 Save the license file *.nxl to a PC or a removable disk.
2. Download the license file to the device.

 Respectively connect the removable disk with the license file to the PC,
which is connected to your device.
 Click Download License in the License pane in the configuration
software.
Figure 142: License Pane - Download License
 The File selection window Open is displayed.

 Therein select the license file netX License Files (*.nxl).
 Click Open.
 The license file is transferred to the device.
 After this the license is present in the device and is activated with the
next device reset.
3. Activate Device Reset
Hint: To activate the license in the first device, a device reset is required.
 To check whether the license has been activated, follow the steps in
section Which Licenses are present in the Device?

5.4 Signal Mapping

The signal mapping determines which user data of the primary network are
assigned to which user data of the secondary network and vice versa.
The signal mapping is relevant for the gateway devices netTAP NT 50,
NT 100, NT 151-RE-RE and netBRICK NB 100. The mapping of the data
for gateway devices can be done by the user und be configured within
SYCON.net. The mapping of data is already specified for proxy devices
and done automatically by SYCON.net.
With the mapping for gateway devices

• the received data from the primary network are mapped to the send data
of the secondary network,
• the received data from the secondary network are mapped to the send
data of the primary network,
• status information of the primary network is mapped to the send data of
the secondary network,
• status information of the secondary network is mapped to the send data
of the primary network.
With this mapping a device internal list in generated. The device work each
x ms through this list and copies the data.

On the pane I/O Data Mapping you can map the I/O Data of port X2 to the
I/O data of port X3.
Figure 143: Signal Mapping
The I/O mapping is done the following way:

Data transfer from Port X2 to Port X3
signals, which should be send on Port X3 (Port X3 send).
 For this, mark the signal received (Port X2) and the signal to be send
Or
(Port X2 receive) and drop it on the signal to be send (Port X3 send)

Data transfer from Port X3 to Port X2
signals, which should be send on Port X2 (Port X2 send).
 For this, mark the signal received (Port X3) and the signal to be send
Or
(Port X3 receive) and drop it on the signal to be send (Port X2 send)
Transfer status info of Port X2 to Port X3

which are generated device internal) to signals which should be send
on Port X3 (Port X3 send)
send (Port X3) and click the button Map Signals
Or
(Port X2 generated) and drop it on the signal to be send (Port X3 send)
Transfer status info of Port X3 to Port X2

which are generated device internal) to signals which should be send
on Port X2 (Port X2 send)
send (Port X2) and click the button Map Signals
Or
(Port X3 generated) and drop it on the signal to be send (Port X2 send)
Auto mapping
The signal mapping can also be done automatically be the configuration
software. Set Auto Mapping to From Port X3 to Port X2 and then click on
Apply. The automatic signal mapping is done.

5.4.1 Status Information

The status of the remote network coupled by the netTAP NT 100 can be
mapped into the I/O data. It contains the items shown in the figures for
master and slave and are described below.
Figure 144: Status information of the Master
Figure 145: Status information of the Slave
Some status information belong to the master firmware and to the slave
firmware status and are marked with “Master and Slave”), others belong
only to the master firmware status and are marked with “Master”.
Number of Active Slaves (Master)

The firmware maintains a list of slaves within the remote network to which
the remote network’s master has successfully opened a connection. Ideally,
the number of active slaves is equal to the number of configured slaves.
This field holds the number of active slaves.

Communication Change of State (Master and Slave)
The communication change of state register contains information about the
current operating status of the communication channel and its firmware.
31 30 … 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
COMM_COS_READY
COMM_COS_RUN
COMM_COS_BUS_ON
COMM_COS_CONFIG_LOCKED
COMM_COS_CONFIG_NEW
COMM_COS_RESTART_REQUIRED
COMM_COS_RESTART_REQUIRED_ENABLE
unused, set to zero
Table 17: Communication Change of State
The Communication Change of State Flags have the following meaning:

Status Meaning
Ready (Bit 0) The Ready flag is set as soon as the protocol stack is started properly. Then the protocol
stack is awaiting a configuration. As soon as the protocol stack is configured properly, the
Running flag is set, too.
Running (Bit 1) The Running flag is set when the protocol stack has been configured properly. Then the
protocol stack is awaiting a network connection. Now both the Ready flag and the
Running flag are set.
Bus On (Bit 2) The Bus On flag is set to indicate to the host system whether or not the protocol stack
has the permission to open network connections. If set, the protocol stack has the
permission to communicate on the network; if cleared, the permission was denied and
the protocol stack will not open network connections.
Configuration Locked The Configuration Locked flag is set, if the communication channel firmware has locked
(Bit 3) the configuration database against being overwritten. Re-initializing the channel is not
allowed in this state.
Configuration New (Bit 4) The Configuration New flag is set by the protocol stack to indicate that a new
configuration became available, which has not been activated. This flag may be set
together with the Restart Required flag.
Restart Required (Bit 5) The Restart Required flag is set when the channel firmware requests to be restarted.
This flag is used together with the Restart Required Enable flag below. Restarting the
channel firmware may become necessary, if a new configuration was downloaded from
the host application or if a configuration upload via the network took place.
Restart Required Enable The Restart Required Enable flag is used together with the Restart Required flag above.
(Bit 6) If set, this flag enables the execution of the Restart Required command in the netX
firmware.

Communication State (Master and Slave)

The communication state field contains information regarding the current
network status of the communication channel of the remote network.
Depending on the implementation of the protocol stack of the remote
network, all or a subset of the definitions below is supported.
Status Value
Unknown 0
Offline 1
Stop 2
Idle 3
Operate 4
Communication Channel Error (Master and Slave)

This field holds the current error code of the communication channel of the
remote network. If the cause of error is resolved, the communication error
field is set to zero again.
All values different from 0 indicate that an error has occurred.
Errors may be signaled either from the operating system rcX or from the
used protocol.
Number of Configured Slaves (Master)

The firmware maintains a list of slaves within the remote network to which
the master has to open a connection. This list is derived from the
configuration database created by SYCON.net. This field holds the number
of configured slaves.
Error Count (Master and Slave)

This field holds the total number of errors detected since power-up within
the remote network, respectively after reset. The protocol stack counts all
sorts of errors in this field no matter if they were network related or caused
internally. After power cycling, reset or channel initialization this counter is
being cleared again.
Error Log Indicator (Master and Slave)

Note: This field is not yet supported.

Number of Faulted Slaves (Master)

If a slave of the remote network encounters a problem, it can provide an
indication of the new situation to the master in certain Fieldbus systems. As
long as those indications are pending and not serviced, this field holds a
value unequal to zero. If no more diagnostic information is pending, the
field is set to zero.
Host Watchdog (Master and Slave)

Slave Error Log Indicator (Master)

Slave State (Master)

The slave state field indicates whether the master of the remote network is
in cyclic data exchange to all configured slaves. In case there is at least
one slave missing or if the slave has a diagnostic request pending, the
status is set to FAILED. For protocols that support non-cyclic
communication only, the slave state is set to OK as soon as a valid
configuration is found.
Status Value
Undefined 0
Ok 1
Failed 2
Version (Master and Slave)

The version field holds the version number of this structure. The value is 1.
Watchdog Timeout (Master and Slave)

This field holds the configured watchdog timeout value of the protocol stack
of the remote network. The value is specified in milliseconds.

5.5 Memory Card Management

Note: This function is only available for netTAP NT 100, NT 151-RE-RE
and NT 151-CCIES-RE devices, because only they have an MMC card
slot.
In the Memory Card management pane you can:

• backup the firmware and the configuration from the netTAP device to an
MMC memory card
• restore the firmware and the configuration from the MMC memory card
into the netTAP device
On the pane MMC Management you can backup and restore the firmware
and the configuration to respectively from an MMC card.
The Folder on the pane shows the directory structure of the file system of
the netTAP device named SYSVOLUME and if an MMC card is inserted
also the directory structure of the MMC card named SDMMC.
Backup: To backup the firmware and configuration files insert a formatted

(Format FAT) MMC card into the MMC slot of the netTAP device. When the
directory named SDMMC is shown, then click on the button Backup to
copy the firmware and configuration files from the netTAP device to the
MMC card.
Restore: To load the firmware and configuration files from an MMC card
into the netTAP device, insert an MMC card into the MMC slot of the
netTAP device which contains the firmware and configuration files. When
the directory named SDMMC is shown, then click the button Restore to
copy the firmware and configuration files from the MMC card into the
netTAP device.

5.6 Configuration EtherCAT Master

The netTAP NT 100 device respectively the NT 151-RE-RE respectively
the netBRICK NB 100 device as EtherCAT Master needs a configuration, e.
g. information about how many EtherCAT Slave devices with how many
input and output data are to be connected.
1. Insert EtherCAT Slave devices

 Drag from the device catalog EtherCAT Slave device(s) and drop it to
the bus line of the EtherCAT Master.
2. Configure EtherCAT Slave devices

 Open the configuration dialog for each EtherCAT Slave device and
configure the device.
Information about how to configure the EtherCAT Slave device is in the
operating instruction manual „Generic DTM for EtherCAT Slave
devices“ and has the file name EtherCAT_GenericSlave_DTM_en.pdf
respectively open in the configuration dialog of the slave the online help
by the F1 key.
3. Configure EtherCAT Master

 Select from the context menu of the netTAP respectively the netBRICK
symbol the entry Configuration > EtherCAT Master
Information about how to configure the EtherCAT Master device is in
the operating instruction manual „DTM for EtherCAT Master devices“
and has the file name EtherCAT_Master_DTM_en.pdf respectively
open in the configuration dialog of the master the online help by the F1
key.

5.7 Configuration EtherCAT Slave

Devices acting as EtherCAT Slaves need parameters.
This section describes how to set EtherCAT Slave parameters for the
netTAP NT 100 device, NT 151-RE-RE device respectively the netBRICK
NB 100 device.

symbol the entry Configuration > EtherCAT Slave
 The EtherCAT Slave configuration dialog opens.
 In the navigation area the entry Configuration under the folder
Configuration is selected and the configuration dialog is displayed.
2. Set number of Input Data Bytes and Output Data Bytes

 Enter in the field Input Data Bytes the number of bytes the EtherCAT
Master should send to the netTAP or netBRICK device, e. g. 32
 Enter in the field Output Data Bytes the number of bytes the EtherCAT
Master should receive from the netTAP or netBRICK device, e. g. 64
3. Set more parameter.

 If necessary, set more parameter. The parameter are described in the
following section EtherCAT Slave Parameter on page 176.
Note: Default values can be used normally for the other parameters.
Depending on additionally requirements and the design of the EtherCAT
network as well as the used devices parameters needs to be adjusted if
necessary.
4. Open the signal configuration dialog.

Signal Configuration.
 The signal configuration dialog opens.
5. Signal configuration
 If you want to assign own signal names, then enter your signal names..
Further information is described in section Signal Configuration on
page 283.
6. Close configuration dialog

 Click on OK to save the parameter or click on Cancel, if the parameter
should not be saved.
 The configuration dialog closes

5.7.1 EtherCAT Slave Parameter
Parameter Meaning Range of Value/Value

Interface
Bus Startup Communication start application controlled or automatic Automatic,
Application controlled
Default: Automatic
For NT151-RE-RE:
Watchdog Time This function is not supported by gateway or proxy devices. [0, 20 … 65535] ms,
[ms] default = 1000 ms,
0 = Off
I/O Data Status Status of the input or the output data. None, (1 Byte, 4 Byte)
For each input and output data the following status information (in Byte) is Default: None
memorized in the dual-port memory:
Status 0 = None (default)
Status 1 = 1 Byte (for future use)
Ident
Enabled If ‘Enabled’ is unchecked, for the single Ident parameters each the
respective default value is used.
Vendor ID Identification number of the manufacturer 0x00000000 ...
0xFFFFFFFF (hex)
Primary Hilscher
Vendor ID:
0x00000044 (hex)
Default: Secondary
Hilscher Vendor ID:
0xE0000044 (hex)
Product Code Product code of the device as specified by the manufacturer 0x00000000 ...
0xFFFFFFFF (hex),
Default:
NT 100-RE/ECS:
0x0000000D (hex),
NB 100-RE/ECS:
0x00000019 (hex)
Revision Revision number of the device as specified by the manufacturer 0x00000000 ...
Number 0xFFFFFFFF (hex),
Default:
0x00000000 (hex)
Serial Number Serial number of the device 0x00000000 ...
0xFFFFFFFF (hex)
Data
Input Data Length of the input data in Byte 0 … 200 Byte
Bytes Default: 200 Byte
Output Data Length of the output data in Byte 0 … 200 Byte
Bytes Default: 200 Byte
Table 18: EtherCAT Slave Parameters

5.7.2 Settings at the used EtherCAT Master

Device Description File
To configure the EtherCAT Master an XML file (device description file) is
required. The XML file is stored on the Gateway Solutions DVD in the
directory Electronic Data Sheets (e.g.
EDS,GSD,GSDML)\EtherCAT:
Device XML File
NT 100-RE-XX Hilscher NT 100-ECS-XX V2.2.xml
NB 100-RE-XX Hilscher NB 100-ECS-XX V2.2.xml
NT 151-RE-RE Hilscher NT 151-ECS-XX V4.2.X.xml
Table 19: XML File Names for netTAP and netBRICK
Configuration
Note: The settings in the used Master must comply with the settings in the
Slave, to establish a communication. Important parameters are: Vendor
ID, Product Code, Serial Number, Revision Number, Output and Input
length.
In order that the EtherCAT Master can communicate with the netTAP or
netBRICK device as EtherCAT Slave:
 Enter at the EtherCAT Master the number of data bytes (number of
input data), that are configured in the netTAP or netBRICK device, e. g.
64.
 Enter at the EtherCAT Master the number of data bytes (number of
output data), that are configured in the netTAP or netBRICK device, e.
g. 32.
 You can set at the EtherCAT Master, if the Master verifies identification
numbers of the EtherCAT Slave. This verification can be activated or
deactivated at the EtherCAT Master. If the verification is used, then use
respectively check the following values:
Device Product code Revision number Vendor

(ProductCode) (RevisionNo) (Vendor ID)
NT 100-RE-XX 13 (0x000D)
0 (0x0000)
NB 100-RE-XX 25 (0x0019) 68 (0x0044)
NT 151-RE-RE 53 (0x0035) 131076 (0x020004)
Table 20: Identification parameters in EtherCAT XML Files

5.8 Configuration EtherNet/IP Scanner

The netTAP NT 50, NT 100 device respectively the NT 151-RE-RE device
respectively the netBRICK NB 100 device as Ethernet/IP Scanner needs a
configuration, e. g. information about how many Ethernet/IP Adapter
devices with how many input and output data are to be connected.
1. Insert Ethernet/IP Adapter devices.

 Drag from the device catalog Ethernet/IP Adapter device(s) and drop it
to the bus line of the Ethernet/IP Scanner.
2. Configure Ethernet/IP Adapter devices

 Open the configuration dialog for each Ethernet/IP Adapter device and
Information about how to configure the Ethernet/IP Adapter device is in
the operating instruction manual „Generic DTM for EtherNet/IP Adapter
devices“ and has the file name
EtherNetIP_GenericAdapter_DTM_en.pdf respectively open in the
configuration dialog of the slave the online help by the F1 key.
3. Configure Ethernet/IP Scanner

symbol the entry Configuration > Ethernet/IP Scanner
Information about how to configure the Ethernet/IP Scanner device is in
the operating instruction manual „DTM for EtherNet/IP Scanner devices“
and has the file name EtherNetIP_Scanner_DTM_en.pdf respectively
key.

5.9 Configuration EtherNet/IP Adapter

Devices acting as EtherNet/IP Adapters need parameters.
This section describes how to set EtherNet/IP Adapter parameters for the
netTAP NT 100 device, NT 151-RE-RE device respectively the netBRICK
NB 100 device.

symbol the entry Configuration > EtherNet/IP Adapter
 The EtherNet/IP Adapter configuration dialog opens.
Configuration is selected and the settings dialog is displayed.
2. EtherNet/IP Adapter Parameter

To set a fix IP address:
 Deselect the flag DHCP and BootP.
 Select IP address Enable and enter a valid IP address for the netTAP or
netBRICK device.
 Select netmask enable and enter a valid netmask.
 If needed: Select the gateway enable and enter a valid IP address for
the gateway.
3. Set length produced and consumed data length

 Enter in the field produced data length the number of data bytes the
EtherNet/IP Scanner should receive from the netTAP or netBRICK
device, e.g. 64 bytes
 Enter in the field consumed data length the number of data bytes the
EtherNet/IP Scanner should send to the netTAP or netBRICK device,
e.g. 32 bytes
4. Set more parameter

following section EtherNet/IP Adapter Parameter on page 181 .

Depending on additionally requirements and the design of the EtherNet/IP
necessary.
5. Open the signal configuration dialog

 The signal configuration dialog opens
 If you want to assign own signal names, then enter your signal names.
Further information is described in section Signal Configuration on page
283 .


5.9.1 EtherNet/IP Adapter Parameter

Interface
Bus startup Communication start application controlled or automatic Automatic,
Default: Automatic
For NT151-RE-RE:
Watchdog time This function is not supported by gateway or proxy devices. [0, 20 … 65535] ms,
0 = Off
I/O data status Status of the input or the output data. Default: None
For each input and output data the following status information (in Byte)
is memorized in the dual-port memory:
Ident
Enable If ‘Enable’ is unchecked, for the single Ident parameters each the
0x0000FFFF (hex),
Hilscher:
0x00000011B (hex)
Product Code Product code of the device as specified by the manufacturer 0x00000000 ...
0x0000FFFF (hex),
Default
NT 50-EN/EIS:
0x000000113 (hex),
NT 100-RE/EIS:
0x00000010F (hex),
NB 100-RE/EIS:
0x000000111 (hex)
Product Type Communication Adapter 0x00000000 ...
0x0000FFFF (hex),
Default:
0x00000000C (hex)
Major revision Major revision of the EtherNet/IP Adapter device according to the 0 ... 255,
EtherNet/IP specification. Default: 1
Minor revsion Minor revsion of the EtherNet/IP Adapter device according to the 0 ... 255,
EtherNet/IP specification. Default: 1
Device name Device name of the device station as character string, 0 - 31 ASCII characters,
e. g. EtherNet/IP Adapter (Slave). Examples: NT 50-EN/EIS,
NT 100-RE/EIS,
NB 100-RE/EIS
Bus
IP Address Valid IP Address for the device Valid IP address
If ‘Enable’ is unchecked (Default setting), the device obtains its IP Default: unchecked
Address from a DHCP server or also from a BOOTP server, if this one is
checked.
If ‘Enable’ is checked, the device uses the manually entered value.
Netmask Valid Network mask for the device Valid network mask
If ‘Enable’ is unchecked (Default setting), the device obtains its Netmask Default: unchecked
from a DHCP server or also from a BOOTP server, if this one is checked.

Gateway Valid Gateway Address for the device Valid gateway address
If ‘Enable’ is unchecked (Default setting), the device obtains its Gateway Default: unchecked
Address from a DHCP server or also from a BOOTP server, if this one is
checked.
There are three methods available, how the device can obtain its
IP Address, Netmask and Gateway Address, one of which must be
selected.
These methods can also be combined.
The device performs the following sequence in order to obtain the
addresses:
1. from a DHCP server if DHCP is checked (if a DHCP server provides
the requested addresses to the device, then the device uses these
addresses)
2. from a BootP server if BootP is checked (if a BootP server provides
addresses)
3. the addresses manually set are used. If the IP Address is set manually
also the Network Mask must be set manually. The manually set Gateway
Address is optional.
If no DHCP server and no BootP server and no manually set addresses
exist, then the protocol is not ready for initialization or for operation.
Extras BootP: Default: unchecked
If checked, the device obtains its IP Address, Netmask, Gateway
Address from a BOOTP server.
DHCP: Default: checked
If checked, the device obtains its IP Address, Netmask, Gateway
Address from a DHCP server.
100Mbit: Speed Selection, Default: unchecked
If checked, the device will operate at 100 MBit/s, else at 10 MBit/s. This
parameter will not be in effect, when auto-negotiation is active.
FullDuplex: Duplex Operation, Default: unchecked
If checked, full-duplex operation will be used. The device will operate in
half-duplex mode, if this parameter is set to zero. This parameter will not
be in effect, when auto-negotiation is active.
Auto-neg.: Auto-Negotiation, Default: checked
If checked, the device will auto-negotiate link parameters with the remote
hub or switch.
Data
Produced data Maximum allowed length of the input data in Byte. This parameter should 0 … 504 Byte
length be equal to or higher than the complete projected input data length, Default: 32 Byte
otherwise the EtherNet/IP device will reject the cyclic communication
requests.
Consumed data Maximum allowed length of the output data in Byte. This parameter 0 … 504 Byte
length should be equal to or higher than the complete projected output data Default: 32 Byte
length, otherwise the EtherNet/IP device will reject the cyclic
communication requests.
Table 21: EtherNet/IP Adapter Parameters (Part 2)

5.9.2 Settings at the used EtherNet/IP Scanner

To configure the Scanner an EDS file (device description file) is required.
The XML file is stored on the Gateway Solutions DVD in the directory
Electronic Data Sheets (e.g. EDS,GSD,GSDML)\EtherNetIP:
Device EDS File
NT 50-XX-EN or NT 50-EN-XX HILSCHER NT 50-EN EIS V1.1.EDS
NT 100-RE-XX HILSCHER NT 100-RE EIS V1.1.EDS
NB 100-RE-XX HILSCHER NB 100-RE EIS V1.1.EDS
NT 151-RE-RE HILSCHER NT 151-RE-RE EIS V1.1.EDS
Table 22: EDS File Names for netTAP and netBRICK
Configuration
Note: The settings in the used Scanner must comply with the settings in
the Adapter, to establish a communication. Important parameters are:
Input, Output length, Vendor ID, Product Type, Product Code, Major Rev,
Minor Rev, IP Address and Netmask.
In order that the EtherNet/IP Scanner can communicate with the netTAP or
netBRICK device as EtherNet/IP Adapter:
 Enter at the EtherNet/IP Scanner the IP address of the netTAP or
netBRICK device.
 Use at the EtherNet/IP Scanner the instance ID 101, to receive data
from the netTAP or netBRICK device.
 Enter at the EtherNet/IP Scanner for this instance ID (101) the number
of data (number of receive data bytes), which were configured in the
netTAP or netBRICK device, e. g. 64.
Note: Some EtherNet/IP Scanners need for setting this value (number of
receive data) a value increased by 4 (this is the length of the Run/Idle
header, that can be transferred in front of the user data). With the example
of 64 bytes above therefore 68 (64 + 4) needs to be set for the number of
data.
 If adjustable at the EtherNet/IP Scanner, set that the EtherNet/IP

Scanner sends the 32-Bit Run/Idle header.
 Use at the EtherNet/IP Scanner the instance ID 100, to send data to the
netTAP or netBRICK device.
 Enter at the EtherNet/IP Scanner for this instance ID (100) the number
of data (number of send data bytes), which were configured in the
netTAP or netBRICK device, e. g. 32.
 If adjustable at the EtherNet/IP Scanner, set that the EtherNet/IP
Scanner receives the 32-Bit Run/Idle header.

 You can set at the EtherNet/IP Scanner, if the Scanner verifies
identification numbers of the EtherNet/IP Adapter (named keying). This
verification can be activated or deactivated at the EtherNet/IP Scanner.
If the verification is used, then use or check for the following values:
Device Product code Vendor Product type Major revision Minor revision
(ProdCode) (VendCode) (ProdType) (MajRev) (MinRev)
NT 50-XX-EN; 275 (0x0113)
NT 50-EN-XX
NT 100-RE-XX 271 (0x010F) 283 (0x011B) 12 (0x000C) 1 1
NB 100-RE-XX 273 (0x0111)
NT 151-RE-RE 288 (0x0120)
Table 23: Identification parameters in EtherNet/IP EDS Files

5.10 Configuration Open Modbus/TCP

The netTAP NT 50, NT 100 and NT 151-RE-RE device respectively the
netBRICK NB 100 device as Open Modbus/TCP needs parameter. The
device can either work as a Client or as a Server.
These parameter can be edited as follows:
symbol the entry Configuration > Open Modbus/TCP
 The Open Modbus/TCP settings dialog opens.
2. Set protocol mode

 Set the Protocol Mode to "I/O Server", if the netTAP or netBRICK
device should work as Open Modbus/TCP Server
 Set for the Protocol Mode to "Client", if the netTAP or netBRICK
device should work as Open Modbus/TCP Client
 If you have set the Protocol Mode to "Client", then the entry
Command Table appears in the navigation are
3. Open Modbus/TCP Parameter

To set a fix IP address:
 Deselect the flag DHCP and BootP.
 Select IP address Enable and enter a valid IP address for the NT 100
device.
 Select netmask enable and enter a valid netmask.
 If needed: Select the gateway enable and enter a valid IP address for
the gateway.
Depending on additionally requirements and the design of the Ethernet
necessary. Further information is described in section Open Modbus/TCP
Parameter on page 187.

4. Command Table
 If you have set the Protocol Mode to "Client", then select in the
navigation area the entry Command Table. Specify in the Command
Table which data the Open Modbus/TCP Client has to transfer to and
from the Open Modbus/TCP Server by reading or writing. The
Command Table is described in detail in section Open Modbus/TCP on
page 189.
Note: To know, which data address with which data of the Open
Modbus/TCP Server devices is provided for reading or for writing, refer to
the device description of the Open Modbus/TCP Server device
manufacturer.

Further information is described in section Signal Configuration page
283 .


5.10.1 Open Modbus/TCP Parameter

Interface
Default: Automatic
For NT151-RE-RE:
Watchdog time This function is not supported by gateway or proxy devices. [0, 20 … 65535] ms,
0 = Off
Protocol mode Mode of data exchange: 'Client' (Message Mode) or 'IO Server' IO Server (default),
For the 'Client' mode in the navigation area 'Command Table' is displayed. Client
For the Open Modbus/TCP Client the Command Table is a list with
commands for the reading or writing of data.
For the 'IO Server' mode, the communication partner has read/write access
to the process data memory of the device from outside using of the function
codes.
Data swap Data-storage mode: Yes, No,
No: Data will not be swapped Default:: Yes
Yes: Data will be swapped.
Map FC1 If ‚unchecked’, data are read from the intput area using FC1, FC3 and FC23. checked,
and FC3 If checked, data are read from the output area using FC1, FC3 and FC23. unchecked,
FC1 then can be used instead of FC2 and FC3 instead of FC4. Default: unchecked
Bus
Provided server Number of sockets to provide for server requests* Sockets: 0 ... 16,
connections *A value of 0 means that the Open Modbus/TCP task exclusively works as TCP Client. A value of Default: 4
16 means that the Open Modbus/TCP task exclusively works as Server in the Message-Mode.
With the default value 4 there are 4 Server connections provided. Then still up to 12 TCP client
connections are available.
The parameters ‘Send Acknowledgement Timeout’ (Send Timeout), ‘Connect Acknowledgement
Timeout’ (Connect Timeout) and ‘Close Acknowledgement Timeout’ (Close Timeout) are for the
Timeout between the Open Modbus/TCP Task and the TCP Task.
Client Only for client jobs in Message Mode (packet mode). The connection to the 100 ... 6,000,000 ms,
connection destination-device stays open, until timeout is expired. Default: 1000 ms
watchdog time Note: This timeout starts, after receiving the answer to a command
For interface programming via Open Modbus/TCP, the value for Client
Connection Watchdog Time (Omb Open Time) must be divided by the factor
of 100. (Value range for the interface programming: 1 ... 60,000)
Response Only for client jobs in Message Mode (packet mode). After expiration of this 100 ... 6,000,000 ms,
timeout time, the job will be canceled and an error is send to the application. Default: 2,000 ms
Note: This timeout starts after command is send to the destination device via
TCP.
For interface programming via Open Modbus/TCP, the value for Response
Timeout must be divided by the factor of 100. (Value range for the interface
programming: 1 ... 60,000)
Send Parameter for TCP task (in milliseconds) . Used OMB task internal. It 0 ... 2,000,000,000 ms,
acknowledge- specifies the timeout for trying to send messages via TCP/IP Default: 31,000 ms
ment timeout If the value 0 is selected, the default value of 31,000 milliseconds is used.
Connect Parameter for TCP task (in milliseconds). Used OMB task internal. It 0 ... 2,000,000,000 ms,
acknowledge- specifies the timeout for trying to establish a connection with the TCP task. Default: 31,000 ms
Close Parameter for TCP task (in milliseconds). Used OMB task internal. It 0 ... 2,000,000,000 ms,
acknowledge- specifies the timeout for trying to close a connection with the TCP task. Default: 13,000 ms
IP address Valid IP address for the device Valid IP address
If ‘Enable’ is unchecked (Default setting), the device obtains its IP Address Default: unchecked
from a DHCP or BOOTP server.

Net mask Valid Network mask for the device Valid network mask
If ‘Enable’ is unchecked (Default setting), the device obtains its Netmask Default: checked
from a DHCP or BOOTP server.
Gateway Valid Gateway address for the device Valid gateway address
If ‘Enable’ is unchecked (Default setting), the device obtains its Gateway Default: unchecked
Address from a DHCP or BOOTP server.
IP Address, Netmask and Gateway Address, one of which must be selected.
addresses:
1. from a DHCP server if DHCP is checked (if a DHCP server provides the
requested addresses to the device, then the device uses these addresses)
2. from a BootP server if BootP is checked (if a BootP server provides the
requested addresses to the device, then the device uses these addresses)
Extras BootP: Default: unchecked.
If checked, the device obtains its IP Address, Netmask, Gateway Address
from a BOOTP server.
DHCP: Default: unchecked.
If checked, the device obtains its IP Address, Netmask, Gateway Address
from a DHCP server.
Table 24: Open Modbus/TCP Parameters

5.10.2 Open Modbus/TCP Client

5.10.2.1 For what does the Command Table serve?
For the Open Modbus/TCP Client the Command Table is a list with
The Command Table is only relevant, if a device works as Client on the
Open Modbus/TCP.
From every command line the Open Modbus/TCP Client produces a
telegram for reading or for the writing of data to or from an Open
Modbus/TCP Server device. For every command are indicated:
• the Open Modbus/TCP Server device address (Device Address),
• the Unit identifier (to identify a remote Server via gateway),
• the Function code,
• the data address in the Open Modbus/TCP Server device (Address),
• the number of data (Number of Registers/Coils),
• and the data address in the Open Modbus/TCP Client device (Memory
Address (internal)).
For writing telegrams (FC 5, 6, 15 and 16) in the column
• Trigger
you can decide, whether the writing telegrams are executed every time
(Cyclic) or only at data modification (Change data).
Furthermore
• a Cycle Time
can be set for every command.
The Command Table is processed from the first to the last entry (from
above to below). After the execution of the last command the execution of
the first command is started again.
For reading commands the Open Modbus/TCP Client reads out data from
the Open Modbus/TCP Server and saves them into its data memory.
For writing commands the Open Modbus/TCP Client reads out data from its
data memory and writes them into the Open Modbus/TCP Server.
The number of commands which can be defined depends from the
firmware and from the Dual-Port Memory layout.
For Open Modbus one connection per IP address is established. In
maximum 16 Client connections can be supported. In this case the
parameter Open Server Sockets must be set from 4 (Default) to 0.

5.10.2.2 Parameter of the Command Table
Figure 146: Pane Command Table
Each command contains the following parameters:

Parameter Description
Device Address Open Modbus/TCP Server IP address
Unit Identifier to identify a remote Server via gateway
Function Code Function code
Address data address in the Open Modbus/TCP Server device
Number of Registers/Coils Number of data
Memory Address (internal) Data address in the Open Modbus/TCP Client device
(= Byte address in the process image of the Open Modbus/TCP Client device)
Trigger Trigger for writing commands
Cycle Time Cycle time
Table 25: Parameter of the Command Table


Device Address Specifies the Open Modbus/TCP Server device address, from For Open Modbus/TCP:
which the Open Modbus/TCP Client device reads out the data or 000.000.000.000-
into which it writes the data. 255.255.255.255,
Default: 000.000.000.000
Unit Identifier To identify a remote Server connected on a serial line or on other 0 … 247,
buses. Default: 0
The Unit Identifier is initialized by the Client. Do not change for
response!
Function Code Indicates the function code for reading or writing commands [3]: 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 15 / 16
Read Coils(FC1) Default: „Read Coils
Read Inputs(FC2) (FC1)“
Read Holding Registers(FC3)
Read Input Registers(FC4)
Force Single Coil(FC5)
Preset Single Register(FC6)
Force Multiple Coils(FC15)
Preset Multiple Registers(FC16)
Address Indicates the data address in the Open Modbus/TCP Server device. 0 … 65.535
The parameter Address contains the register address in the Open Default: 0
Modbus/TCP Server device. The register address is counted for
every function code beginning with 0.
The following table shows the assignment of the Address to the
data address in the Open Modbus/TCP Server by Function code:
Data Address Open Modbus/TCP
Parameter
Server
Address
FC 1 FC 2 FC 4 FC 3
FC 5 FC 6
FC 15 FC 16
0 1 10001 30001 40001
1 2 10002 30002 40002
2 3 10003 30003 40003
3 4 10004 30004 40004
4 5 10005 30005 40005
… … … … …
To know, which data address with which data of the Open

Modbus/TCP Server devices is provided for reading or for
writing, refer to the device description of the Open
Modbus/TCP Server device manufacturer.
Number of Indicates the number of reading or writing data as registers or coils. 1 … max. value, Default: 1
Registers/Coils The maximum value depends from the function code. max. value for
FC1 = 2000 (Coils),
FC2 = 2000 (Coils),
FC3 = 125 (Registers),
FC5 = 1 (Coils),
FC15 = 1968 (Coils),
FC16 = 123 (Registers)
Memory Byte address in the process image of the Open Modbus/TCP Client 0 … 5759
Address device for input or output data of the Client Default: 0
(internal) The configuration software calculates the byte address in the
process image of the Client for the input or for the output data
automatically. Because of this definition, for function codes for
reading (FC 1, 2, 3 and 4) the data are assigned consecutively in
the process image for input data and for function codes for writing
(FC 5, 6, 15 and 16) the data are assigned consecutively in the
process image for output data.

Trigger Defines for all function codes for writing (FC 5, 6, 15 and 16); if the 0 = Cyclic
command is to be executed cyclically (Cyclic) or only if the data 1 = Changed Data
have changed (Change Data). Default: „Cyclic“
For function codes for reading (FC 1, 2, 3 und 4) this parameter is
not used.
Cycle Time The cycle time defines, after how many milliseconds a writing or a 0, 10, 20, 30, … 60.000
reading command shall be reexecuted. ms
The default value „0 ms“ means, that the command is executed as Default: 0 ms
fast as possible. Otherwise the execution can be defined in steps of
10 ms.
With the cycle time the temporal execution of the command can be
influenced.
If since the last execution of the command the set cycle time or
more time has been passed, the command is reexecuted.
If since the last execution of the command less time has been
passed then the cycle time, the command is skipped.
If e. g. from a Open Modbus/TCP Server data are required only
every 10 seconds, as these one change only slowly, then for the
cycle time enter 10.000 ms.
Delay Between the single commands a delay time can be parameterized. 0 … 60.000 ms
This sometimes is necessary to avoid a too high load of the Default: 0
connected Server devices by a continuous communication.
0: The commands are processed without delay.
1 … 60.000 ms: Delay time in ms, the Open Modbus/TCP Client
waits, before starting the next command.

5.10.2.3 Adding/removing Command
To add or to remove data sets for commands to the Command Table,

proceed as follows:
Add command:
 In the table Command Table put the cursor in the line below which a
new data set for a command shall be added.
 Click Add.
 Under the clicked line a new command is added.
Remove command:
 In the table Command Table put the cursor in the line with the data set
to be deleted.
 Click Remove.
 The command of the clicked line is not shown any more.
5.10.2.4 Setting Parameters
Important: When entering the parameters, make sure that these address
valid data registers. (Refer to the device description of the Open
Modbus/TCP Server device manufacturer.)
To set the single parameters in the Command Table, proceed as follows:
1. Device Address, Function Code, Address, Number of

Registers/Coils:
The fields for these parameters are editable.
 Enter the values for these parameters to the corresponding table cells.
2. Trigger:
 In Function Code field select an entry for a writing command (FC 5, 6,
15 or 16).
 In the column Trigger select the entry „Cyclic“ or „Change Data“.
3. Cycle Time:
 Put the cursor to the table cell and set the cycle time using the spin
box in steps of 10 ms.

5.10.2.5 Examples Open Modbus/TCP Reading or Writing Command
Figure 147: Examples - Reading Command with FC 3, Writing Command with FC16
Example Reading Command with FC 3: From the Open Modbus/TCP

Server device with the Modbus address 8 from data address 40011
onwards 12 registers are read by function code 3. The data are assigned to
the memory address (internal) 0.
Example Writing Command with FC 16: To the Open Modbus/TCP Server
with the Modbus address 8 from data address 40031 onwards 12 registers
are written by function code 16. The data are read from the process image
of the Client from the memory address (internal) 0 onwards. The writing
process is only performed, if the data in the process image of the Client on
the memory addresses (internal) 0 to 3 have changed, as the parameter
trigger is set to 'changed'.

5.10.3 Open Modbus/TCP Server

Settings at the used Open Modbus/TCP Client
In order that the Open Modbus/TCP Client can communicate with the
netTAP or netBRICK device as an Open Modbus/TCP Server:
 Enter at the Open Modbus/TCP Client the IP address of the netTAP or
netBRICK device.
 Use at the Open Modbus/TCP Client port number 502 an. Port 502 is
used by the netTAP or netBRICK device to receive and send Open
Modbus telegrams.
 Use at the Open Modbus/TCP Client function code 1, 2, 3, 4 or 23* to
read data from the netTAP or netBRICK device. The following
description shows the data assignment. (* function code 23 also writes
data into the device).
 Use at the Open Modbus/TCP Client function code 5, 6, 15, 16 or 23* to
write data into the netTAP or netBRICK device. The following
description shows the data assignment. (* function code 23 also reads
data from the device).
The Open Modbus/TCP Client can access to the netTAP or netBRICK
device as an Open Modbus/TCP Server using function codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, 15, 16 and 23.
Figure 149: Access of the Open Modbus/TCP Client to the netTAP and netBRICK Device
Registers (16 bit value) and coils (1 bit value) share the same memory for
input data (IN). Registers (16 bit value) and coils (1 bit value) share the
same memory for output data (OUT). The following tables (Table 27 and
Table 32) show the data assignment.

Adressing types of Open Modbus/TCP Clients

Open Modbus/TCP Clients of different manufacturers use different
addressing types. The modicon-based addressing is very popular. Other
Open Modbus/TCP Clients use a zero-based addressing and again other
Open Modbus/TCP Clients use one-based addressing.
Note: Read the documentation of the used Open Modbus/TCP Client to
find out the used addressing of this system.
Modicon-based addressing: If function code 3, 6, 16 and 23 is used, the

first register (16 bit value) has address 40001, the second register has
address 40002 etc. If function code 4 is used, the first register has address
30001, the second register has address 30002 etc. If function code 1, 5 and
15 is used, the first coil (1 bit value) has address 1, the second coil has
address 2 etc. If function code 2 is used, the first coil has address 10001,
the second coil has address 10002 etc.
The following table shows the address assignment for registers and coils
for modicon-based Open Modbus/TCP Clients. The setting “Map FC 1 and
FC 3” is not set in the configuration of the netTAP or netBRICK device in
this case.
IN netTAP or Coil Register OUT netTAP Coil Register
netBRICK FC 1, FC 3, or netBRICK FC 2 FC 4
(Mapping) FC 5, FC 6, (Mapping)
FC 15 FC 16,
FC 23
IN 0 1 … 16 40001 OUT 0 10001 … 10016 30001
IN 1 17 … 32 40002 OUT 1 10017 … 10032 30002
IN 2 33 … 48 40003 OUT 2 10033 … 10048 30003
… … … … … …
IN 624 9985 … 9999 40625 OUT 624 19985 … 19999 30625
… - … … -
IN 2879 - 42880 OUT 2879 - 32880
Table 27: Access of the Open Modbus/TCP Client using Modicon-based Addressing (1)
for modicon-based Open Modbus/TCP Clients. The setting “Map FC 1 and
FC 3” is set in the configuration of the netTAP or netBRICK device in this
case.
IN netTAP Coil Register OUT netTAP Coil Coil Register Register
or FC 5, FC 6, or netBRICK FC 1 FC 2 FC 4 FC 3,
netBRICK FC 15 FC 16, (Mapping) FC 23
(Mapping) FC 23 (read)
(write)
IN 0 1 … 16 40001 OUT 0 1 … 16 10001 … 10016 30001 40001
IN 1 17 … 32 40002 OUT 1 17 … 32 10017 … 10032 30002 40002
IN 2 33 … 48 40003 OUT 2 33 … 48 10033 … 10048 30003 40003
… … … … … … … …
IN 624 9985 … 9999 40625 OUT 624 9985 … 9999 19985 … 19999 30625 40625
… - … … - - … …
IN 2879 - 42880 OUT 2879 - - 32880 42880
Table 28: Access of the Open Modbus/TCP Client using Modicon-based Addressing (2)

Zero-based addressing: The first register (16 bit value) as well as the first
coil (1 bit value) has address 0, the second register as well as the first coil
has address 1 etc. independed of the used function code.
for zero-based Open Modbus/TCP Clients. The setting “Map FC 1 and
this case.
FC 15 FC 16,
FC 23
IN 0 0 … 15 0 OUT 0 0 … 15 0
IN 1 16 … 31 1 OUT 1 16 … 31 1
IN 2 32 … 47 2 OUT 2 32 … 47 2
… … … … … …
IN 624 9985 … 9998 624 OUT 624 9985 … 9998 624
… - … … - …
IN 2879 - 2879 OUT 2879 - 2879
Table 29: Access of the Open Modbus/TCP Client using Zero-based Addressing (1)
for zero-based Open Modbus/TCP Clients. The setting “Map FC 1 and
case.
netBRICK FC 5, FC 3, or netBRICK FC 1, FC3,
(Mapping) FC 15 FC 6, (Mapping) FC 2 FC 4,
FC 16, FC 23 (lesen)
FC 23
(schreiben)
IN 0 0 … 15 0 OUT 0 0 … 15 0
IN 1 16 … 31 1 OUT 1 16 … 31 1
IN 2 32 … 47 2 OUT 2 32 … 47 2
… … … … … …
IN 624 9985 … 9998 624 OUT 624 9985 … 9998 624
… - … … - …
IN 2879 - 2879 OUT 2879 - 2879
Table 30: Access of the Open Modbus/TCP Client using Zero-based Addressing (2)

One-based addressing: The first register (16 bit value) as well as the first
for one-based Open Modbus/TCP Clients. The setting “Map FC 1 and
this case.
IN netTAP Coil Register OUT netTAP Coil Register
netBRICK FC 1, FC 3, netBRICK FC 2 FC 4
FC 15 FC 16,
FC 23
IN 0 1 … 16 1 OUT 0 1 … 16 1
IN 1 17 … 32 2 OUT 1 17 … 32 2
IN 2 33 … 48 3 OUT 2 33 … 48 3
… … … … … …
IN 624 9986 … 9999 625 OUT 624 9986 … 9999 625
… - … … - …
IN 2879 - 2880 OUT 2879 - 2880
Table 31: Access of the Open Modbus/TCP Client using One-based Addressing (1)
for one-based Open Modbus/TCP Clients. The setting “Map FC 1 and
case.
IN netTAP Coil Register IN netTAP Coil Register
netBRICK FC 5, FC 3, netBRICK FC 1, FC3,
FC 16, FC 23 (read)
FC 23 (write)
IN 0 1 … 16 1 OUT 0 1 … 16 1
IN 1 17 … 32 2 OUT 1 17 … 32 2
IN 2 33 … 48 3 OUT 2 33 … 48 3
… … … … … …
IN 624 9986 … 9999 625 OUT 624 9986 … 9999 625
… - … … - …
IN 2879 - 2880 OUT 2879 - 2880
Table 32: Access of the Open Modbus/TCP Client using One-based Addressing (2)
5.10.4 Modbus References

[1] MODBUS Application Protocol Specification V1.1, http://www.modbus.org/,
12/06/02
[2] MODBUS Messaging on TCP/IP Implementation Guide V1.0b, October 24, 2006
[3] MODBUS APPLICATION PROTOCOL SPECIFICATION V1.1a, June 4, 2004,
http://www.Modbus-IDA.org

5.11 Configuration POWERLINK Controlled Node

Devices acting as POWERLINK Controlled Nodes need parameters.
This section describes how to set POWERLINK Controlled Node
parameters for the netTAP NT 100 and the NT 151-RE-RE device,
respectively the netBRICK NB 100 device.

symbol the entry Configuration > POWERLINK Controlled Node
 The POWERLINK Controlled Node configuration dialog opens.
2. Set Node-ID
 Enter in the field Node-ID the address, which the netTAP or netBRICK
device uses on the POWERLINK network to be addressed by the
POWERLINK Managing Node.
3. Set input data length and output data length

 Set in the field Input Data Length the number of data bytes the netTAP
or netBRICK device should receive from the POWERLINK Managing
Node
 Set in the field Output Data Length the number of data bytes the
netTAP or netBRICK device should send to the POWERLINK Managing
Node
4. Enable PDO Mapping Version Check

 Uncheck the field Disable PDO Mapping Version Check

following section POWERLINK Controlled Node Parameter on page 201
.

Depending on additionally requirements and the design of the
POWERLINK network as well as the used devices parameters needs to
be adjusted if necessary.

page 283.


5.11.1 POWERLINK Controlled Node Parameter

Interface
Default: Automatic
For NT151-RE-RE:
Watchdog time [ms] This function is not supported by gateway or proxy devices. [0, 20 … 65535] ms,
default = 1000 ms,
0 = Off
For each input and output data the following status information (in
Byte) is memorized in the dual-port memory:
Disable host- Decides, whether host-triggered update for input data exchange is Default: unchecked
triggered input data enabled (hook checked) or disabled (hook unchecked).
exchange
Disable host- Decides, whether host-triggered update for output data exchange is Default: unchecked
triggered output data enabled (hook checked) or disabled (hook unchecked).
exchange
Ident
0xFFFFFFFF (hex),
Hilscher:
0x00000044 (hex)
Serial number Serial number of the device 0x00000000 ...
0xFFFFFFFF (hex),
Default
0x00000000 (hex)
Product code Product code of the device as specified by the manufacturer 0x00000000 ...
0xFFFFFFFF (hex),
Default:
NT 151-RE-RE/PLS:
0x00000023 (hex)
NT 100-RE/PLS:
0x00000018 (hex),
NB 100-RE/PLS:
0x00000017 (hex)
Revision number Revision number of the device as specified by the manufacturer 0x00000000 ...
0xFFFFFFFF (hex),
Default
NT 151-RE-RE/PLS,
NT 100-RE/PLS,
NB 100-RE/PLS:
0x00000000 (hex)
Bus
Node Id EPL Node ID (EPL = Ethernet POWERLINK) 1...239, Default: 1
DNS node name DNS-compatible name of the POWERLINK Controlled Node/Slave
(optional)
Gateway address Gateway address for IP stack Default:
192.168.100.254
Data

Input data bytes Length of the input data in byte 1… 1490 Byte,
Default: 4 Byte
Output data bytes Length of the output data in byte 1… 1490 Byte,
Default: 4 Byte
Disable PDO Decides, whether PDO mapping version is checked (hook checked) or Default: checked
mapping version not checked (hook unchecked).
check Select for netTAP and netBRICK devices always unchecked.
Configure default Decides, whether default objects are created (hook checked) or not Default: checked
objects (hook unchecked).
If the objects will be created, the old set of previously existing objects
will be cleared
Delete application Decides, whether application objects are deleted (hook checked) or not Default: checked
objects (hook unchecked). When ’Configure Default Objects’ is checked, then
the firmware automatically does a ’Delete Application Objects’.
Table 33: POWERLINK Controlled Node/Slave Parameters

5.11.2 Settings at the used POWERLINK Managing Node

To configure the Managing Node a XDD file (device description file) is
required. The XML file is stored on the Gateway Solutions DVD in the
EDS,GSD,GSDML)\POWERLINK:
Device XDD File
NT 151-RE-RE 00000044_NT151PLS-64O_64I.xdd for 64 byte output and 64 byte
input data.
00000044_NT151PLS-512O_512I.xdd for 512 byte output and 512
byte input data.
NT 100-RE-XX 00000044_NT100PLS-64O_64I.xdd for 64 byte output and 64 byte
input data.
00000044_NT100PLS-512O_512I.xdd for 512 byte output and 512
byte input data.
NB 100-RE-XX 00000044_NB100PLS-64O_64I.xdd for 64 byte output and 64 byte
input data.
00000044_NB100PLS-512O_512I.xdd for 512 byte output and 512
byte input data.
Table 34: XDD File Names for netTAP and netBRICK
Configuration
Note: The settings in the used Managing Node must comply with the
settings in the Controlled Node, to establish communication. Important
parameters are: Vendor ID, Product Code, Revision Number, Node ID,
Output and Input length.
In order that the POWERLINK Managing Node can communicate with the
netTAP or netBRICK device as POWERLINK Controlled Node:
 Enter at the POWERLINK Managing Node the Node-ID, which is
configured in the netTAP or netBRICK device.
 Enter for the length of output data in the POWERLINK Managing Node
as set in the netTAP or netBRICK device for the Output Data Bytes.
 Enter for the length of input data in the POWERLINK Managing Node
as set in the netTAP or netBRICK device for the Input Data Bytes.
 Optional: The POWERLINK Managing Node can verify identification
numbers of the netTAP or netBRICK device as POWERLINK Controlled
Node. In case the POWERLINK Managing Node verifies identification
numbers, use the following values for the netTAP or netBRICK device:
Device Product code Vendor Revision number
NT 100-RE-XX 35 (0x23) 68 (0x44) 0
NT 100-RE-XX 24 (0x18)
NB 100-RE-XX 23 (0x17)
Table 35: Identification parameters in POWERLINK XDD Files

5.12 Configuration PROFINET IO Controller

The netTAP NT 50, NT 100 device respectively the NT 151-RE-RE device
respectively the netBRICK NB 100 device as PROFINET IO Controller
needs a configuration, e. g. information about how many PROFINET IO
Device devices with how many input and output data are to be connected.
1. Insert PROFINET IO Device devices

 Drag from the device catalog PROFINET IO Device device(s) and drop
it to the bus line of the PROFINET IO Controller.
2. Configure PROFINET IO Device devices

 Open the configuration dialog for each PROFINET IO Device device
and configure the device.
Information about how to configure the PROFINET IO Device device is
in the operating instruction manual „Generic DTM for PROFINET IO
Device devices“ and has the file name
PROFINET_IO_GenericDevice_DTM_en.pdf respectively open in the
3. Configure PROFINET IO Controller

symbol the entry Configuration > PROFINET IO Controller
Information about how to configure the PROFINET IO Controller device
is in the operating instruction manual „DTM for PROFINET IO Controller
devices“ and has the file name PROFINET_IO_Controller_DTM_en.pdf
respectively open in the configuration dialog of the master the online
help by the F1 key.

5.13 Configuration PROFINET IO Device (Gateway)

Devices acting as PROFINET IO Devices need parameters.
This section describes how to set PROFINET IO Device parameters for the
netTAP NT 100 device respectively the netBRICK NB 100 device.
Information on how to set PROFINET IO Device parameters for the

netTAP NT 151-RE-RE device can be found in the Operating Instruction
Manual Generic DTM for PROFINET IO Devices, DOC060305OIxxEN.
This document is stored on the Gateway Solutions DVD in the directory:

symbol the entry Configuration > PROFINET IO Device
 The PROFINET IO Device configuration dialog opens.
2. Set the number of Input Data Bytes and Output Data Bytes
 Enter in the field Input Data Bytes the number of data bytes, which
should be transferred from the PROFINET IO Controller to the netTAP
or netBRICK device, e. g. 32
 Enter in the field Output Data Bytes the number of data bytes, which
should be transferred from the netTAP or netBRICK device to the
PROFINET IO Controller, e. g. 64
3. Station name
The default name for the Name of Station for the NT 50 device is
nt50enpns, for the NT 100 device nt100repns and for the NB 100
device nb100repns. If you need to set an other name of station or you
use several netTAP or netBRICK devices in the PROFINET network,
then set a unique name of station as follows:
 Select Enable in the Ident area.
 Enter in the field Name of Station the name of station, which the netTAP
or netBRICK device should use in the PROFINET network.
 Enter in the field Vendor ID the value 0x011E.
 Enter in the field Device ID for the NT 50 value 0x010F, for the NT 100
value 0x010B respectively for the NB 100 value 0x010E.
 Values in the fields Device Type, Order ID and Type of Station are
optional.

Depending on additionally requirements and the design of the PROFINET
necessary. Further information is described in section PROFINET IO
Device Parameter on page 207.

page 283 .


5.13.1 PROFINET IO Device Parameter

Interface
Default: Automatic,
For NT151-RE-RE:
Watchdog time [ms] This function is not supported by gateway or proxy devices. [0, 20 … 65535] ms, default =
1000 ms, 0 = Off
For each input and output data the following status information
(in Byte) is memorized in the dual-port memory:
Ident
Enable If ‘Enable’ is unchecked, for the single Ident parameters each
the respective default value is used.
Vendor ID Identification number of the manufacturer, assigned by 0x00000000 ...
PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e. V. 0xFFFFFFFF (hex),
Hilscher: 0x00000011E (hex)
Device ID Identification number of the device, fixed for every device. 0x00000000 ...
0x0000FFFF (hex),
Default:
NT 50-EN/PNS (Gateway):
0x0000010F (hex),
NT 100-RE/PNS (Gateway)
0x00000010B (hex),
NT 100_RE/PNS (Proxy)
0x000000106 (hex),
NB 100-RE/PNS (Gateway)
0x00000010E (hex)
Device type Description of the device type, freely eligible Character string,
0 ... 25 characters
Order ID Hilscher device number or order description of the customer Character string,
for its device 0 ... 20 characters
Name of station Station name of the PROFINET IO-Device station. It has to Character string,
match the station name configured in the PROFINET IO- 1 ... 240 characters
Controller for this device. Must be DNS compatible name. Default:
NT 50-EN/PNS (Gateway):
nt50enpns,
NT 100-RE/PNS (Gateway)
nt100repns,
NT 100_RE/PNS (Proxy)
nt100reproxy,
NB 100-RE/PNS (Gateway)
nb100repns
Type of station Type name of the PROFINET station; name can be assigned Character string,
freely. 1 ... 240 characters
Default: Default.Station.Type
Data
Output data bytes Maximum allowed length of the input data in Byte. This 0 … 1024 Byte
parameter should be equal to or higher than the complete Default: 128 Byte
projected input data length, otherwise the IO Device will reject
the cyclic communication requests.
Input data bytes Maximum allowed length of the output data in Byte. This 0 … 1024 Byte
parameter should be equal to or higher than the complete Default: 128 Byte
projected output data length, otherwise the IO Device will
reject the cyclic communication requests.
Table 36: PROFINET IO-Device Parameters

5.13.2 Settings at the used PROFINET IO Controller (Gateway)

To configure the Master a GSDML file (device description file) is required.
The XML file is stored on the Gateway Solutions DVD in the directory
Electronic Data Sheets (e.g. EDS,GSD,GSDML)\PROFINET:
Device GSDML File
NT 50-XX-EN or NT 50-EN-XX GSDML-V2.1-HILSCHER-NT 50-EN PNS-
20100219.xml
NT 100-RE-XX GSDML-V2.1-HILSCHER-NT 100-RE PNS-
20090123.xml
NB 100-RE-XX GSDML-V2.1-HILSCHER-NB 100-RE PNS-
20091112.xml
NT 151-RE-RE GSDML-V2.31-HILSCHER-NT 151-RE-RE PNS-
20151021-1.xml
Table 37: GSDML File Names for netTAP and netBRICK
Note: The GSDML file of the NT 151-CCIES-RE must be exported from

SYCON.net after having configured the device. See section Export Device
Description Files on page 121.
Configuration
Note: The settings in the used Controller must comply with the settings in
the Device, to establish a communication. Important parameters are:
Name of Station, Vendor ID, Device ID, Input and Output data length.
In order that the PROFINET IO Controller can communicate with the

netTAP or netBRICK device as PROFINET IO Device:
Note: Under Name of Station in the PROFINET IO Controller the name

must be used, which was configured in the netTAP or netBRICK device.
 Enter at the PROFINET IO Controller the Name of Station, which is

configured in the NT 100 device.
 Use for the configuration of the PROFINET IO Controller modules e. g.
‚32 Bytes In’, for receiving data from the netTAP or netBRICK device.
Several modules can also be used, e. g. 2 times the module ‚16 Bytes
In’. The number of data (counted in bytes), that results from the used
modules for input data, has to match with the number of input data
 Use for the configuration of the PROFINET IO Controller modules e. g.
‚64 Bytes Out’, for sending data to the netTAP or netBRICK device.
Several modules can also be used, e. g. 4 times the module ‚16 Bytes
Out’. The number of data (counted in bytes), that results from the used
modules for output data, has to match with the number of output data

 The PROFINET IO Controller verifies identification numbers of the

netTAP respectively netBRICK devices. The PROFINET IO Controller
gets these numbers from the GSDML file:
Device Device type (DeviceID) Vendor ID (VendorID)

NT 50-XX-EN; 271 (0x010F) 286 (0x011E)
NT 50-EN-XX
NT 100-RE-XX 267 (0x010B)
NB 100-RE-XX 270 (0x010E)
NT 151-RE-RE 289 (0x0121)
NT 151-CCIES-RE 289 (0x0121)
Table 38: Identification parameters in GSDML Files

5.14 Configuration PROFINET IO Device (Proxy)

The NT 100 device respectively the netLINK NL 51N-DPL device as proxy
with PROFINET IO Device needs parameter.
The number of input and output data for PROFINET IO result from the
configuration of the PROFIBUS by the used PROFIBUS DP slave devices
and the used I/O modules per slave device.
The configuration of the device for PROFINET IO is determined by the
configuration of the PROFIBUS network. In this process the station address
of a PROFIBUS DP slave device is mapped as slot module on PROFINET
IO. The IO module of the respective slave device are mapped on
PROFINET as subslot modules.
Figure 150: PROFINET – PROFIBUS Adress Mapping
Only the name of station needs to be set for the device.

This parameter can be edited as follows:
 Select from the context menu of the netTAP respectively the netLINK
symbol the entry Configuration > PROFINET IO Device
 The PROFINET IO Device configuration dialog opens.
2. Set name of station

The default name for the Name of Station for the NT 100 device as
proxy is “nt100ereproxy” and for the NL 51N-DPL device “nl51ndpl”. If
you need to set an other name of station or you use several netTAP or
netLINK devices in the PROFINET network, then set a unique name of
station as follows:
General.
 Enter in the field Name of Station the name of station, which the
netTAP or netLINK device should use in the PROFINET network.


5.14.1 Settings at the used PROFINET IO Controller (Proxy)

To configure the Master a GSDML file (device description file) is required.
The GSDML file depends on the PROFIBUS DP configuration and is
created by an export function. How to export the GSDML file and the
structure of the GSDML file name is described for the netTAP NT 100 proxy
device in section Device Description File to configure the PROFINET IO
Controller on page 72 and for the netLINK NL 51N-DPL proxy device in
section Device Description File to configure the PROFINET IO Controller on
page 135.
Configuration
Note: The settings in the used Controller must comply with the settings in
the Device, to establish a communication. Important parameters are:
Name of Station, Vendor ID, Device ID, Input and Output data modules.
In order that the PROFINET IO Controller can communicate with the

netTAP or netLINK device as PROFINET IO Device:
Note: Under Name of Station in the PROFINET IO Controller the name

must be used, which was configured in the netTAP or netLINK device.
 Enter at the PROFINET IO Controller the Name of Station, which is

configured in the netTAP or netLINK device.
 Use for the configuration of the PROFINET IO Controller modules
based on the exported GSDML file.
 The PROFINET IO Controller verifies identification numbers of the
netTAP respectively netLINK device: Vendor ID (value 0x011E (286)),
device type (value for NT 100 as proxy is 0x0106 (262), value for
NL 51N-DPL as proxy is 0x0110 (272)). The PROFINET IO Controller
gets these numbers from the exported GSDML file.

5.15 Configuration Sercos Slave

Devices acting as Sercos Slave need parameters.
This section describes how to set Sercos Slave parameters for the netTAP
NT 100 device, NT 151-RE-RE device respectively the netBRICK NB 100
device.

symbol the entry Configuration > SERCOS III Slave
 The Sercos Slave configuration dialog opens.
2. Set Device ID
 Enter in the field Device ID the name, which the netTAP or netBRICK
device uses on the Sercos network to be identified by the Sercos
Master.
3. Accept Vendor Code

 Accept the default Vendor Code 0x000003E8 (1000 dec. = Hilscher).
4. Set Version SCP SYNC

 Set Version SCP SYNC to 0, if the Sercos Master uses the telegram
sequence MDT-AT-NRT.
or
 Set Version SCP SYNC to 1, if the Sercos Master uses the telegram
sequence MDT-NRT-AT.
5. Set Version SCP NRT

 Set Version SCP NRT to 0. Use this setting only.
6. Set Address
 Enter in the field SERCOS III Address the address, which the netTAP
or netBRICK device uses on the Sercos network to be addressed by the
Sercos Master.
7. Set FSP Type

 Set for FSP Type value IO V1. Use this setting only.

8. Set Output Data Size for fixed Configuration

 Set in Output Data Size for FixCfg the number of output bytes, e. g. 2.
9. Set Input Data Size for fixed Configuration

 Set in Input Data Size for FixCfg the number of input bytes, e. g. 2.
10. Set no address change by the master

 Check Master is not allowed to change Sercos address by that the
Sercos Master can’t change the address. Use this setting only.
Note: If you use a Sercos Master which is using SDDML files for the
configuration of slave devices, then you have to export a new updated
SDDML file from SYCON.net and import this SDDML file into the
configuration software for the Sercos Master. By that, the settings made
here can be used at the Sercos Master. Only then the Sercos Master can
communicate to the netTAP device respectively netBRICK device via
Sercos.
11. Export SDDML file

 Click Export SDDML
 The file dialog opens
 Enter the file name for the SDDML file. Use the following structure for
the file name for a better identification: Manufacturer DeviceID output
data size input data size. The file extension is always .xml.
Example: Hilscher NT100-RE_S3S_FIXCFG 2out 2in.xml
 The settings are exported into a device description file.


page 283 .

 The configuration dialog closes.

5.15.1 Sercos Slave Parameter

Interface
Bus Startup Communication start application controlled or automatic Automatic,
Default: Automatic
For NT151-RE-RE:
Watchdog Time This function is not supported by gateway or proxy devices. Default = 0 ms,
[ms] 0 = Off
Ident
Device ID Identification number of the device. This is a unique device ID managed Default: NT_100-
by the vendor and identifies the component number. The device ID is RE_S3S_FIXCFG
fixed for every device.
Device ID according to the sercos third generation specification as
defined in IDN S-0-1300.x.05.
The device ID can be changed by the user, if an other device ID than the
default is useful for the used sercos network.
Note: The device ID is part of the SDDML device description file. If you
use a sercos Master which is using SDDML files for configuration and
the default device ID was changed, then you have to export a new
updated SDDML file from SYCON.net and import this SDDML file into
the configuration software for the sercos Master.
Vendor Code Identification number of the manufacturer, assigned by sercos 0x00000000 ...
International. 0xFFFFFFFF (hex),
Vendor Code according to the sercos third generation specification as Hilscher: 0x0000003E8
defined in IDN S-0-1300.x.03. (hex)
Note: The vendor code is part of the SDDML device description file. If
you use a sercos Master which is using SDDML files for configuration
and the default vendor code was changed, then you have to export a
new updated SDDML file from SYCON.net and import this SDDML file
into the configuration software for the sercos Master.
Version Version of the sercos Communication Profile SYNC 0 ... 1,
of SCP Sync 0 = SYNC deactivated. With this setting the configuration parameter for Default: 0
sercos Communication Profile Class SCP_Sync are not relevant and are
displayed grayed out.
1 = SYNC activates version 1. If the sercos Master uses the telegram
sequence MDT, then NRT and then AT, the gateway/proxy device
requires that the value is set to 1.
Version Version of the sercos Communication Profile NRT Default: 0
of SCP NRT 0 = NRT deactivated. With this setting the configuration parameter for IP
communication are not relevant and are displayed grayed out.
1 = NRT version 1 is activated.
Use always value 0, because the NRT channel is not useable with
gateway/proxy devices.
Bus
Configuration parameter for IP communication
Enabled If ‘Enabled’ is unchecked, for the single Ident parameters each the checked,
respective default value is used. unchecked
IP Address Valid IP address for the device Valid IP address,
If ‘Enabled’ is unchecked (Default setting), the device obtains its IP Default for ‘Enabled’:
Address from a DHCP or BOOTP server. unchecked
If ‘Enabled’ is checked, the device uses the manually entered value.
This function is not supported by gateway/proxy devices.

Netmask Valid Network mask for the device Valid network mask,
If ‘Enabled’ is unchecked (Default setting), the device obtains its Default for ‘Enabled’:
Netmask from a DHCP or BOOTP server. unchecked
Gateway Valid Gateway address for the device Valid gateway address,
If ‘Enabled’ is unchecked (Default setting), the device obtains its Default for ‘Enabled’:
Gateway Address from a DHCP or BOOTP server. unchecked
IP Address, Netmask and Gateway Address, one of which must be
selected.
addresses:
1. from a DHCP server if DHCP is checked (if a DHCP server provides
addresses)
2. from a BootP server if BootP is checked (if a BootP server provides
addresses)
TCP Flags BootP: checked,
If checked, the device obtains its IP Address, Netmask, Gateway unchecked (Default)
Address from a BOOTP server.
DHCP: checked (Default),
If checked, the device obtains its IP Address, Netmask, Gateway unchecked
Address from a DHCP server.
Configuration Parameters of the sercos Communication Profile
Class SCP_Sync
ConClk pulse This timing parameter defines the time how long the communication >= 1000 ns,
length* synchronized hardware output signal CON-CLK is set. The maximum Default RE/S3S devices:
valid value of the „Control Clock Length“ depends on the configured 1000 ns
cycle time. In general the signal CON_CLK must go to inactive again
before the next cycle starts.
DivClk pulse This timing parameter defines the delay time from the start of the 0 ... 16.777.210 ns,
distance * communication cycle to the first pulse of the communication Default RE/S3S devices:
synchronized hardware output signal DIV_CLK. 20000 ns
DivClk Delay * This timing parameter defines the delay time respectively the distance 0 ... 6.710.860 ns,
between two pulses of the communication synchronized hardware output Default RE/S3S devices:
signal DIV_CLK. In the „Divided Control Clock“ Mode1 this parameter is 20000 ns
ignored.
DivClk pulse This timing parameter defines the pulse length, i. e. how long the 1000 ... 20.000 ns,
length * communication synchronized hardware output signal DIV_CLK is set. Default RE/S3S devices:
1000 ns
*All timing values are handled as multiple of 10 ns (e. g. Control Clock
Length = 1005 ns is handled as 1000 ns).
DivClk For „Divided Control Clock“ Mode0: Here the parameter indicates the 0 ... 255,
multiplier number of pulses of the communication synchronized hardware output Default: 2
signal DIV_CLK within a communication cycle.
For „Divided Control Clock“ Mode1: Here the parameter indicates the
number of communication cycles.

DivClk polarity This communication synchronization flag defines the output state of the Disabled, Active-high,
communication synchronized hardware output signal DIV_CLK. Active-low,
Default RE/S3S devices:
Active-high
DivClk mode This communication synchronization flag defines the mode of the Mode 0, Mode 1,
communication synchronized hardware output signal DIV_CLK. Default RE/S3S devices:
Mode 0: The Div_Clk signal becomes active several times within a Mode 1
communication cycle. The following condition must be fulfilled in mode 0:
„Divided Control Clock Length“ + 100 <= „Delay Time of Divided Clock“.
Mode 1: The Div_Clk signal becomes active once after N communication
cycles.
ConClk polarity This communication synchronization flag defines the output state of the Disabled, Active-high,
communication synchronized hardware output signal CON_CLK. Active-low,
Default RE/S3S devices:
Active-high
Slave Configuration
Number of The number of used sercos addresses 1,
Slaves Fixed value for gateway/proxy devices. Default: 1
Slave 1
sercos Address Address for the sercos Slave. 1 … 511,
Default: 1
FSP Type Function Specific Profile Type according to IDN S-0-1302.x.01 FSP Type Default: IO V1
& Version: The FSP Type indicates the function specific type of the
resource.
Supported FSP profiles: FSP_IO, FSP_Drive
FSP IO: A specification for IO Devices,
FSP Drive: A specification for mechanical drives.
Set always FSP IO V1 for gateway/proxy devices.
SCP SCP config type according to sercos third generation specification: Default: Fix. Version 1.1.1
Configuration 0x0101 - SCP_FixCFG Version 1.1.1,
Type 0x0201 - SCP_VarCFG Version 1.1.1,
0x0202 - SCP_VarCFG Version 1.1.3
According to the sercos third generation specification the sercos
Communication Profiles Classes SCP-FixCFG and SCP-VarCFG define
the basic communication and are mutually exclusive.
SCP-FixCFG: Exact two connections are supported, one as consumer
and one as producer. The content of the connections is defined by the
Slave and cannot be changed by the Master.
SCP-VarCFG: A certain number of connections is supported. The Slave
defines this number and provides it to the Master. The content of all
connections has to be configured (e.g. by the Master). The Slave
provides lists of IDNs, that can be cyclically produced and consumed, so
the Master can find it out.
FixCFG Version 1.1.1 is fixed for gateway/proxy devices.
Output Data Output Data Size in Byte 0 … 124 Byte,
Size for Fixed for „SCP Configuration Type“ / „Fix. Version 1.1.1“ Default: 2 Byte
Configuration Note: The output data size is part of the SDDML device description file. If
and the default output data size was changed, then you have to export a
Input Data Size Intput Data Size in Byte 0 … 124 Byte,
for Fixed for „SCP Configuration Type“ / „Fix. Version 1.1.1“ Default: 2 Byte
Configuration Note: The input data size is part of the SDDML device description file. If
and the default input data size was changed, then you have to export a

User SCP Up to 20 User SCP Types are possible. The following User SCP types SCP_WD Version 1.1.1,
Types are already defined: SCP_Diag Version 1.1.1,
0x0401 - SCP_WD Version 1.1.1 for monitoring connections, SCP_RTB Version 1.1.1,
0x0501 - SCP_Diag Version 1.1.1 for bus-diagnosis, SCP_Mux Version 1.1.1,
0x0601 - SCP_RTB Version 1.1.1 for using Real time bits, SCP_Sig Version 1.1.1
0x0901 - SCP_Mux Version 1.1.1 for multiplexed cyclic data,
0x0B01 - SCP_Sig Version 1.1.1 for using signal status/control words
Gateway/proxy devices do not support User SCP Types. Therefore don’t
mark any User SCP Type.
Slave Flags Use a default object dictionary. Default: checked
For gateway/proxy devices this is always checked.
Delete objects created by application on reset. checked,
For gateway/proxy devices this is always checked. Default: checked
Master is not allowed to to change sercos address: checked, unchecked,
enables (unchecked) or disables (checked), that the Master changes the Default: checked
sercos address.
For gateway/proxy devices this must always be checked.
Connection Connection Control Offset for the Slave connections 1, 2, 3 and 4 0 ... 5.758,
Control Offset Connection Control Offset 1 (slave -> master): Default: 0
For gateway/proxy devices use 0,
Connection Control Offset 2 (master -> slave):
Connection Control Offset 3 (not supported):
Connection Control Offset 4 (not supported):
For gateway/proxy devices use 0.
Real Time Data Real Time Data Process Image Offset for the Slave connections 1, 2, 3 0 ... 5.760,
Offset and 4 Default: 2
Real Time Data Offset 1 (slave -> master):
Real Time Data Offset 2 (master -> slave):
Real Time Data Offset 3 (not supported):
Real Time Data Offset 4 (not supported):
For gateway/proxy devices use 0.
Maximum Real Time Data Maximum Length for the Slave connections 1, 2, 3 and 4 Default: 126 Byte
allowed Real Only displayed.
Time Data
Length
Table 39: sercos Slave Parameter

5.15.2 Settings at the used Sercos Master

If you use a Sercos Master which is using SDDML files for the configuration
of slave devices, then export with SYCON.net your settings into a SDDML
file as described in section Configuration Sercos Slave on page 212.
If you use default settings, then you can use the default SDDML file. The
default SDDML files are stored on the Gateway Solutions DVD in the
EDS,GSD,GSDML)\SERCOS_III:
Device XML File
NT 100-RE-XX Hilscher NT100 RE S3S FixCFG FSPIO Default.xml
NB 100-RE-XX Hilscher NB100 RE S3S FixCFG FSPIO Default.xml
NT 151-RE-RE Hilscher NT151 RE S3S FixCFG FSPIO Default
Table 40: XML File Names for netTAP and netBRICK
These device description files includes the following settings:

Gerät DeviceID VendorCode Output data Input data size
size
NT 100-RE-XX NT_100-RE_S3S_FIXCFG
NB 100-RE-XX NB_100-RE_S3S_FIXCFG 1000 (0x03E8) 2 2
NT 151-RE-RE NT_151-RE_RE_S3S_FIXCFG
Table 41: Default settings in Sercos XML Files
If you use these default settings for the netTAP device respectively
netBRICK device, then you can use the SDDML file listed above. If you
have set at least one setting a different value than the default value, then
you have to export the device description file from SYCON.net and import it
into the configuration software of the Sercos Master.
Configuration
Slave to establish communication. Important parameters are: Sercos
address, vendor code, Device ID, FSP type with value IO V1, SCP
configuration type with value FixCFG, the output data size and the input
data size.

5.16 Configuration CANopen Master

The netTAP NT 50-, NT 100 device respectively the netBRICK NB 100
device as CANopen Master needs a configuration, e. g. information about
how many CANopen Slave devices with how many input and output data
are to be connected.
1. Insert CANopen Slave devices

 Drag from the device catalog CANopen Slave device(s) and drop it to
the bus line of the CANopen Master.
2. Configure CANopen Slave devices

 Open the configuration dialog for each CANopen Slave device and
Information about how to configure the CANopen Slave device is in the
operating instruction manual „Generic DTM for CANopen Slave
devices“ and has the file name CANopen_Generic_Slave_DTM_en.pdf
by the F1 key.
3. Configure CANopen Master

symbol the entry Configuration > CANopen Master
Information about how to configure the CANopen Master device is in the
operating instruction manual „DTM for CANopen Master devices“ and
has the file name CANopen_Master_netX_DTM_en.pdf respectively
key.

5.17 Configuration CANopen Slave

The netTAP NT 50 and NT 100 device respectively the netBRICK NB 100
device as CANopen Slave needs parameter.
symbol the entry Configuration > CANopen Slave
 The DeviceNet Slave configuration dialog opens.
2. Set Node-ID
 Enter in the field Node-ID the address, which the netTAP or netBRICK
device uses on the CANopen network to be addressed by the CANopen
Master.
3. Set baudrate
 Set the baudrate for the netTAP or netBRICK device, which is used in
the CANopen network

following section CANopen Slave Parameter on page 220.
Depending on additionally requirements and the design of the DeviceNet
necessary.
Note: The maximum number of output data bytes and input data bytes is
for the netTAP or netBRICK device 512 bytes each. The number of output
data bytes and input data bytes is not adjustable in the Slave and
therefore grayed out in the dialog.
The number of output data bytes and input data bytes, which are to be
transferred effectively between the CANopen Master and Slave, are
configured in the used CANopen Master. The CANopen Master configures
the netTAP or netBRICK device during establishing the communication
and set the number of output data bytes and input data bytes at this same
time.


page 283.


5.17.1 CANopen Slave Parameter

Parameter Meaning Range of
Value/Value
Interface
Bus startup Communication starts automatically Default: Automatic
Watchdog This function is not supported by gateway or proxy devices. [0, 20 … 65535] ms,
time [ms] default = 1000 ms,
0 = Off
I/O Data Status of the input or the output data. Default: None
status For each input and output data the following status information (in Byte) is
Ident
0x0000FFFF (hex),
Hilscher:
0x00000044 (hex)
Product code Product code of the device as specified by the manufacturer 0x00000000 ...
0xFFFFFFFF (hex),
Default:
NT 50-CO/COS:
0x001ACB60 (hex),
NT 100-CO/COS:
0x001A2020 (hex),
NB 100-CO/COS:
0x001B3190 (hex)
Revision Revision number of the device as specified by the manufacturer 0x00000000 ...
number 0xFFFFFFFF (hex),
Default:
0x00020000 (hex)
Serial number Serial number of the device 0x00000000 ...
0xFFFFFFFF (hex)
Bus
Node ID Node ID of the CANopen Slave 1 … 127, Default: 2
Enable Is only displayed here; is enabled in the Settings window. Default
address Defines if the Node ID is configured in the configuration software or at the NB 100-CO/COS:
switch address switch. unchecked,
If checked, the Node ID is configured at the address switch. NT 100-CO/COS,
NT 50-CO/COS:
The parameter ‘Enable address switch’ with the setting ‘checked’ can only checked
be used for NT 100-CO/COS and NT 50-CO/COS.
Baudrate Baud rate of CANopen connection Auto-Detect
Available Baud Rate: 1 Mbaud,
800 Kbaud,
500 Kbaud,
250 Kbaud,
125 Kbaud,
100 Kbaud,
50 Kbaud,
20 Kbaud,
10 Kbaud,
Default: 1 MBaud
Data

Parameter Meaning Range of
Value/Value
Send object/ Sendobject: Send object index 0x00002000 ...
Receive Receiveobject: Receive object index 0x00002003 (hex)
object 0x00002200 ...
0x00002203 (hex)
Size: 128
Number of data Bytes to send per send object
or number of data Bytes to receive per send object.
Outputdata- Total output data bytes of all send objects 512,
bytes Default: 512 Bytes
Inputdata- Total intput data bytes of all receive objects 512,
bytes Default: 512 Bytes
Table 42: CANopen Slave Parameters (Part 2)
Note: To configure the Master, an EDS file (device description file) is

required. The settings in the used Master must comply with the settings in
the Slave to establish communication. Important parameters are: Node
Address and Baudrate.

5.17.2 Settings at the used CANopen Master

To configure the Master an EDS file (device description file) may be
required. The EDS file is on the delivered DVD in the directory
EDS/CANopen:
Device EDS File
NT 50-XX-CO or NT 50-CO-XX NT50_CO_COS.EDS
NT 100-XX-CO or NT 100-CO-XX NT100_CO_COS.EDS
NB 100-XX-CO or NB 100-CO-XX NB100_CO_COS.EDS
Configuration
Slave to establish communication. Important parameters are: node
address and baudrate.
In order that the CANopen Master can communicate with the netTAP or
netBRICK device as CANopen Slave:
 Enter at the CANopen Master the Node-ID, which is configured in the
 Configure at the CANopen Master all PDOs, which the Master should
send to the netTAP or netBRICK device. For the netTAP or netBRICK
device these are receive PDOs. E. g. the Master can be configured with
2 PDOs with 8 byte user data each (16 bytes in total) to be send to the
 Configure at the CANopen Master all PDOs, which the Master should
receive from the netTAP or netBRICK device. For the netTAP or
netBRICK device these are transmit PDOs. E. g. the Master can be
configured with 4 PDOs with 8 byte user data each (32 bytes in total) to
be received from the netTAP or netBRICK device.

5.18 Configuration CC-Link Slave

The netTAP NT 50 and NT 100 device as CC-Link Slave needs parameter.
 Select from the context menu of the netTAP symbol the entry
Configuration > CC-Link Slave
 The CC-Link Slave configuration dialog opens.
2. Set Stationaddress
 Enter in the field Stationaddress the address, which the netTAP device
uses on the CC-Link network to be addressed by the CC-Link Master.
3. Set baudrate
 Set the baudrate for the netTAP device, which is used in the CC-Link
network
4. Set the CC-Link version

 Select with the field CC-Link Version the CC-Link version the netTAP
device should use to communicate with the CC-Link Master.
5. Set the Station type

 If CC-Link Version 1 is to be used, then select with the field Station
Type either Remote Device Station or Remote IO Station for the
netTAP device.
6. Set the Number of Stations

 If Station type is Remote Device Station, then set the number of
stations for the netTAP device: 1, 2, 3 or 4.
7. Set number of extension cycles

 If CC-Link Version 2 is to be used, then set the number of extension
cycles for the netTAP device: 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Note: The number of IO-Data bytes depends on the following settings:

station type, number of stations and number extension cycles. The
number of stations can only be configured with station type Remote
Device Station version 1 and version 2 and the number of extension
cycles can only be configured with version 2.


following section CC-Link Slave Parameter on page 227 .
Depending on additionally requirements and the design of the CC-Link
necessary.


page 283.


5.18.1 CC-Link Slave Parameter

Interface
Bus Startup Communication starts automatically Automatic (Default)
0 = Off
I/O Data Status Status of the input or the output data. Default: None
For each input and output data the following status information (in Byte) is
Ident
Vendor Code Code for the Vendor 0 ... 65535 resp.
0x00000000 ...
0x0000FFFF (hex),
Hilscher:
0x00000352 (hex)
Model Type Model type 0 ... 255,
Default: 1
Software Software version 0 ... 63,
Version Default: 0
Bus
Station Address Station address of CC-Link Slave 1 ... 64,
Note: The number of occupied stations plus station address must not Default: 1
exceed the parameter range
Baud Rate Network transmission rate 156 kBaud (Default)
625 kBaud
2500 kBaud
5 MBaud
10 MBaud
Hold last Hold Clear Mode; Behavior in case of bus error Default: unchecked
received Output Clear output data (unchecked)
Data Hold last received output data (checked)
Table 44: CC-Link Slave Parameters (Part 1)

Data
CC-Link CC-Link Version 1 1 (Default)
Version CC-Link Version 2 2
Station Type Type of CC-Link station
Remote I/O Station: 0 (Default)
Remote Device Station 1
Number of Number of occupied stations
Stations Remote I/O Station: 1 (Default)
Remote Device Station: 1 ... 4
Extension Number of extension cycles
Cycle Allowed numbers for CC-Link version 1:
Single/One cycle 1
Allowed numbers for CC-Link version 2:
Single/One cycle 1 (Default)
Double/Two cycles 2
Quadruple/Four cycles 4
Octuple/Eight cycles 8
IO-Data Bytes The number of IO-Data bytes depends on the following settings: station
type, number of stations and number extension cycles. The number of
stations can only be configured with station type Remote Device Station
version 1 and version 2 and the number of extension cycles can only be
configured with version 2.
Firmware/stack works according to CC-Link Version 2.0
input data 12 … 368 Bytes
output data 12 … 368 Bytes
Firmware/stack works according to CC-Link Version 1.11
input data 4 … 48 Bytes
output data 4 … 48 Bytes
Default: 4
Table 45: CC-Link Slave Parameters (Part 2)
Note: To configure the Master, a CSP file (device description file) is

required. The settings in the used Master must comply with the settings in
the Slave to establish communication.
Important parameters are: Slave Station Address, Baudrate, Station Type
and Vendor Code. For CC-Link Version 2.00 are additionally important:
number of cycles as well as number of extension cycles.

5.18.2 Settings at the used CC-Link Master

To configure the Master, a CSP file (device description file) may be
required. The CSP file is on the delivered DVD in the directory EDS/CC-
Link:
Device CSP File
NT 50-XX-CC or NT 50-CC-XX nt50-cc-ccs_1.csp,
nt50-cc-ccs_2.csp,
nt50-cc-ccs_3.csp,
nt50-cc-ccs_4.csp,
nt50-cc-ccs_io.csp
NT 100-XX-CC or NT 100-CC-XX Nt100-cc-ccs_1.csp,
nt100-cc-ccs_2.csp,
nt100-cc-ccs_3.csp,
nt100-cc-ccs_4.csp,
nt100-cc-ccs_io.csp
Table 46: CSP File Names for netTAP
The files nt50-cc-ccs_1.csp and nt100-cc-ccs_1.csp describe the

respective netTAP device as one Remote Device Station, the files nt50-cc-
ccs_2.csp and nt100-cc-ccs_2.csp describe the respective netTAP device
as two Remote Device Station, etc. The files nt50-cc-ccs_io.csp and nt100-
cc-ccs_io.csp describe the netTAP device as one Remote IO Station.
Configuration
Slave to establish communication. Important parameters are: Slave
Station Address, Baudrate and Station Type. For CC-Link Version 1 are
additionally important: Station type. For CC-Link Version 2.00 are
additionally important: number of cycles as well as number of extension
cycles.
In order that the CC-Link Master can communicate with the netTAP device
as CC-Link Slave:
 Enter at the CC-Link Master the Stationaddress, which is configured in
the netTAP device.
 Set at the CC-Link Master the same CC-Link Version as configured in
the netTAP device.
 Set at the CC-Link Master the same station type as configured in the
netTAP device.
 If CC-Link Version 1 is to be used, then set at the CC-Link Master the
same Station type as configured in the netTAP device.
 If Station type is Remote Device Station to be used, then set at the
CC-Link Master the same the number of stations as configured in the
netTAP device.
 If CC-Link Version 2 is to be used, then set at the CC-Link Master the
same number of extension as configured in the netTAP device.

5.19 Configuration CC-Link IE Field Slave

The netTAP NT 151-CCIES acting as CC-Link IE Field Slave needs
parameters.
These parameters can be edited as follows:
1. Open the configuration dialog.
 In SYCON.net, choose Configuration > CC-Link/IE Slave from the
context menu of the gateway device symbol.
 The CC-Link IE Slave Network configuration dialog opens.
2. Set station number.

 In the Station number field, enter the number that shall be used by the
gateway to communicate with the master of the CC-Link IE Field
network.
3. Set network number.
 If you are operating more than one CC-Link IE network, enter the
corresponding number in the Network number field.
Note: All other parameters are preset.

 Click OK to save the parameters, or click Cancel if the parameters
 The configuration dialog closes.

5.19.1 CC-Link IE Field Slave Parameter

Parameters Meaning Range of Value /
Default Value
General
Station number Current station address of the slave device as an unique identifier of a 1 … 120,
station within a network Default: 1
Network number Identifies the CC-Link IE Field network 1 … 239,
Default: 1
IO Type The parameter is not relevant for the Slave configuration. The IO type is FrontBackMixture
evaluated by the master. For more information, refer to the manual of the
master and/ or of the PLC.
Process data
Device Type Intelligent Device Station Intelligent Device
- max. 2048 Bits (256 Bytes) Station
- max. 1024 Words
The netTAP device is always an Intelligent Device Station.
RWw Points RWw (Register Word write): Remote output register (master to slave) of 0 … 1024 (16 bit),
data type “Word”. Data is periodically updated. Default: 1
Maximum number of cyclic RWw data: 1024 Words (16 bit)
This value is “read-only” and depends on the Coupler Variables in the
gateway configuration.
RWr Points RWr (Register Word read): Remote input register (slave to master) of data 0 … 1024 (16 bit),
type “Word”. Data is periodically updated. Default: 1
Maximum number of cyclic RWr data: 1024 Words (16 bit)
RY Bytes RY: Remote output (master to slave) of data type “Bit”. Data is periodically 4 … 256 Bytes,
updated. Default: 4
Maximum number of cyclic RY data: 256 Bytes (2048 bit)
RX Bytes RX: Remote input (slave to master) of data type “Bit”. Data is periodically 0 … 256 Bytes,
updated. Default: 1
Maximum number of cyclic RX data: 256 Bytes (2048 bit)
Table 47: Network Parameters CC-Link IE Field Slave

5.20 Configuration DeviceNet Master

The netTAP NT 50, NT 100 device respectively the netBRICK NB 100
device as DeviceNet Master needs a configuration, e. g. information about
how many DeviceNet Slave devices with how many input and output data
are to be connected.
1. Insert DeviceNet Slave devices

 Drag from the device catalog DeviceNet Slave device(s) and drop it to
the bus line of the DeviceNet Master.
2. Configure DeviceNet Slave devices

 Open the configuration dialog for each DeviceNet Slave device and
Information about how to configure the DeviceNet Slave device is in the
operating instruction manual „Generic DTM for DeviceNet Slave
devices“ and has the file name DeviceNet_Generic_Slave_DTM_en.pdf
by the F1 key.
3. Configure DeviceNet Master

symbol the entry Configuration > DeviceNet Master
Information about how to configure the DeviceNet Master device is in
the operating instruction manual „DTM for DeviceNet Master devices“
and has the file name DeviceNet_Master_netX_DTM_en.pdf
help by the F1 key.

5.21 Configuration DeviceNet Slave

device as DeviceNet Slave needs parameter.
symbol the entry Configuration > DeviceNet Slave
 The DeviceNet Slave configuration dialog opens.
2. Set MAC-ID
 Enter in the field MAC-ID the address, which the netTAP or netBRICK
device uses on the DeviceNet network to be addressed by the
DeviceNet Master.
3. Set baudrate
 Set the baudrate for the netTAP or netBRICK device, which is used in
the DeviceNet network
4. Set produced data length and consumed data length

 Set in the field Prod. Data Length the number of data bytes the netTAP
or netBRICK device should send to the DeviceNet Master
 Set in the field Cons. Data Length the number of data bytes the
netTAP or netBRICK device should receive from to the DeviceNet
Master


following section DeviceNet Slave Parameter on page 235.
Depending on additionally requirements and the design of the DeviceNet
necessary.

page 283.


5.21.1 DeviceNet Slave Parameter

Interface
Bus Startup Communication starts automatically Automatic (Default)
0 = Off
Ident
0x0000FFFF (hex),
Hilscher:
0x00000011B (hex)
Product Code Product code of the device 0x00000000 ...
0xFFFFFFFF (hex),
Default
NT 50 DN/DNS:
0x0000002D (hex),
NT 100 DN/DNS:
0x00000002B (hex),
NB 100 DN/DNS:
0x0000002F (hex)
Serial Number Serial number of the device 0x00000000 ...
0xFFFFFFFF (hex)
Product Type Communication Adapter 0x00000000 ...
0x0000FFFF (hex),
Default:
0x00000000C (hex)
Minor Rev Minor Revision 1 ... 255,
Default: 1
Major Rev Major Revision 1 ... 255,
Default: 1
Product Name The variable Product Name is a text string that should represent a short 0 ... 31 ASCII
description of the product/product family. Characters
Table 48: DeviceNet Slave Parameters (Part 1)

Bus
MAC ID This parameter defines the DeviceNet address of the device within the 0 … 63,
network. Default: 2
Baudrate Baud rate of DeviceNet connection 500 kBaud,
250 kBaud,
125 kBaud,
Default:
500 kBaud
Extras Ignore address switch: address switches are always ignored Default: unchecked
Continue on CAN bus off: Default: unchecked
Unchecked: A device reset by the user is necessary in case of a CAN bus
off event (e. g. short circuit of the data lines)
Checked: The device tries independently to continue operation in case of a
CAN bus off event
Continue On Loss of Network Power (NP): Function not supported Default: unchecked
Receive-Idle Clear Data: Default: unchecked
Unchecked: Received data keep their last state in case of idle state
Checked: Received data were set to zero in case of idle state
Receive Idle keeps Data: Default: unchecked
Function not supported
Data
Prod. Data Produced data length sets the number of send bytes. 0 … 255,
Length Default: 8
Cons. Data Consumed data length sets the number of receive bytes. 0 … 255,
Length Default: 8
Table 49: DeviceNet Slave Parameters (Part 2)

5.21.2 Settings at the used DeviceNet Master

To configure the Master an EDS file (device description file) is required.
The EDS file is on the delivered DVD in the directory EDS/DeviceNet:
Device EDS File
NT 50-XX-DN or NT 50-DN-XX NT50_DN_DNS.EDS
NT 100-XX-DN or NT 100-DN-XX NT100_DN_DNS.EDS
NB 100-XX-DN or NB 100-DN-XX NB100_DN_DNS.EDS
Configuration
Slave to establish communication. Important parameters are: MAC ID,
Baudrate, Produced Size, Consumed Size, Vendor ID, Product Type,
Product Code, Major Rev, Minor Rev.
In order that the DeviceNet Master can communicate with the netTAP or
netBRICK device as DeviceNet Slave:
 Enter at the DeviceNet Master the MAC-ID, which is configured in the
 Enter for the length of output data in the DeviceNet Master the Cons.
Data Length as set in the netTAP or netBRICK device.
 Enter for the length of input data in the DeviceNet Master the Prod.
Data Length as set in the netTAP or netBRICK device.
 You can set at the DeviceNet Master, if the Master verifies identification
numbers of the DeviceNet Slave (named keying). This verification can
be activated or deactivated at the DeviceNet Master. If the verification is
used, then use or check for the following values for the netTAP or
netBRICK device: vendor 283 (0x011B), product code 45 (0x2D) for
NT 50 respectively product code 43 (0x2B) for NT 100 respectively
product code 47 (0x2F) for NB 100, product type 12 (0x000C), major
revision 1, minor revision 1.

5.22 Configuration PROFIBUS DP Master

The netTAP NT 50-, NT 100 device respectively the netBRICK NB 100
device as PROFIBUS DP Master needs a configuration, e. g. information
about how many PROFIBUS DP Slave devices with how many input and
output data are to be connected.
1. Insert PROFIBUS DP Slave devices

 Drag from the device catalog PROFIBUS DP Slave device(s) and drop
it to the bus line of the PROFIBUS DP Master.
2. Configure PROFIBUS DP Slave devices

 Open the configuration dialog for each PROFIBUS DP Slave device and
Information about how to configure the PROFIBUS DP Slave device is
in the operating instruction manual „Generic DTM for PROFIBUS DP
Slave devices“ and has the file name
PROFIBUS_Generic_Slave_DTM_en.pdf respectively open in the
3. Configure PROFIBUS DP Master

symbol the entry Configuration > PROFIBUS DP Master
Information about how to configure the PROFIBUS DP Master device is
in the operating instruction manual „DTM for PROFIBUS DP Master
devices“ and has the file name PROFIBUS_Master_netX_DTM_en.pdf
help by the F1 key.

5.23 Configuration PROFIBUS DP Slave

device as PROFIBUS DP Slave needs parameter.
symbol the entry Configuration > PROFIBUS DP Slave
 The PROFIBUS DP Slave configuration dialog opens.
2. Set station address

 Enter in the field Station address the address, which the netTAP or
netBRICK device uses on the PROFIBUS network to be addressed by
the PROFIBUS DP Master.
3. Set baudrate
 Use the setting Auto-Detect (default), if the netTAP or netBRICK device
should detect the baudrate on the PROFIBUS network or set the baud
rate for the device.
4. Set the number of input and output data

 Enter for the output module type and size of the output module. Up to 4
output modules can be set. With the output modules the number of data
is configured which the netTAP or netBRICK device should receive from
the PROFIBUS DP Master.
 Enter for the input module type and size of the input module. Up to 4
input modules can be set. With the input modules the number of data is
configured which the netTAP or netBRICK device should send to the
PROFIBUS DP Master.
Note: The input and output modules are ‚with consistence’.


following section PROFIBUS DP Slave Parameter on page 241 .
Depending on additionally requirements and the design of the PROFIBUS
necessary.

page 283.


5.23.1 PROFIBUS DP Slave Parameter

Interface
Bus Startup Automatic communication start Automatic (Default)
0 = Off
Ident
Ident Number PROFIBUS Identification Number 0x00000000 ...
If ‘Enabled’ is unchecked, the default value is used. 0x0000FFFF (hex),
Default:
NT 50:
0x000000C99 (hex),
NT 100:
0x000000C0E (hex),
NB 100:
0x00000C9C (hex)
Enable If ‘Enabled’ is unchecked, the default value is used.
Bus
Station Address PROFIBUS address of the device 0 … 125
Baudrate Network Baud Rate 9,6 kBit/s
19,2 kBit/s
93,75 kBit/s
187,5 kBit/s
500 kBit/s
1,5 MBit/s
3 MBit/s
6 MBit/s
12 MBit/s
31,25 kBit/s
45,45 kBit/s
Auto-Detect
Default: Auto-Detect
Extras Sync supported:
If checked, the Slave stack supports the SYNC command or the SYNC
mode is activated.
DPV1 Enable:
If checked, DPV1 is supported or the DPV1 functions are activated.
Freeze supported:
If checked, the Slave stack supports the FREEZE command or the FREEZE
mode is activated. Default: checked
Address change by the Master not allowed:
If checked, the Slave rejects the Set Slave Address command to the Master.
If not checked, the Slave supports the Set Slave Address command and
accepts an address change by the Master.
Fail safe supported:
If checked, the FAILSAFE operation is supported or the FAILSAFE mode is
activated.
Table 51: Parameters – PROFIBUS DP Slave (Part 1)


Data
Output Module:
or for output modules 1…4
Input for input modules 5…8
Type: „Byte“ (Default),
Byte or Word „Word“
each with consistency
Size: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 12,
The number of Bytes or Words in the module. 16, 20, 32, 64 (Byte,
Words)
Output Data Total of the output bytes of the modules 1 to 4 0 … 244, Default: 2
Bytes
Input Data Total of the input bytes of the modules 5 to 8 0 … 244, Default: 2
Bytes
Manual input Manual input: Default: unchecked
If unchecked the field Configuration data shows the output and input
identifier bytes, which results from the settings of the output modules and
input modules.
If checked the field Configuration data is editable. Output and input
identifier bytes can be entered into the Configuration data field to configure
the device. Then, the settings of the output modules and input modules have
no meaning.
In this case, take the values for the ID bytes from the following table and
write them one after the other without spaces in the Configuration data field
(do not enter an X or comma); Example: 9797979797
Configuration Configuration data for the output and input identifier bytes. Default: A1, 91 hex
data The identifier bytes consists of the Type and the Size.
The identifier bytes are the general identifier bytes according to the
PROFIBUS standard.
Depending on the setting of the field Manual input, the field Configuration
data is for display only or an entry field.
Table 52: Parameters – PROFIBUS DP Slave (Part 2)
Note: The input and output modules each work with ’consistency’.

PROFIBUS DP Identifier bytes

PROFIBUS DP uses identification bytes for the configuration of the input
and output modules. The following table lists the usable input and output
modules and their identification bytes if you perform the configuration
manually.
Input/output modules Identifier bytes (hexadecimal value) Note
blank space 0x00 blank module
1 Byte In 0x90 Consistency over
1 Byte Out 0xA0 entire length
1 Word In 0xD0
1 Word Out 0xE0
2 Byte In 0x91
2 Byte Out 0xA1
2 Word In 0xD1
2 Word Out 0xE1
3 Byte In 0x92
3 Byte Out 0xA2
3 Word In 0xD2
3 Word Out 0xE2
4 Byte In 0x93
4 Byte Out 0xA3
4 Word In 0xD3
4 Word Out 0xE3
8 Byte In 0x97
8 Byte Out 0xA7
8 Word In 0xD7
8 Word Out 0xE7
12 Byte In 0x9B
12 Byte Out 0xAB
12 Word In 0xDB
12 Word Out 0xEB
16 Byte In 0x9F
16 Byte Out 0xAF
16 Word In 0xDF
16 Word Out 0xEF
20 Byte In 0x40, 0x93
20 Byte Out 0x80, 0x93
20 Word In 0x40, 0xD3
20 Word Out 0x80, 0xD3
32 Byte In 0x40, 0x9F
32 Byte Out 0x80, 0x9F
32 Word In 0x40, 0xDF
32 Word Out 0x80, 0xDF
64 Byte In 0x40, 0xBF
64 Byte Out 0x80, 0xBF
64 Word In 0x40, 0xFF
64 Word Out 0x80, 0xFF
Table 53: PROFIBUS DP Slave (Identifier bytes)

5.23.2 Settings at the used PROFIBUS DP Master

To configure the Master a GSD file (device description file) is required. The
GSD file is on the delivered DVD in the directory EDS/PROFIBUS:
Device GSD File
NT 50-XX-DP or NT 50-DP-XX HIL_0C99.GSD
NT 100-XX-DP or NT 100-DP-XX HIL_0C0E.GSD
NB 100-XX-DP or NB 100-DP-XX HIL_0C9C.GSD
Table 54: GSD File Names for netTAP and netBRICK
Configuration
Slave, to establish a communication. Important parameters are: Station
Address, Ident Number, Baudrate and Config Data (the configuration data
for the output and input length).
In order that the PROFIBUS DP Master can communicate with the netTAP
or netBRICK device as PROFIBUS DP Slave:
 Enter at the PROFIBUS DP Master the station address, which is
 Use for the configuration of the PROFIBUS DP Master module(s) e. g.
‚64 Bytes Out’, for sending data to the netTAP or netBRICK device. Use
the module(s), which are configured in the netTAP or netBRICK device.
(Modules with the size of zero in the netTAP or netBRICK configuration
needs not to be considered for the configuration of the PROFIBUS DP
Master.)
 Use for the configuration of the PROFIBUS DP Master module(s) e. g.
‚32 Bytes In’, for receiving data from the netTAP or netBRICK device.
Use the module(s), which are configured in the netTAP or netBRICK
device. (Modules with the size of zero in the netTAP or netBRICK
configuration needs not to be considered for the configuration of the
PROFIBUS DP Master.)

5.24 Configuration Modbus RTU Master/Slave

device as Modbus RTU Master or Slave needs parameter.
symbol the entry Configuration > Modbus RTU
 The Modbus RTU settings dialog opens.
2. Set protocol mode

 Set the Protocol Mode to "I/O Slave", if the netTAP or netBRICK
device should work as Modbus RTU Slave
 Set for the Protocol Mode to "Master", if the netTAP or netBRICK
device should work as Modbus RTU Master
 If you have set the Protocol Mode to "Master", then the entry
Command Table appears in the navigation are
3. Set Modbus RTU Parameter

 Set or select in the configuration dialog the Modbus Address, the
interface type, RTS control, baudrate, number of stop bits and parity for
the netTAP or netBRICK device. The settings are described in the
following section Modbus RTU Parameter on page 247.
 If you have set the Protocol Mode to "Master", then set the response
timeout and the send retries.
4. Command Table
 If you have set the Protocol Mode to "Master", then select in the
navigation area the entry Command Table. Specify in the Command
Table which data the Modbus RTU Master has to transfer to and from
the Modbus RTU Slave by reading or writing. The Command Table is
described in detail in section Modbus RTU Master on page 249.
Note: To know, which data address with which data of the Modbus RTU
Slave devices is provided for reading or for writing, refer to the device
description of the Modbus RTU Slave device manufacturer.


page 283.


5.24.1 Modbus RTU Parameter

Interface
Bus Startup Communication startsautomatically Automatic (Default)
0 = Watchdog timer off
Address Mapping Valid address range of the data. 0 ... 65535
This parameter can not be edited here.
Data Swapping Data-storage mode: Yes, No,
No: Data will not be swapped Default:: Yes
Yes: Data will be swapped.
Map FC1 If unchecked, data are read from the intput area using FC1, FC3 and checked,
and FC3 FC23. unchecked,
If checked, data are read from the output area using FC1, FC3 and Default: unchecked
FC23. FC1 then can be used instead of FC2 and FC3 instead of FC4.
Ident
Device Device code NT50, NT100 (Default),
If ‘Enabled’ is unchecked, the default value is used. NB100, String
Bus
Protocol Mode Determines the Mode of operation: Master or Slave. Master,
For „Master“ mode Command Table is displayed in the navigation area. IO Slave (Default)
For the Modbus RTU Master the Command Table is a list with
Response Timeout value (specified in milliseconds) 10 … 10000 ms,
Timeout Only valid for Master mode: Defines the maximum waiting time of the Default: 1000
master for an answer from the slave
Modbus Address Defines the own Modbus address of the Gateway device. 1 … 247, Default: 2
Send Retries Defines number of telegram retries when connection fails. 0 … 10
Relevant only for operation as master. Default: 3
Interface type Serial interface to be used RS232, RS485, RS422,
SPI Mode3,
Default: RS232
RTS Control Signal “Rquest to Send can be switched off or on. RTS Control Off (default),
See hardware description RTS Control On
Baudrate Modbus RTU Network Baud Rate. Defines the transmission rate. 1,2 kBit/s
2,4 kBit/s
4,8 kBit/s
9,6 kBit/s (default)
19,2 kBit/s
38,4 kBit/s
57,6 kBit/s
115,2 kBit/s
Stop Bits Stop Bits: Defines the quantity of stop bits, 1 or 2, to be used in protocol One stop bit (default)
for serial data communication Two stop bits
Parity Defines the parity bit for serial data communication. None, Even, Odd,
Default: Even
Frame Format This parameter is not supported here.
For more see next page


Data
Register Number of register 0 ... 2880,
Not editable in protocol mode master Default: 2880
Coils Number of coils 0… 65535,
not editable Default: Automatic
Table 55: Modbus RTU Parameters

5.24.2 Modbus RTU Master

5.24.2.1 For what the Command Table does serve?
For the Modbus RTU Master the Command Table is a list with commands
for the reading or writing of data.
The Command Table is only relevant, if a device works as Master on the
Modbus RTU.
From every command line the Modbus RTU Master produces a telegram
for reading or for the writing of data to or from a Modbus RTU Slave device.
For every command are indicated:
• the Modbus RTU Slave device address (Device Address),
• the Function code,
• the data address in the Modbus RTU Slave device (Address),
• the number of data (Number of Registers/Coils),
• and the data address in the Modbus RTU Master device (Memory
Address (internal)).
For writing telegrams (FC 5, 6, 15 and 16) in the column
• Trigger
you can decide, whether the writing telegrams are executed every time
(Cyclic) or only at data modification (Change data).
Furthermore
• a Cycle Time
can be set for every command.
The Command Table is processed from the first to the last entry (from
above to below). After the execution of the last command the execution of
the first command is started again.
For reading commands the Modbus RTU Master reads out data from the
Modbus RTU Slave and saves them into its data memory.
For writing commands the Modbus RTU Master reads out data from its data
memory and writes them into the Modbus RTU Slave.
The number of commands which can be defined depends from the
firmware and from the Dual-Port Memory layout.

5.24.2.2 Parameter of the Command Table
Figure 151: Pane Command Table
Each command contains the following parameters:

Parameter Description
Device Address Modbus RTU Slave device address
Unit Identifier (not relevant here)
Function Code Function code
Address data address in the Modbus RTU Slave device
Number of Registers/Coils Number of data
Memory Address (internal) Data address in the Modbus RTU Master device
(= Byte address in the process image of the Modbus RTU Master device)
Trigger Trigger for writing commands
Cycle Time Cycle time


Device Address Specifies the Modbus RTU Slave device address, from which the For Modbus RTU: 1 …
Modbus RTU master device reads out the data or into which it 247
writes the data. Default: 1
Unit Identifier (not relevant here) Default: 0
Function Code Specifies the function code for read and write requests [3]: 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 15 / 16
Address Read Coils(FC1) Default: „Read Coils
Read Inputs(FC2) (FC1)“
Read Holding Registers(FC3)
Read Input Registers(FC4)
Force Single Coil(FC5)
Preset Single Register(FC6)
Force Multiple Coils(FC15)
Preset Multiple Registers(FC16)
Address Indicates the data address in the Modbus RTU Slave device. 0 … 65.535
The parameter Address contains the register address in the Default: 0
Modbus RTU Slave device. The register address is counted for
every function code beginning with 0.
The following table shows the assignment of the Address to the
data address in the Modbus RTU Slave by Function code:
Parameter
Data Address Modbus RTU Slave

Address
FC 1 FC 2 FC 4 FC 3
FC 5 FC 6
FC 15 FC 16
0 1 10001 30001 40001
1 2 10002 30002 40002
2 3 10003 30003 40003
3 4 10004 30004 40004
4 5 10005 30005 40005
… … … … …
To know, which data address with which data of

the Modbus RTU Slave devices is provided for
reading or for writing, refer to the device description
of the Modbus RTU Slave device manufacturer.
Number of Indicates the number of reading or writing data as registers or coils. 1 … max. value, Default: 1
Registers/Coils The maximum value depends from the function code. max. value for
FC1 = 2000 (Coils),
FC2 = 2000 (Coils),
FC5 = 1 (Coils),
FC15 = 1968 (Coils),
FC16 = 123 (Registers)
Memory Byte address in the process image of the Modbus RTU Master 0 … 5759
Address device for input or output data of the Master Default: 0
(internal) The configuration software calculates the byte address in the
process image of the Master for the input or for the output data
automatically. Because of this definition, for function codes for
reading (FC 1, 2, 3 and 4) the data are assigned consecutively in
the process image for input data and for function codes for writing
(FC 5, 6, 15 and 16) the data are assigned consecutively in the
process image for output data.

Trigger Defines for all function codes for writing (FC 5, 6, 15 and 16); if the 0 = Cyclic
command is to be executed cyclically (Cyclic) or only if the data 1 = Changed Data
have changed (Change Data). Default: „Cyclic“
For function codes for reading (FC 1, 2, 3 und 4) this parameter is
not used.
Cycle Time The cycle time defines, after how many milliseconds a writing or a 0, 10, 20, 30, … 60.000
reading command shall be reexecuted. ms
The default value „0 ms“ means, that the command is executed as Default: 0 ms
fast as possible. Otherwise the execution can be defined in steps of
10 ms.
With the cycle time the temporal execution of the command can be
influenced.
If since the last execution of the command the set cycle time or
more time has been passed, the command is reexecuted.
If since the last execution of the command less time has been
passed then the cycle time, the command is skipped.
If e. g. from a Modbus RTU Slave data are required only every 10
seconds, as these one change only slowly, then for the cycle time
enter 10.000 ms.
Delay Between the single commands a delay time can be parameterized. 0 … 60.000 ms
This sometimes is necessary to avoid a too high load of the Default: 0
connected Slave devices by a continuous communication.
0: The commands are processed without delay.
1 … 60.000 ms: Delay time in ms, the Modbus RTU Master waits,
before starting the next command.

5.24.2.3 Adding/removing Command
To add or to remove data sets for commands to the Command Table,

proceed as follows:
Add command:
 In the table Command Table put the cursor in the line below which a
new data set for a command shall be added.
 Click Add.
 Under the clicked line a new command is added.
Remove command:
 In the table Command Table put the cursor in the line with the data set
to be deleted.
 Click Remove.
 The command of the clicked line is not shown any more.
5.24.2.4 Setting Parameters
Important: When entering the parameters, make sure that these address
valid data registers. (Refer to the device description of the Modbus RTU
Slave device manufacturer.)
To set the single parameters in the Command Table, proceed as follows:
1. Device Address, Function Code, Address, Number of

Registers/Coils:
The fields for these parameters are editable.
 Enter the values for these parameters to the corresponding table cells.
2. Trigger:
 In Function Code field select an entry for a writing command (FC 5, 6,
15 or 16).
 In the column Trigger select the entry „Cyclic“ or „Change Data“.
3. Cycle Time:
 Put the cursor to the table cell and set the cycle time using the spin
box in steps of 10 ms.

5.24.2.5 Examples Modbus RTU Reading or Writing Command
Example Reading Command with FC 3: From the Modbus RTU Slave

device with the Modbus address 8 from data address 40011 onwards 12
registers are read by function code 3. The data are assigned to the memory
address(internal) 0.
Example Writing Command with FC 16: To the Modbus RTU Slave with the
Modbus address 8 from data address 40031 onwards 12 registers are
written by function code 16. The data are read from the process image of
the Master from the memory address(internal) 0 onwards. The writing
process is only performed, if the data in the process image of the Master on
the memory addresses(internal) 0 to 3 have changed, as the parameter
trigger is set to 'changed'.

5.24.2.6 Settings for Modbus RTU Slaves
Note: The settings in the used Modbus RTU Slaves must comply with the
settings in the netTAP or netBRICK device as Modbus RTU Master to
establish a communication. Important parameters are: Modbus RTU
address, baud rate, number of stop bits and parity setting.

5.24.3 Modbus RTU Slave

5.24.3.1 Settings at the used Modbus RTU Master
Note: The settings at the used Modbus RTU Master must comply with the
settings in the netTAP or netBRICK device (Modbus RTU Slave) to
establish a communication. Important parameters are: Modbus RTU
address, baud rate, number of stop bits and parity setting. However, the
Modbus RTU address must be unique, e. g. the Modbus RTU address
must be different from device to device.
The Modbus RTU Master can access to the netTAP or netBRICK device as
a Modbus RTU Slave using function codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 15, 16 and
23.
Figure 154: Access from the Modbus RTU Master to the netTAP and netBRICK Device
Registers (16 bit value) and coils (1 bit value) share the same memory for
input data (IN). Registers (16 bit value) and coils (1 bit value) share the
same memory for output data (OUT). The following tables (Table 58 to
Table 63) show the data assignment.

Addressing types of Modbus RTU Master

Modbus RTU Master of different manufacturers use different addressing
types. The modicon-based addressing is very popular. Other Modbus RTU
Master use a zero-based addressing and again other Modbus RTU Master
use one-based addressing.
Note: Read the documentation of the used Modbus RTU Master to find
out the used addressing type.
Modicon-based addressing: If function code 3, 6, 16 and 23 is used, the

first register (16 bit value) has address 40001, the second register has
address 40002 etc. If function code 4 is used, the first register has address
30001, the second register has address 30002 etc. If function code 1, 5 and
15 is used, the first coil (1 bit value) has address 1, the second coil has
address 2 etc. If function code 2 is used, the first coil has address 10001,
the second coil has address 10002 etc.
for modicon-based Modbus RTU Master. The setting “Map FC 1 and FC 3”
is not set in the configuration of the netTAP or netBRICK device in this
case.
FC 15 FC 16,
FC 23
IN 0 1 … 16 40001 OUT 0 10001 … 10016 30001
IN 1 17 … 32 40002 OUT 1 10017 … 10032 30002
IN 2 33 … 48 40003 OUT 2 10033 … 10048 30003
… … … … … …
IN 624 9985 … 9999 40625 OUT 624 19985 … 19999 30625
… - … … -
IN 2879 - 42880 OUT 2879 - 32880
Table 58: Access from the Modbus RTU Master using Modicon-based Addressing (1)
for modicon-based Modbus RTU Master. The setting “Map FC 1 and FC 3”
is set in the configuration of the netTAP or netBRICK device in this case.
IN netTAP Coil Register OUT netTAP Coil Coil Register Register
or FC 5, FC 6, or netBRICK FC 1 FC 2 FC 4 FC 3,
netBRICK FC 15 FC 16, (Mapping) FC 23
(Mapping) FC 23 (read)
(write)
IN 0 1 … 16 40001 OUT 0 1 … 16 10001 … 10016 30001 40001
IN 1 17 … 32 40002 OUT 1 17 … 32 10017 … 10032 30002 40002
IN 2 33 … 48 40003 OUT 2 33 … 48 10033 … 10048 30003 40003
… … … … … … … …
IN 624 9985 … 9999 40625 OUT 624 9985 … 9999 19985 … 19999 30625 40625
… - … … - - … …
IN 2879 - 42880 OUT 2879 - - 32880 42880
Table 59: Access from the Modbus RTU Master using Modicon-based Addressing (2)

Zero-based addressing: The first register (16 bit value) as well as the first
for zero-based Modbus RTU Master. The setting “Map FC 1 and FC 3” is
not set in the configuration of the netTAP or netBRICK device in this case.
FC 15 FC 16,
FC 23
IN 0 0 … 15 0 OUT 0 0 … 15 0
IN 1 16 … 31 1 OUT 1 16 … 31 1
IN 2 32 … 47 2 OUT 2 32 … 47 2
… … … … … …
IN 624 9985 … 9998 624 OUT 624 9985 … 9998 624
… - … … - …
IN 2879 - 2879 OUT 2879 - 2879
Table 60: Access from the Modbus RTU Master using Zero-based Addressing (1)
for zero-based Modbus RTU Master. The setting “Map FC 1 and FC 3” is
set in the configuration of the netTAP or netBRICK device in this case.
netBRICK FC 5, FC 3, or netBRICK FC 1, FC3,
FC 16, FC 23 (lesen)
FC 23
(schreiben)
IN 0 0 … 15 0 OUT 0 0 … 15 0
IN 1 16 … 31 1 OUT 1 16 … 31 1
IN 2 32 … 47 2 OUT 2 32 … 47 2
… … … … … …
IN 624 9985 … 9998 624 OUT 624 9985 … 9998 624
… - … … - …
IN 2879 - 2879 OUT 2879 - 2879
Table 61: Access from the Modbus RTU Master using Zero-based Addressing (2)

One-based addressing: The first register (16 bit value) as well as the first
for one-based Modbus RTU Master. The setting “Map FC 1 and FC 3” is
not set in the configuration of the netTAP or netBRICK device in this case.
IN netTAP Coil Register OUT netTAP Coil Register
netBRICK FC 1, FC 3, netBRICK FC 2 FC 4
FC 15 FC 16,
FC 23
IN 0 1 … 16 1 OUT 0 1 … 16 1
IN 1 17 … 32 2 OUT 1 17 … 32 2
IN 2 33 … 48 3 OUT 2 33 … 48 3
… … … … … …
IN 624 9986 … 9999 625 OUT 624 9986 … 9999 625
… - … … - …
IN 2879 - 2880 OUT 2879 - 2880
Table 62: Access from the Modbus RTU Master using One-based Addressing (1)
for one-based Modbus RTU Master. The setting “Map FC 1 and FC 3” is
set in the configuration of the netTAP or netBRICK device in this case.
IN netTAP Coil Register IN netTAP Coil Register
netBRICK FC 5, FC 3, netBRICK FC 1, FC3,
FC 16, FC 23 (read)
FC 23 (write)
IN 0 1 … 16 1 OUT 0 1 … 16 1
IN 1 17 … 32 2 OUT 1 17 … 32 2
IN 2 33 … 48 3 OUT 2 33 … 48 3
… … … … … …
IN 624 9986 … 9999 625 OUT 624 9986 … 9999 625
… - … … - …
IN 2879 - 2880 OUT 2879 - 2880
Table 63: Access from the Modbus RTU Master using One-based Addressing (2)
5.24.4 Modbus References

[1] MODBUS Application Protocol Specification V1.1, http://www.modbus.org/,
12/06/02
[2] MODBUS Messaging on TCP/IP Implementation Guide V1.0b, October 24, 2006
[3] MODBUS APPLICATION PROTOCOL SPECIFICATION V1.1a, June 4, 2004,
http://www.Modbus-IDA.org

5.25 Configuration 3964R

The NT 100 device respectively the netBRICK NB 100 device as 3964R
needs parameter.
symbol the entry Configuration > 3964R
 The 3964R settings dialog opens.
 In the navigation area the entry Settings under the folder
2. 3964R settings
 Select or set in the dialog window (at least) the interface type, RTS
control, baudrate, number of data bits, number of stop bits, parity and
conflict priority. The settings are described in the following section
3964R Settings on page 261.
Note: Please note, that the conflict priority one device must have high
priority the other device must have low priority.
 The signal configuration is done with default value automatically by
SYCON.net software.


5.25.1 3964R Settings

Parameter Meaning Value Range/Value
Interface
Bus Startup Communication start application controlled or automatic Default: Automatic
Watchdog Time [ms] This function is not supported by gateway or proxy devices. [0, 20 … 65535] ms,
default = 1000 ms,
0 = Watchdog timer off
For each input and output data the following status information (in
Byte) is stored in the dual-port memory:
Application Mode Mode how the superordinated control unit controls to send a Default: Handshake Mode
3964R telegram respectively detects the receipt of a 3964R
telegram.
Handshake Mode: The control is done with synchronization
registers.
Ident
Device Device name
If ‘Enabled’ is unchecked, the default value is used.
Bus
Interface Type Type of the serial interface, which should be used RS232 (Default),
RS422,
RS485
RTS Control Specifies, if RTS control is activated or deactivated. RTS Control Off (Default),
When using the interface type RS-485, then "RTS Control on" has RTS Control On
to be activated (On).
Baud Rate Specifies the baud rate. 300 Bit/s
600 Bit/s
1200 Bit/s
2400 Bit/s
4800 Bit/s
9600 Bit/s (Default)
19200 Bit/s
38400 Bit/s
57600 Bit/s
115200 Bit/s
Data Bits Specifies the number of data bits, 7 or 8 7,
8 (Default)
Stop Bits Specifies the number of stop bits, 1 or 2 1 (Default)
2
Parity Specifies the parity bit of the serial data communication. None (Default),
None means that no parity bit is used. Even,
Odd
Table 64: 3964R Parameter (Part 1)


Bus
Conflict Priority A conflict occurs when both devices start a data transfer at the High (Default),
same time. The conflict priority specifies the behavior for this Low
case: One device must have high priority the other device must
have low priority.
The device with high priority can continue with the data transfer
while the device with low priority must wait with the data transfer.
Retry Limit When transmission errors occur, then the retry limit specifies the 0 … 65535,
maximum number of retries to do a data transfer successfully. Default = 6
After the maximum number of retries has been reached the data
transfer is aborted with error.
Character Delay Time The value specifies the time in ms within the remote device must [4 … 65535] ms,
have sent the next character of a telegram. If the time is Default = 220 ms
exceeded, then an error is reported to the superordinated control
unit.
Acknowledge Timeout The value specifies the time in ms the remote device must have [256 … 65535] ms
sent an acknowledge. If the time is exceeded, then an error is Default = 550 ms
reported to the superordinated control unit.
Data
Max. Input Maximum telegram length for receive data. 0 … 5736,
Received data are stored in the input data area. 1024 (Default)
Max. Output Maximum telegram length for send data. 0 … 5736,
Send data are taken from the output data area. 1024 (Default)
Table 65: 3964R Parameter (Part 2)

5.25.2 Settings for the 3964R Remote Device
Note: The settings in the used remote device must comply with the
settings in the netTAP or netBRICK device to establish a communication.
Important parameters are: Interface type, baud rate, data bits, parity, RTS
control, retry limit, character delay timeout and acknowledge timeout. The
conflict priority has to be set different for the used devices.

5.26 Configuration ASCII

ASCII (= American Standard Code for Information Interchange) is a coding
for characters. ASCII is denoted a communication for serial data exchange
here and is usually a human readable code and
This type of communication contains however less definitions for the
detailed communication procedure. Many manufacturer specific
implementations exist.
Basic functions are send and receive of exactly one specified telegram.
The functionality depicted here for send and receive of telegrams can be
used when one of the following condition is fulfilled:
• The send telegram has a fixed structure
• The receive telegram has a fixed structure
• The polling telegram (send telegram without data) has a fixed structure
and the receive telegram has a fixed structure
• The polling telegram (send telegram with data) has a fixed structure and
the receive telegram has a fixed structure
The structure of the serial send and receive telegram is specified by
configuration. The part of the telegram marked as user data is transferred
unchanged with a superordinated memory. For this data exchange a
handshake mechanism has to be used.
ASCII should not be used, when

• different telegram structures for send telegrams or
• different telegram structures for receive telegrams or
• communication procedures with more complexity are to be used or
• the user data needs to be evaluated, processed respectively converted
Then use 'Serial with netSCRIPT'. With 'Serial with netSCRIPT' it can be
reached by programming (script)
• that user data is evaluated, processed respectively converted,
• more complex communication procedures and,
• different telegram structures
can be realized.

device as ASCII needs parameter.
symbol the entry Configuration > ASCII
 The ASCII settings dialog opens.
2. ASCII settings
 Select in the dialog window the interface type, RTS control, baudrate,
number of data bits, number of stop bits and parity. The settings are
described in the following section ASCII Settings on page 266.
3. Open ASCII parameter dialog

 Select in the navigation area under Configuration the entry
ASCII Parameter.
 The dialog ASCII Parameter is displayed.
4. Set parameter
 Select the operating mode, set the telegram structure, set the timing
and the size of the send and receive buffer. The parameter are
described in section ASCII Parameters on page 266.
SYCON.net software.


5.26.1 ASCII Settings

Interface type Type of the serial interface, which should be used RS232 (Default),
RS485,
RS422
When using the interface type RS-485, then "RTS Control on" has to RTS Control On
be used.
Baud rate Specifies the baud rate. 300 Bit/s
600 Bit/s
1200 Bit/s
2400 Bit/s
4800 Bit/s
19200 Bit/s
38400 Bit/s
57600 Bit/s
115200 Bit/s
Data bits Specifies the number of data bits, 7 or 8 7,
8 (Default)
Stop bits Specifies the number of stop bits, 1 or 2 1 (Default)
2
Odd
Table 66: ASCII Parameter
5.26.2 ASCII Parameters

The operating modes are:
• ‘Receive Only’ Mode
• ‘Send Only’ Mode
• Client Mode (first send, then receive)
• Server Mode (first receive, then send)
The further configuration parameters specify the

• the telegram structure of the send telegram,
• the telegram structure of the receive telegram,
• the timing,
• the size of the send and receive buffer

5.26.2.1 Telegram Structure in Data Stream

A send or receive telegram in the simplest case only consists only by user
data. Many implementations however add to the user data further
characters which have a certain meaning, such as a start character, an end
character, a checksum or a device address.
A typical telegram structure is e. g.

Start D a t a Checksum End
with for example (in hexadecimal notation):
[0x02] [0x38][0x33][0x33][0x37][0x38][0x30][0x33][0x37][0x36][0x33] [0x69][0xA5] [0x03]
Table 67: ASCII Telegram Structure Example
The serial data stream of the send and receive telegram each can be
defined with up to 10 structural elements.

Parameter Description Range of Value /

Parameter Type
Unused Structural element is not used -
Start Start character of the telegram consisting of one or more characters ASCII,
The information is given as an ASCII character (Char) or as hexadecimal Hex,
(Hex). For the ASCII character 'STX' enter the hexadecimal value'02'. Decimal
When sending, the start character is inserted in the telegram.
When receiving, the start character is checked for equality.
Device Device Address ASCII,
When sending, the device address is inserted in the telegram. Thereby the Hex,
receiving device is specified. Decimal
When receiving, the device address is checked for equality.
Object Object Index or Start Address of the data in the device ASCII,
When sending, the object index / start address is inserted in the telegram. Hex,
When receiving, the object index / start address is checked for equality. Decimal
Command Command Identifier ASCII,
When sending, the Command Identifier is inserted in the telegram. Hex,
When receiving, the Command Identifier is checked for equality. Decimal
Data Length specification for Data Field or Telegram end (Character or Time) Constant Length (Bytes)
Length Specification: Byte Number Data
Constant Length (bytes): The data field has a fixed length. The information is Word Number Data
given as number of bytes. Character Terminated
Byte Number Data: The length specification is given in one byte. When Unspecific
sending, this byte is inserted in the telegram directly before the data field.
When receiving, the value of this byte from the telegram is used as the length
of the directly following data field.
Word Number Data: The length specification is given in one word. When
sending, this word is inserted in the telegram directly before the data area.
When receiving, the value of this word from the telegram is used as the length
of the directly following data field.
Termination Character:
Character Terminated: The data field is terminated by a fixed end identifier
consisting of one byte. When sending, this termination character is inserted in
the telegram after the data field. When receiving, this termination character is
used to detect the end of the data field. The termination character is not part
of the data field.
Telegram end by time:
Unspecific: The end of the data field is done with the character delay time.
End End of the telegram character consisting of one or more characters ASCII,
The information is given as an ASCII character (Char) or as hexadecimal Hex,
(Hex). For the ASCII character 'ETX' enter the hexadecimal value'03'. Decimal
When sending, the end character is inserted in the telegram.
When receiving, the end character is checked for equality.
Check Checksum CRC8,
CRC8: Any data of the telegram before the checksum are inserted in the initial CRC16,
value zero with the polynomial 1D (default) and the 1-byte result is used as CRC32,
checksum. Exor
CRC16: Any data of the telegram before the checksum are inserted in the
initial value zero with the polynomial 8005 (default) and the 2-byte result is
used as checksum.
CRC32: Any data of the telegram before the checksum are inserted in the
initial value zero with the polynomial 04C11DB7 (default) and the 4-byte result
is used as checksum.
Exor: Any data of the telegram before the checksum are set off against the
initial value zero with exclusive-or and the 1-byte result is used as checksum.
When sending, the computed checksum is inserted in the telegram.
When receiving, the checksum is calculated based on of the received
characters and is checked for equality with the received checksum.
Don't care Characters with no meaning Constant Length (Bytes)

Parameter Description Range of Value /
Parameter Type
Constant Length (bytes): Specifies the number of bytes, which have no
meaning and which should be ignored.
When sending, the number of characters with a value of zero is inserted in the
telegram.
When receiving, the number of characters is ignored and thus filtered out from
the telegram.
Table 68: Telegram Structure
Type Description
Hex Hexadecimals
The entry is made as a hexadecimal value. A hexadecimal value consists of 2 characters
in the range 00 to FF and result in one byte. Each character has the range of value 0, 1, 2,
..., 9, A, B, ..., F.
ASCII ASCII Character
The entry is made as a character. A character is one of the following characters: A-Z, a-z,
0-9, !, ", §, $, %, &, /, (, ), =, ?, , ; -, _, +, *
Decimal Decimal value
The entry is made as a decimal value.
Table 69: Parameter Types
Example: The specification of the character A is as hexadecimal value '41',

as character 'A' or as a decimal value 65.

ASCII Character Table

ASCII ASCII Charac- ASCII ASCII Charac- ASCII ASCII Charac- ASCII ASCII Cha-
Hex Dez ter Hex Dez ter Hex Dez ter Hex Dez racter
00 0 NUL 20 32 SP 40 64 @ 60 96 `
01 1 SOH Â 21 33 ! 41 65 A 61 97 a
02 2 STX ^B 22 34 " 42 66 B 62 98 b
03 3 ETX ^C 23 35 # 43 67 C 63 99 c
04 4 EOT ^D 24 36 $ 44 68 D 64 100 d
05 5 ENQ Ê 25 37 % 45 69 E 65 101 e
06 6 ACK ^F 26 38 & 46 70 F 66 102 f
07 7 BEL ^G 27 39 ' 47 71 G 67 103 g
08 8 BS ^H 28 40 ( 48 72 H 68 104 h
09 9 TAB Î 29 41 ) 49 73 I 69 105 i
0A 10 LF ^J 2A 42 * 4A 74 J 6A 106 j
0B 11 VT ^K 2B 43 + 4B 75 K 6B 107 k
0C 12 FF ^L 2C 44 , 4C 76 L 6C 108 l
0D 13 CR ^M 2D 45 - 4D 77 M 6D 109 m
0E 14 SO ^N 2E 46 . 4E 78 N 6E 110 n
0F 15 SI Ô 2F 47 / 4F 79 O 6F 111 o
10 16 DLE ^P 30 48 0 50 80 P 70 112 p
11 17 DC1 ^Q 31 49 1 51 81 Q 71 113 q
12 18 DC2 ^R 32 50 2 52 82 R 72 114 r
13 19 DC3 ^S 33 51 3 53 83 S 73 115 s
14 20 DC4 ^T 34 52 4 54 84 T 74 116 t
15 21 NAK Û 35 53 5 55 85 U 75 117 u
16 22 SYN ^V 36 54 6 56 86 V 76 118 v
17 23 ETB ^W 37 55 7 57 87 W 77 119 w
18 24 CAN ^X 38 56 8 58 88 X 78 120 x
19 25 EM ^Y 39 57 9 59 89 Y 79 121 y
1A 26 SUB ^Z 3A 58 : 5A 90 Z 7A 122 z
1B 27 Esc 3B 59 ; 5B 91 [ 7B 123 {
1C 28 FS 3C 60 < 5C 92 \ 7C 124 |
1D 29 GS 3D 61 = 5D 93 ] 7D 125 }
1E 30 RS 3E 62 > 5E 94 ^ 7E 126 ~
1F 31 US 3F 63 ? 5F 95 _ 7F 127 DEL
Table 70: ASCII Character Table

5.26.2.2 Size of the Send and Receive Buffer

The size of the send or receive buffer is configured.
Note: The send telegram must fit into the send buffer. The receive telegram
must fit into the receive buffer.
Parameter Description Range of Value

Sendbuffer Size Size of the send buffer in bytes 0 … 1024
Default: 512 Bytes
Receivebuffer Size Size of the receive buffer in bytes 0 … 1024
Default: 512 Bytes
Table 71: Size of the Send and Receive Buffer
5.26.2.3 Operating Modes and Timing

The modes are:
• ‘Receive Only’ Mode
• ‘Send Only’ Mode
• Client Mode (first send, then receive)
• Server Mode (first receive, then send)

5.26.2.4 ‘Send Only’ Mode
Basic Principle
In the 'Send Only' mode the device only sends. The remote device only
receives. The superordinated control unit has to use a handshake to
transfer the data to the device.
Communication
The send operation can be triggered from the superordinated control unit or
performed by the device cyclically.
• triggered
With each handshake of the superordinated control unit a telegram is send.

For this, set the timing parameter Send Cycle Time to zero.
• Cyclic
The device sends in a constant cycle.
With each handshake of the superordinated control unit the send data
initially are updated in the internal buffer of the device and sent during the
next send cycle. For this, set the timing parameter Send Cycle Time to the
cycle time (unequal to zero).
Timing Parameter
Parameter Description Range of
Value
Send Cycle Specifies whether the telegram will be sent cyclically or triggered. 0 … 231-1
Time The value (unequal to zero) specifies the cycle time of the send telegram. Default: 0
The value 0 specifies that the send telegram is triggered.
Table 72: Timing Parameters for the Operating ‘Send Only’ Mode

Configuration Example
Table 73: Telegram Structure for the Operating ‘Send Only’ Mode

5.26.2.5 'Receive Only' Mode

Basic Principle
In the 'Receive Only' mode the device only receives. The remote device
only sends.
The superordinated control unit must acknowledge the reception.
Communication
When configuring the telegram structure the method is defined how the end
of the telegram is detected:
• Character
• Length
• Time
Each telegram received is indicated to the superordinated control unit by
handshake. The superordinated control unit must acknowledge the
reception. Only after the acknowledgement the reception of a further
telegram can be indicated to the superordinated control unit.
Timing Parameter
Value
Receive Specifies whether the reception of subsequent telegrams is monitored by time. 0 … 231-1
Watchdog Thereby the remote device can be monitored. The time is taken from telegram end to Default: 0
Time telegram end.
The value (unequal to zero) specifies in what time the remote device must have sent
the next telegram. If the time is exceeded, then an error is reported to the host.
The value 0 specifies that the reception of subsequent telegrams is not monitored.
Character Specifies whether the time between two characters during reception is monitored by 0 … 231-1
Delay Time time. Default: 0
the next character. If the time is exceeded, then an error is reported to the host.
The value 0 specifies that no monitoring is performed.
Table 74: Timing Parameters for the Operating ‘Receive Only’ Mode

Table 75: Telegram Structure for the Operating ‘Receive Only’ Mode

5.26.2.6 Client Mode (First Send, Then Receive)
Basic Principle
In the 'Client Mode' the device sends a telegram to the remote device. The
remote device then sends a telegram which is received by the device.
By this a polling (querying) of the remote devices can be performed. The
device can send a polling telegram with or without user data.
The superordinated control unit must activate the send operation by

handshake. The superordinated control unit must acknowledge each
reception by handshake.
Communication
The send operation can be triggered or performed cyclically.
• triggered
With each handshake of the superordinated control unit a telegram is send.
For this, set the timing parameter Send Cycle Time to zero.
The remote device then sends a telegram which is received by the device.
The device can monitor the beginning of the receive telegram by time
monitoring via the Response Timeout parameter.
The superordinated control unit must activate the send operation by
handshake. The superordinated control unit must acknowledge each
reception by handshake.
• Cyclic
The device sends in a constant cycle.
With each handshake of the host the send data initially are updated in the
internal buffer and sent during the next sending cycle. For this, set the
timing parameter Send Cycle Time to the cycle time (unequal to zero).
The remote device then sends a telegram which is received by the device.
The device can monitor the beginning of the receive telegram by time
monitoring via the Response Timeout parameter.
The superordinated control unit must activate the send data by handshake.
The superordinated control unit must acknowledge each reception by
handshake.

Timing Parameter
Value
Send Cycle Specifies whether the telegram will be sent cyclically or triggered. 0 … 231-1
Time The value (unequal to zero) specifies the cycle time of the send telegram. Default: 0
The value 0 specifies that the send telegram is triggered.
Response Specifies whether the reception of the response telegram is monitored by time. 0 … 231-1
Timeout Thereby the remote device can be monitored. The time is taken from telegram end to Default: 1000
telegram end.
the response telegram. If the time is exceeded, then an error is reported to the host.
The value 0 specifies that the reception of response telegrams is not monitored.
Table 76: Timing Parameters for the Operating Mode 'Client Mode'

Table 77: Telegram Structure for the Operating Mode 'Client Mode'

5.26.2.7 Server Mode (First Receive, Then Send)
Basic Principle
In the 'Server Mode' the device receives a telegram from the remote device.
The superordinated control unit must acknowledge each reception by
handshake. The superordinated control unit must activate by handshake
the send operation. The device then sends a telegram to the remote
device.
Communication
When configuring the telegram structure the method is defined how the end
of the telegram is detected:
• Character
• Length
• Time
Timing Parameter
Value
Receive Specifies whether the reception of subsequent telegrams is monitored by time. 0 … 231-1
Watchdog Thereby the remote device can be monitored. The time is taken from telegram end to Default: 0
Time telegram end.
The value 0 specifies that the reception of subsequent telegrams is not monitored.
Response Specifies whether the reception of telegrams is monitored by time. Thereby the 0 … 231-1
Timeout remote device can be monitored. The time is taken from the end of the send telegram Default: 1000
to the start of the receive telegram.
The value 0 specifies that the reception of telegrams is not monitored.
Table 78: Timing Parameters for the Operating Mode 'Server Mode'

Table 79: Telegram Structure Parameters for the Operating Mode 'Server Mode'
5.26.3 Settings for the remote ASCII Device

Note: The settings in the used remote device must comply with the
settings in the netTAP or netBRICK device to establish a communication.
Important parameters are: Interface type, baud rate, data bits, parity check
and respectively RTS control.

5.27 Configuration ‘Serial with netSCRIPT’

The netTAP NT 100 device respectively the netBRICK NB 100 device as
‘serial with netSCRIPT’ needs parameter and beyond a script has to be
created and loaded.
symbol the entry Configuration > netSCRIPT
 The netSCRIPT settings dialog opens.
2. netSCRIPT settings
 Select in the dialog window the interface type, RTS control, baudrate,
number of data bits, number of stop bits and parity. The settings are
described in the following section netSCRIPT Settings on page 282 .
SYCON.net software.

Note: The programming of a script, loading the script into the netTAP or
netBRICK device, the debugging of the script is described in detail in an
own manual: netSCRIPT Programming Language for Serial
Communication UM xx EN.pdf

5.27.1 netSCRIPT Settings

Interface type Type of the serial interface, which should be used RS232 (Default),
RS485,
RS422
When using the interface type RS-485, then "RTS Control on" has to RTS Control On
be used.
Baud rate Specifies the baud rate. 300 Bit/s
600 Bit/s
1200 Bit/s
2400 Bit/s
4800 Bit/s
19200 Bit/s
38400 Bit/s
57600 Bit/s
115200 Bit/s
Data bits Specifies the number of data bits, 7 or 8 7,
8 (Default)
Stop bits Specifies the number of stop bits, 1 or 2 1 (Default)
2
Odd
Table 80: netSCRIPT Settings
5.27.2 Settings for the netSCRIPT Remote Device

Note: The settings in the used netSCRIPT remote device must comply
with the settings in the netTAP or netBRICK device to establish a
communication. Important parameters are: Interface type, baud rate, data
bits, parity check and respectively RTS control.

5.28 Signal Configuration

At the pane Signal Configuration the data structure and the signal name
of the in- and output signals is displayed. These signal are used for the
signal mapping. Here for the single signals respectively the names of the
signal names are set or the data types are configured.
SYCON.net generates for the signal names default names. These names
can be overwritten by the user.
Parameter Meaning Range of Value/

Value
Type Type of the input or output signals String
Tag Signal name for the single input or output signals. String
The name can be set by the user.
Data type Data type of the single input or output signals. BIT,
Depending by the used AS-Interface Slave profile the user can select the WORD,
data type from a list. SIGNED16,
UNSIGNED16, etc.,
Default: depends on
the used protocol
IO Type Input or output signal input, output
Table 81: Explanations to the Dialog Pane Signal Configuration

Diagnosis 284/355
6 Diagnosis
6.1 Overview Diagnosis
The dialog Diagnosis serves to diagnose the device behavior and
communication errors. For diagnosis the device must reside in online state.
The Extended Diagnosis helps to find communication and configuration
errors, when default diagnosis fails.
Diagnosis Panes
The table below gives an overview for the individual Diagnosis dialog
panes descriptions:
Section Page
General Diagnosis 285
Firmware Diagnosis 287
Table 82: Descriptions of the Diagnosis Panes
Note: Accessing the Diagnosis panes of the netGateway DTM requires

an online connection from the netGateway DTM to the netTAP NT 100
device.
For further information, refer to section Connecting/Disconnecting Device

on page 288.
Figure 155: Navigation Area - Diagnosis

Diagnosis 285/355
6.2 General Diagnosis

Information regarding the Device State and other general diagnosis
parameters are displayed in the General Diagnosis dialog.
Figure 156: General Diagnosis

Diagnosis 286/355
Indication Meaning
Device State
Communicating Communicating: Shows that the netTAP firmware executes the network communication.
Run Device is configured: Shows that the netTAP firmware has been configured correctly.
Ready Ready: Shows that the netTAP firmware has been started correctly. The netTAP firmware waits for
a configuration.
Error Error: Shows that the netTAP firmware records a device status error. For further information to the
error characteristics and the number of counted errors refer to the extended diagnosis.
Network State
Operate Operate: Shows that the netTAP firmware is in data exchange.
Idle Idle: Shows that the netTAP firmware is in idle mode.
Stop Stop: Shows that the netTAP firmware is in Stop state: There is no cyclic data exchange at the
network. The netTAP firmware was stopped by the application program or it changed to the Stop
state because of a bus error.
Offline Offline: The netTAP firmware is offline pending it does not have a valid configuration.
Configuration State
Configuration Configuration locked: Shows that the netTAP firmware configuration is locked, to avoid the
locked configuration data are typed over.
New Configura- New Configuration pending: Shows that a new netTAP firmware configuration is available.
tion pending
Reset required Reset required: Shows that a firmware reset is required as a new netTAP firmware configuration
has been loaded into the device.
Bus ON Bus ON: Shows whether the bus communication was started or stopped. I. e., whether the device is
active on the bus or no bus communication to the device is possible and no response telegrams are
sent.
Table 83: Indication General Diagnosis
Parameter Meaning
Communication Error Communication Error: Shows the message text of the communication error. If the cause of the
current error is resolved, „ – “ is displayed.
Watchdog time Watchdog time: Shows the watchdog time in ms.
Error Count Error Count: This field holds the total number of errors detected since power-up, respectively
after reset. The protocol stack counts all sorts of errors in this field no matter if they were
network related or caused internally.
Table 84: Parameter General Diagnosis

Diagnosis 287/355
6.3 Firmware Diagnosis

In the dialog Firmware Diagnosis the actual task information of the
firmware is displayed.
Under Firmware or Version the name of the firmware and version
(including the date) are indicated.
Figure 157: Firmware Diagnosis (*The name of the Firmware is displayed.)
Task Information:
The table Task Information is listing the task information of the single
firmware tasks.
Column Meaning
Task Task number
Task Name Name of the task
Version Version of the task
Prio Priority of the task
Description Description of the task
Status Status of the task
Table 85: Description Table Task Information

Online Functions 288/355
7 Online Functions
7.1 Connecting/Disconnecting Device
Note: Several netGateway DTM functions e. g. Diagnosis or the

configuration download in the FDT Framework require an online
connection from the netGateway DTM to the netTAP respectively
netBRICK device.
Connecting Device
The following steps are needed to establish a connection from the
netGateway DTM to a netTAP respectively netBRICK device:
Under Settings in the Driver pane:
1. Verify that the default driver is checked and respectively check another
or multiple drivers.
2. Configure the driver, if necessary.
Under Settings in the Device Assignment pane:
1. Scan for the device.
2. Select the device and apply the selection.
3. In the DTM interface dialog select the OK button, to apply the selection
and to close the DTM interface dialog.
4. Put a right-click on the netTAP respectively netBRICK symbol.
5. Select the Connect command from the right mouse button menu.
 The netTAP respectively netBRICK device now is connected to the
netGateway DTM via an online connection. In the network view the
device description at the device symbol is displayed with a green
colored background.
Disconnecting Device
To disconnect an online connection from the netTAP respectively
netBRICK device to a netGateway DTM take the following steps:
3. In the DTM interface dialog select the OK button, to close the DTM
interface dialog.
1. Right-click on the netTAP respectively netBRICK symbol.
2. Select the Disconnect command from the context menu.
 Now the netTAP respectively netBRICK device is disconnected from the
DTM.

Online Functions 289/355
7.2 Download Configuration

Note: To download configuration parameter data to the
netTAP/netBRICK/netLINK device an online connection from the
netGateway DTM to the device is required.
Further information can be found in the Connecting/Disconnecting Device

section on page 288.
To transfer the configuration with the corresponding parameter data to the

netTAP/netBRICK/netLINK device you must download the data to it using
the frame application of the configuration software.

Acyclic Communication of Proxy Devices 290/355
8 Acyclic Communication of Proxy Devices

8.1 Overview
This chapter relates to the following devices:
Device Name in SYCON.net device Protocol conversion / firmware
catalog
NL 51N-DPL NL 51N-DPL PROFINET IO Device to PROFIBUS
Master Link
NT 100-RE-DP NT 100-RE-XX/PROXY PROFINET IO Device to PROFIBUS
Master
Table 86: Proxy Devices with Acyclic Communication
8.2 Adress Mapping

The read/write record service of the PROFINET IO controller are converted
to DPV1 read/write services to the PROFIBUS DP slave for acyclic
communication. Thereby the PROFINET IO Controller can access the
PROFIUS DP slaves via the proxy device an address mapping exsists.
The following figure and table describes the mapping of the PROFINET IO
slot, subslot and index to PROFIBUS station address, slot and index.
Figure 158: PROFINET – PROFIBUS Address Mapping
The proxy device is addressed by the PROFINET name of station. This

makes is possible to address several proxy devices on the PROFINET
network.

The following table shows details of the address mapping.

PROFINET PROFIBUS
Slot SubSlot Index Mapped PROFIBUS Detail Remark
0 X X DeviceSlot / Device Module Not used
1 0 0x000- PB Slave Device 1 Slave Record Data Slot 0 Used
0x00FF
0x0100 PB Slave Device 1 Parameter Data Not used
0x0101 PB Slave Device 1 Configuration Data Not used
0x0102 PB Slave Device 1 Read Input Record Data Used
0x0103 PB Slave Device 1 Read Output Record Data Used
0x0104- Not used
0xFFFF
1-254 0x000- PB Slave Device 1 Slave Record Data Slot 1..254 Used
0x00FF
0x0100- Not used
0xFFFF
255- X Not used
2 0-254 See Slot 1 PB Slave Device 2 Used
And so on with the same mapping for all following slaves from 3 till 125
126 0-254 See Slot 1 PB Slave Device 126 used
127 x X Not used
128 0-254 See Slot 1 PB Slave Device 0 Used
Table 87: PROFINET IO - PROFIBUS; Address Mapping of acyclic Data
8.3 Read/Write – Controlled by the PROFINET IO Controller

PROFINET IO read record is converted to PROFIBUS DPV1 read. The
data of the PROFIBUS DP Slaves are forwarded unchanged to the
PROFINET IO Controller.
PROFINET IO write record is converted to PROFIBUS DPV1 write. The
data to be written are forwarded unchanged to the PROFIBUS DP slave.
A positive confirmation to the PROFINET IO Controller means, that the
PROFIBUS DP Master in the proxy device has received a positive
confirmation from the PROFIBUS DP slave.

Error Detection and Error Codes

The following figure shows where an error detection is possible.
Figure 159: PROFINET IO – PROFIBUS DP Read/Write Error Detection
Errors detected in the proxy device (PROFINET IO device), are reported as

normal PROFINET IO errors to the controller.
Errors detected in the proxy device, which are not addressing errors, are
reported with error code 0xDE80AABB to the PROFINET IO controller.
All errors, except addressing errors, which are detected on PROFIBUS
(master or slave) are reported with error code 0xDE80AABB to the
PROFINET IO controller.
Error detection by the proxy device for read/write record:

The following error codes can occur:
Error Code Definition, Descrption
0xDE80B000 DE = IODReadRes; negative response of a read request
80 = PNIORW; User Error
B0 = invalid index
invalid index for a read request.
0xDE80B200 DE = IODReadRes; negative response of a read request
B2 = invalid slot / sub slot (invalid slave address)
invalid slot or sub slot
0xDF80B200 Invalid slave address for a write request.
0xDE80AABB DE = IODReadRes; negative response of a read request
AA = user spezific
BB = user spezific
All errors (except addressing errors) detected in the proxy
device (PROFIBUS Master or PROFIBUS Slave.
0xDF80AABB DF = IODReadRes; negative response of a write request
AA = user spezific
BB = user spezific
All errors (except addressing errors) detected in the proxy
device (PROFIBUS Master or PROFIBUS Slave.
Table 88: PROFINET IO – PROFIBUS DP; Error Codes

8.4 Alarms – Controlled by the PROFIBUS DP Slave
Figure 160: PROFINET IO- PROFIBUS DP – Alarm Errors
PROFIBUS alarms are mapped to PROFINET alarms as follows:

PROFIBUS PROFINET IO
Process alarm Process alarm
Diagnosstic alarm Diagnosstic alarm
Status alarm Diagnosstic alarm with the structure of the PROFIBUS
alarm
Update alarm Diagnosstic alarm with the structure of the PROFIBUS
alarm
Pull alarm Pull alarm
Plug alarm Plug alarm
Manufacturer specific alarm Diagnosstic alarm with the structure of the PROFIBUS
alarm
Table 89: PROFINET IO - PRPFIBUS; Mapping of Alarms
Alarm data are forwared unchanged.

Extended PROFIBUS diagnostic are mapped to PROFINET IO diagnostic
with UserStructID 0x2000+x.
PROFIBUS diagnostic alarms are mapped to PROFINET IO diagnostic with
UserStructID 0x4000+x.
PROFIBUS DPV1 parameter services are not transfered to PROFINET IO
and via versa.
Note: Had a PROFIBUS DP slave device generated a pull alarm once and
this device/module goes into communication again, then a manual reset to
the proxy device is necessary (by a short disconnect of the power supply
by example) to force the prxy device to reload the configuration data.
Was the PROFIBUS DP slave device removed only from the PROFIBUS,
without a generation of a pull alarm, then the communication start
automatically if the PROFIBUS DP slave device is reconnected to
PROFIBUS.
Note: If a PROFIBUS DP slave device generates a plug alarm (a new

device/module was added to PROFIBUS), then the proxy device has to be
reconfigured with new configuration data by the user.

Acyclic Communication of Gateway Devices 294/355
9 Acyclic Communication of Gateway Devices

9.1 Overview
This chapter relates to the following devices:
Device Name in SYCON.net device Protocol conversion / firmware
catalog
NT 100-RE-EN NT 100-XX-XX PROFINET IO Device to EtherNet/IP
Scanner
Table 90: Acyclic Communication of Gateway Devices
Besides cyclic data exchange, the netTAP NT 100 gateway also supports
acyclic communication for some protocol conversions.
In cyclic communication, small packages of I/O data (“process data”) are
exchanged at regular intervals with high-priority; in acyclic
communication on the other hand, (in most cases) bigger data packages
are being sent on special occasions, such as configuration download or
slave diagnosis.
The figure below shows the handling of cyclic and acyclic data flow via
gateway:
Figure 161: Acyclic Gateway Communication

In most Master/Slave applications, an acyclic data service is initiated by the

PLC of the primary network. The acyclic message is being transposed and
then forwarded to the secondary network by the gateway. After the service
has been processed by the secondary network, the returned result is stored
in the gateway, and the PLC can read the result from there.
Because the acyclic services of the different automation protocols are
based on different record addressing models, and may also have different
timing requirements, they cannot be converted directly from one protocol
into another. The conversion therefore uses read- and writeable objects
within the gateway controlling the acyclic data transfer of the secondary
protocol (for information about the objects valid for your protocol, see
corresponding section Gateway with Protocol Conversion […] below in this
chapter).
The acyclic task, which the PLC writes into the acyclic object in the
gateway, contains routing information, i. e. the address of the slave in the
secondary network, the service type (read/write) and the target path within
the slave device. In case of a writing task, the message also contains the
payload data to be written into the slave.
The routing information unambiguously identifies the target device of the
acyclic task for the secondary protocol, thus enabling the gateway to
forward the task to the secondary protocol. The gateway then waits for the
response and writes the result (which might also contain payload data read
from the target device) to the object. From there it can be read by the
initiator (i. e. the PLC) of the acyclic service.
The gateway stores each task per object as a so-called Message Record.
For each Message Record, the processing state of the task (Request
State) is also recorded in a Status Register linked to the Message Record.
Message Record and Status Register together form an entity which is
called Acyclic Channel in this document. An acyclic channel always
occupies two objects in the gateway. Depending on the protocol
conversion, several acyclic channels are supported and can be addressed
and activated for services simultaneously.

9.2 Request States

The values of the Request States recorded in the Status Register are
valid for all protocol conversions and are as follows:
Value Request State Description
0 MSG_STATE_INIT The Acyclic Channel has just been initialized and no request has
been made yet
1 MSG_STATE_IDLE The Acyclic Channel has completed previous request and is ready
to process next one
2 MSG_STATE_REQ_SENT The PLC has written a request to be forwarded through this
channel. Any following writes to the Message Record will be
ignored, because the channel can handle only one request at a time
3 MSG_STATE_RSP_REQUESTED The PLC has sent a read request of the Message Record and the
channel is waiting for secondary network reply
4 MSG_STATE_RSP_RECEIVED The secondary network has replied to the acyclic request and the
channel is waiting for the PLC to read the Message Record
Table 91: Request States in Acyclic Communication

9.3 Sequence of a Reading Task

This section describes the typical sequence of events of an error-free
acyclic reading task for a slave device in the secondary network (see also
diagram on following page):
1 The PLC sends the task to the gateway, where it is stored in the
Message Record of the acyclic channel and forwarded to the slave in
the secondary network.
2 The gateway sets the Request State in the Status Register of the
acyclic channel to value 2 and sends back an acknowledge message to
the PLC.
The slave executes the requested reading task.
3 The PLC queries the state of the request at regular intervals (“status
polling”) by reading the Status Register of the acyclic channel in the
gateway. As long as the gateway has not yet received the answer from
the slave, the Status Register is returning Request State 2.
Note: Instead of polling the Status Register, the PLC can read the
Message Record directly, expecting that the answer from the slave has
already arrived at the gateway and can be read from there. If the answer
from the slave has not yet arrived at the gateway at the time of the PLC
reading the Message Record, the Request State in the Status
Register is set to value 3 and the reply from the gateway to the PLC is
stalled until the answer from the slave arrives.
4 The answer from the slave arrives at the gateway where it is stored in
the Message Record of the acyclic channel. The gateway sets the
Request State in the Status Register to value 4.
5 The PLC reads the Status Register again and the gateway returns
Request State 4 to the PLC. The PLC now knows that the answer from
the slave has arrived and that the requested data can be read from the
Message Record.
6 The PLC now reads the requested data from the Message Record of
the acyclic channel. In case the slave reported an error in step 4, the
PLC can now react to the error message.
7 The gateway resets the Request State to value 1. The acyclic channel
is now ready to process a new request.

Figure 162: Sequence of Acyclic Reading Task

9.4 Sequence of a Writing Task

acyclic write request for a slave device in the secondary network (see
also diagram on following page):
1 The PLC sends the task to the gateway, where it is stored in the
Message Record of the acyclic channel and forwarded to the slave in
the secondary network.
acyclic channel to value 2 and sends back an acknowledge message to
the PLC.
The slave executes the requested writing task.
3 The PLC queries the state of the request at regular intervals (“status
polling”) by reading the Status Register of the acyclic channel in the
gateway. As long as the gateway has not yet received a response from
the slave, the Status Register is returning Request State 2.
Note: Instead of polling the Status Register, the PLC can read the
Message Record directly, expecting that the response from the slave
has already arrived at the gateway and can be read from there. If the
response from the slave has not yet arrived at the gateway at the time
of the PLC reading the Message Record, the Request State in the
Status Register is set to value 3 and the reply from the gateway to the
PLC is stalled until the response from the slave arrives.
4 The response from the slave arrives at the gateway where it is stored in
the Message Record of the acyclic channel. The gateway sets the
Request State in the Status Register to value 4.
5 The PLC reads the Status Register again and the gateway returns
Request State 4 to the PLC. The PLC now knows that the response
from the slave has arrived and can be read from the Message Record.
6 The PLC now reads the response from the Message Record of the
acyclic channel. In case the slave reported an error in step 4, the PLC
can now react to the error message.

Figure 163: Sequence Acyclic Writing Task

9.5 Gateway with Protocol Conversion PROFINET IO-Device

to EtherNet/IP Scanner
9.5.1 Overview
The PROFINET standard prescribes a record addressing model using Slot,
Subslot and Index for read and write services. The data content of these
so-called Records can be accessed by Read/Write Data Record services.
The objects of an acyclic channel in the gateway must be addressed via
these records.
Slot 0, Subslot 1 in the gateway is reserved for the Acyclic Channels.
The value of the Index specifies an individual acyclic channel. Two
consecutive Indices together form the object pair of one acyclic channel (e.
g. 1/2, 3/4, 1001/1002 etc.). The Index with the uneven number stores
the Message Record (i. e. routing information, service type and payload
data), the following Index with an even number denotes the Status
Register recording the Request State of the corresponding acyclic task
(see table Request States in Acyclic Communication on page 296).
Up to 255 acyclic channels (and thus parallel services) can be handled
simultaneously by the gateway. The values of the index pairs intended for
establishing an acyclic channel can be freely chosen within the range of 1
to 65534 (e. g. 1/2, 3/4…65533/65534 are possible, index 0 and 65535
are not available).
Figure 164: Acyclic Communication PROFINET IO-Device to Ethernet/IP Scanner

In order to initiate an acyclic service (write or read task) for an EtherNet/IP

Adapter, the PROFINET PLC sends a Write Data Record (WRREC)
request to Slot 0, Subslot 1 and an uneven Index (e. g. 1, 3, 1201 etc.)
in the gateway.
In order to then “read” the state of the acyclic task or the answer itself, the
PROFINET PLC afterwards sends a Read Data Record (RDREC) request
to the gateway, also addressed at Slot 0, Subslot 1. In case the PLC
wants to read the Request State, it has to address its RDREC to the even
Index denoting the Status Register (e. g. 2, 4, 1202 etc.); in case the
PLC wants to read the answer received from the EtherNet/IP Adapter
(given that it has already arrived), the PLC has to address its RDREC to the
uneven Index denoting the Message Record (e. g. 1, 3, 1201 etc.).

9.5.2 Reading Data from an EtherNet/IP Adapter

9.5.2.1 Sequence of a Reading Task
acyclic read request for an EtherNet/IP Adapter (see also diagram on
following page):
1 The PROFINET PLC sends a Write Data Record (WRREC) to Slot 0,

Subslot 1 and an uneven Index number (1 or 3 or 5 etc) in the
gateway. The gateway stores (“writes”) the task in the Message
Record of the acyclic channel and synchronously forwards the task as
“unconnected message” to the EtherNet/IP Adapter.
The gateway sends back a WRREC ACK (acknowledgement) to the
PLC and sets the Request State in the Status Register of the acyclic
channel to value 2.
acyclic channel to value 2 and sends back a WRREC ACK
(acknowledgement) to the PLC.
The EtherNet/IP Adapter executes the requested reading task.
3 The PROFINET PLC queries the state of the task at regular intervals by
sending a Read Data Record (RDREC) to the Status Register of the
acyclic channel in the gateway (“status polling”). As long as the gateway
has not yet received the answer from the EtherNet/IP Adapter, the
Status Register is returning Request State 2.
Note: Instead of polling the Status Register, the PLC can send a
RDREC directly to the Message Record, expecting that the answer
from the EtherNet/IP Adapter has already arrived at the gateway and
can be read from there. If the answer from the Adapter has not yet
arrived at the gateway at the time of the PLC reading the Message
Record, the Request State in the Status Register is set to value 3 and
the RDREC REPLY from the gateway to the PLC is stalled until the
answer from the Adapter arrives.
Note that if the EtherNet/IP Adapter is slow, the RDREC of the Message
Record might get timed-out. Therefore “status polling” should be done
before reading the Message Record.
4 The answer from the EtherNet/IP Adapter arrives at the gateway where
it is stored in the Message Record of the acyclic channel. The gateway
sets the Request State in the Status Register to value 4.
5 The PROFINET PLC again sends a Read Data Record (RDREC) to
the Status Register, and the gateway now returns Request State 4.
The PLC now knows that the answer from the slave has arrived and
that the requested data can be read from the Message Record.
6 The PLC now sends a Read Data Record (RDREC) to the Message
Record of the acyclic channel in order to read the slave data.

Figure 165: Sequence Acyclic Reading Task PROFINET to EtherNet/IP

9.5.2.2 Data Elements for a Reading Task
The PROFINET PLC sends the reading task for the EtherNet/IP Adapter to
Slot 0, Subslot 1 and an uneven Index in the gateway by using a Write
Data Record containing the following elements:
Element Description Data type Value
WRREC
PROFINET ID Number, which unambiguously identifies the gateway in the - (…)

Controller (Handle, Reference ID, Diagnostic address etc.)
ID 0
Slot Slot (Object) for acyclic communication uint16
Subslot Subslot (Object) for acyclic communication uint16 1
Index Object for Message Record in acyclic channel: uint16 n
uneven numbers 1…65533
LEN Maximum length of the WRREC DATA in bytes uint16 14
WRREC DATA
IP Address IP address of the EtherNet/IP Adapter uint8[4] (…)

Service Service type (CIP Service Code): uint16 14
Get Attribute Single Little Endian
Class ID of the object class to be read from the EtherNet/IP Adapter uint16 (…)
Little Endian
Instance ID of the object instance to be read from the EtherNet/IP uint16 (…)
Adapter Little Endian
Attribute ID of the attribute to be read from the EtherNet/IP Adapter uint16 (…)
Little Endian
DataLen Length of the data field (payload data). uint16 0
Value 0 because no payload data is being sent to the Little Endian
Adapter in a reading task
Table 92: Elements of WRREC for Reading Task
9.5.2.3 Elements for Querying the Request State from the Status Register
The PROFINET PLC can read the request state from the Status Register
of the acyclic channel by sending a Read Data Record (RDREC) to Slot 0,
Subslot 1 and the even Index following the uneven Index of the Message
Record. The RDREC contains the following elements:
RDREC

ID 0
Index Object for Status Register in acyclic channel: uint16 n + 1
(even number following the index number of the Message
Record)
MLEN Maximum length of the data in bytes uint16 4
Table 93: Elements of RDREC for Status Register

Answer from the Gateway
The Read Record Reply (RDREC Reply) containing the Request State
from the Status Register, which the gateway sends back to the PROFINET
PLC, contains the following elements:
RDREC Reply
LEN Length of the data in bytes uint16 4

Data Request State read from the Status Register: uint32 0…4
0 = MSG_STATE_INIT Little Endian
1 = MSG_STATE_IDLE
2 = MSG_STATE_REQ_SENT
3 = MSG_STATE_RSP_REQUESTED
4 = MSG_STATE_RSP_RECEIVED
Table 94: Elements RDREC Reply from Status Register
9.5.2.4 Elements for Reading the Answer from the Message Record
The PROFINET PLC can retrieve the answer from the EtherNet/IP Adapter
by sending a Read Data Record (RDREC) to the Message Record of the
acyclic channel (Slot 0, Subslot 1 and the uneven Index).
The RDREC contains the following elements:
RDREC

ID 0
Index Object for Message Record in acyclic channel uint16 n
MLEN Maximum length of the data in bytes uint16 (…)
Table 95: Elements of RDREC for Message Record

The Read Record Reply (RDREC Reply) containing the answer from the
EtherNet/IP Adapter, which the gateway sends back to the PROFINET
RDREC Reply

Get Attribute Single Little Endian
Status Status value 0 means no error occurred uint32 (…)
If other value than 0 is returned, please refer to Status/Error Codes provided Little Endian
in chapter EtherNet/IP Scanner Protocol API in the Reference Manual
Hilscher Error Codes, DOC100802PRxxEN (stored on the Gateway
Solutions DVD in the directory: Documentation\english\3.For
Programmers\Error Codes Compilation)
DataLen Length of the payload data in bytes uint16 0…1024
Little Endian
Data Data read from the EtherNet/IP Adapter (payload data). uint8[...] (…)
Please note that payload data is being transported 1:1 (without swapping),
therefore the PLC might needs to swap the data before processing it.
Table 96: Elements of RDREC REPLY from Message Record
9.5.2.5 Example of a Reading Task
Activating the Reading Task

In case the PROFINET PLC wants to read the device name from an
EtherNet/IP Adapter with the IP address 192.168.10.2, the Write Data
Record (WRREC) to the Gateway contains the following parameters:
Syntax
WRREC WRREC DATA
PROFINET ID Slot Subslot Index IP Address Service Class Instance Attribute DataLen
(…) 0x0000 0x0001 0x0001 0xC0 0xA8 0x0E00 0x0100 0x0100 0x0700 0x0000
0x0A 0x02
Table 97: Example of WRREC for a Reading Task
Querying the Request State from the Status Register

The Read Data Record (RDREC), which the PROFINET PLC sends to the
gateway in order to read the Request State from the Status Register of
the acyclic channel, contains the following parameters:
Syntax
RDREC
PROFINET ID Slot Subslot Index MLEN
(…) 0x0000 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004
Table 98: Example of RDREC to Status Register
Answer from the Gateway in Case of Unfinished Reading Task

If the gateway has not yet received the answer from the EtherNet/IP
Adapter, the RDREC REPLY, which the Gateway sends back to the
PROFINET PLC, contains the following parameters:
Syntax
RDREC REPLY
LEN Data
0x0004 0x02000000
Table 99: Example of RDREC REPLY from Status Register in Case of an Unfinished
Reading Task
Answer from the Gateway in Case of Finished Reading Task

If the answer from the EtherNet/IP Adapter has arrived at the gateway, the
RDREC REPLY, which the Gateway sends back to the PROFINET PLC,
contains the following parameters:
Syntax
RDREC REPLY
LEN Data
0x0004 0x04000000
Table 100: Example of RDREC REPLY from Status Register in Case of a Finished Reading
Task

Reading the Answer from the Message Record
gateway in order to read the returned payload data of the EtherNet/IP
Adapter from the Message Record of the acyclic channel, contains the
following parameters (the expected length of the payload data is eight
bytes):
Syntax
RDREC
(…) 0x0000 0x0001 0x0001 0x0008
Table 101: Example of RDREC to Message Record
Answer from the Message Record with Payload Data from the
EtherNet/IP Adapter
The Read Record Reply (RDREC Reply) containing the payload data of
the EtherNet/IP Adapter, which the gateway sends to the PROFINET PLC,
contains the following parameters (no error occurred, i. e. Status = 0
= Success):
Syntax
RDREC REPLY
IP Address Service Status DataLen Data
0xC0 0xA8 0x0A 0x02 0x0E00 0x00000000 0x0800 0x54 0x45 0x4d 0x45 0x4c 0x4b 0x4f
0x56
Table 102: Example of RDREC REPLY from Message Record

9.5.3 Writing Data into an EtherNet/IP Adapter

9.5.3.1 Sequence of a Writing Task
acyclic write request for an EtherNet/IP Adapter (see also diagram on
following page):
1 The PROFINET PLC sends a Write Data Record (WRREC) to Slot 0,

Subslot 1 and an uneven Index number (1 or 3 or 5 etc) within
gateway. The gateway stores the task in the Message Record of the
acyclic channel and synchronously forwards the writing task as
“unconnected message” to the EtherNet/IP Adapter.
acyclic channel to value 2 and sends back a WRREC ACK
(acknowledgement) to the PLC. The EtherNet/IP Adapter executes the
requested writing task.
3 The PROFINET PLC queries the state of the task at regular intervals by
sending a Read Data Record (RDREC) to the Status Register of the
acyclic channel in the gateway (“status polling”). As long as the
gateway has not yet received the response from the EtherNet/IP
Adapter, the Status Register is returning Request State 2.
Note: Instead of polling the Status Register, the PLC can send a
RDREC directly to the Message Record, expecting that the response
from the EtherNet/IP Adapter has already arrived at the gateway and
can be read from there. If the response from the Adapter has not yet
arrived at the gateway at the time of the PLC reading the Message
Record, the Request State in the Status Register is set to value 3 and
the RDREC REPLY from the gateway to the PLC is stalled until the
response from the Adapter arrives.
Note that if the EtherNet/IP Adapter is slow, the RDREC of the Message
Record might get timed-out. Therefore “status polling” should be done
before reading the Message Record.
4 The response from the EtherNet/IP Adapter containing a status

message arrives at the gateway, where it is stored in the Message
Record of the acyclic channel. The gateway sets the Request State in
the Status Register to value 4.
5 The PROFINET PLC again sends a Read Data Record (RDREC) to
the Status Register, and the gateway now returns Request State 4.
The PLC now knows that the response from the slave has arrived and
can be read from the Message Record.
6 The PLC now sends a Read Data Record (RDREC) to the Message
Record of the acyclic channel in order to read the response. In case
the EtherNet/IP Adapter reported an error in step 4, the PLC now
receives an error code in the Status field of the RDREC REPLY and
can react accordingly.

Figure 166: Sequence Acyclic Writing Task PROFINET to EtherNet/IP

9.5.3.2 Data Elements for a Writing Task
The PROFINET IO PLC sends the writing task for the EtherNet/IP Adapter
to Slot 0, Subslot 1 and an uneven Index in the gateway by using a Write
Data Record containing the following elements:
WRREC

ID 0
Index Object for Message Record in acyclic channel: uint16 n
uneven number 1…65533
LEN Maximum length of the WRREC DATA in bytes uint16 14 +
DataLen
WRREC DATA

Set Attribute Single Little Endian
Class ID of the object class to be written in the EtherNet/IP uint16 (…)
Instance ID of the object instance to be written in the EtherNet/IP uint16 (…)
Attribute ID of the attribute to be written in the EtherNet/IP Adapter uint16 (…)
Little Endian
DataLen Length of the data field (payload data) uint16 1…1024
Little Endian
Data Data to be written in the EtherNet/IP Adapter (payload data). uint8[1…1024] (…)
Please note that payload data is being transported 1:1
(without swapping), therefore the PLC might needs to swap
the data before writing it.
Table 103: Elements of WRREC for Writing Task
9.5.3.3 Elements for Querying the Request State from the Status Register
The PROFINET IO PLC can read the request state from the Status
Register of the acyclic channel by sending a Read Data Record (RDREC)
to Slot 0, Subslot 1 and the even Index following the uneven Index of the
Message Record. The RDREC contains the following elements:
RDREC

ID 0
Index Object for Status Register in acyclic channel: uint16 n + 1
(even number following the index number of the Message
Record)
Table 104: Elements of RDREC for Status Register

The Read Record Reply (RDREC Reply) containing the Request State
from the Status Register, which the gateway sends back to the PROFINET
RDREC Reply
LEN Length of the data in bytes uint16 4

Data Request State read from the Status Register: uint32 0…4
0 = MSG_STATE_INIT Little Endian
1 = MSG_STATE_IDLE
2 = MSG_STATE_REQ_SENT
3 = MSG_STATE_RSP_REQUESTED
4 = MSG_STATE_RSP_RECEIVED
Table 105: Elements RDREC Reply from Status Register
9.5.3.4 Elements for Reading the Response from the Message Record
The PROFINET PLC can retrieve the response from the EtherNet/IP
Adapter by sending a Read Data Record (RDREC) to the Message
Record of the acyclic channel (Slot 0, Subslot 1 and the uneven Index).
The RDREC contains the following elements:
RDREC

ID 0
Index Object for Message Record in acyclic channel uint16 n
Table 106: Elements of RDREC for Message Record

The Read Record Reply (RDREC Reply) containing the response and the
status message from the EtherNet/IP Adapter, which the gateway sends
back to the PROFINET PLC, contains the following elements:
RDREC Reply

Set Attribute Single Little Endian
Status Status value 0 means no error occurred uint32 (…)
If other value than 0 is returned, please refer to Status/Error Codes Little Endian
provided in chapter EtherNet/IP Scanner Protocol API in the
Reference Manual Hilscher Error Codes, DOC100802PRxxEN
(stored on the Gateway Solutions DVD in the directory:
Documentation\english\3.For Programmers\Error
Codes Compilation)
Table 107: Elements of RDREC REPLY from Message Record

9.5.3.5 Example of a Writing Task
Activating the Writing Task

In case the PROFINET PLC wants to set the Input Range (Attribute = 7) of
an Analog Input Point (Class = 10) of module 1 (Instance = 1) in an
EtherNet/IP Adapter (IP address = 192.168.10.2) to the voltage range of
0V...10V (Value = 2), the Write Data Record (WRREC) to the gateway
contains the following parameters:
Syntax
WRREC WRREC DATA
PROFINET Slot Subslot Index IP Address Service Class Instance Attribute DataLen Data
ID
(…) 0x0000 0x0001 0x0001 0xC0 0xA8 0x1000 0x0A00 0x0100 0x0700 0x0100 0x02
0x0A 0x02
Table 108: Example of WRREC for a Writing Task
Querying the Request State from the Status Register

gateway in order to read the Request State from the Status Register of
the acyclic channel, contains the following parameters:
Syntax
RDREC
(…) 0x0000 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004
Table 109: Example of RDREC to Status Register
Answer from the Gateway in Case of Unfinished Writing Task

If the gateway has not yet received the response from the EtherNet/IP
Adapter, the RDREC REPLY, which the Gateway sends back to the
PROFINET PLC, contains the following parameters:
Syntax
RDREC REPLY
LEN Data
0x0004 0x02000000
Table 110: Example of RDREC REPLY from Status Register in Case of an Unfinished
Writing Task
Answer from the Gateway in Case of Finished Writing Task

If the response from the EtherNet/IP Adapter has arrived at the gateway,
the RDREC REPLY, which the Gateway sends back to the PROFINET
PLC, contains the following parameters:
Syntax
RDREC REPLY
LEN Data
0x0004 0x04000000
Table 111: Example of RDREC REPLY from Status Register in Case of a Finished Writing
Task

Reading the Response of the EtherNet/IP Adapter from the Message
Record
gateway in order to read the response of the EtherNet/IP Adapter from the
Message Record of the acyclic channel, contains the following
parameters:
Syntax
RDREC
(…) 0x0000 0x0001 0x0001 0x000A
Table 112: Example of RDREC to Message Record
Answer from the Message Record Containing the Response from the
EtherNet/IP Adapter
The Read Record Reply (RDREC Reply) containing the response from the
EtherNet/IP Adapter, which the gateway sends to the PROFINET PLC,
contains the following parameters (no error occurred, i. e. Status = 0
= Success):
Syntax
RDREC REPLY
IP Address Service Data
0xC0 0xA8 0x0A 0x02 0x1000 0x00000000
Table 113: Example of RDREC REPLY from Message Record
9.5.4 PNIO Error Codes for WRREC and RDREC

In case of a Write/Read Data Record error, the acyclic channel returns the
following PNIO Error Codes to the PROFINET-Controller:
Write Data Record Error Read Data Record Error
Error Code Meaning Error Code Meaning
0xDF80A200 General write fault 0xDE80A200 General read fault

0xDF80B300 Invalid secondary network 0xDE80A000 Secondary network interface replied
message format with no data
0xDF80C200 Write to Message Record is 0xDE80B500 Read of Message Record is invoked
invoked in invalid state in invalid state
0xDF80B800 Write record service is invoked 0xDE80B800 Read record service is invoked on
on invalid Subslot invalid Subslot
0xDF80B80F Maximum number of available 0xDE80B80F Maximum number of available acyclic
acyclic channels exceeded channels exceeded
Table 114: PNIO Error Codes WRREC and RDREC

Acyclic Communication of NT 151-CCIES-RE 315/355
10 Acyclic Communication of NT 151-CCIES-RE

10.1 Overview
The NT 151-CCIES-RE supports acyclic data exchange between the
PROFINET IO and the CC-Link IE Field network.
The gateway itself cannot “initiate” acyclic communication. It waits for
acyclic communication requests from the IO Controller or the CC-Link IE
Field Master, and processes them.
PROFINET uses Read/Write Requests for delivering and fetching
acyclic messages, whereas CC-Link IE Field uses SLMP (Seamless
Message Protocol).
The gateway provides two separate mechanisms for acyclic data
exchange:
• via its “Message Interface” with two pre-defined data buffers,
controlled by a “handshake” procedure.
• via “User Defined Buffer”, which can be created by the user during
device configuration in SYCON.net. These buffers are accessed
without “handshake” procedure.
The following picture shows the data flow of the acyclic communication
(indicated in blue) and of the cyclic status messages reporting the state of
the acyclic buffers (indicated in green).
Figure 167: Acyclic Communication NT 151-CCIES-RE
Note: The acyclic data are transmitted “1-to-1” (i.e. “transparently”).

This means that the applications of the IO Controller and the CC-Link IE
Master may have to invert the data format before processing.

10.2 Message Interface Buffer

10.2.1 Overview
The Message Interface consists of two pre-configured buffers:
Buffer 1
Buffer for the acyclic data to be transported from CC-Link IE Field to
PROFINET.
For writing data to this buffer, the CC-Link IE Field Master uses the SMLP
Memory Write command (1613) at the 0x00000000 address of the CC-
Link IE Field slave module in the gateway.
For reading acyclic data from this buffer, the PROFINET IO Controller uses
a Read Request at Slot 1, Subslot 2, Index 1 of the PROFINET IO
Device module in the gateway.
Buffer 2
Buffer for the acyclic data to be transported from PROFINET to CC-Link IE
Field.
For writing data to this buffer, the PROFINET IO Controller uses a Write
Request at Slot 1, Subslot 1, Index 1 of the PROFINET IO Device
module in the gateway.
For reading acyclic data from this buffer, CC-Link IE Field Master uses the
Memory Read command (0613) at the 0x00000400 address of the CC-
Link IE Field slave module in the gateway.
Figure 168: Acyclic Communication via Message Interface Buffer

10.2.2 Cyclic Status Reports of Message Interface Buffers

While reading and writing of the Message Interface Buffer is an acyclical
act – i.e. happening only occasionally and on special request – the state of
the buffer (i.e. whether it is “empty” or “full”) is continuously reported to the
IO Controller and to the CC-Link IE Field Master via cyclic telegrams.
These status reports are used for the “handshake” procedure.
PROFINET
In its cyclic “Input Process Image”, the gateway reports in its “Coupler
Management Submodule” (Slot 1, Subslot 5) the following status
information to the PROFINET IO Controller:
Name Module Type Meaning
CIE_ACYC_MSG Slot 1, Subslot 5 Bit TRUE The CC-Link IE Master has written acyclic message to
Buffer 1, waiting to be read by the IO Controller.
FALSE No acyclic message waiting in Buffer 1
CIE_ACYC_LEN Slot 1, Subslot 5 WORD Length of the acyclic message waiting in Buffer 1
PN_ACYC_BUF Slot 1, Subslot 5 Bit TRUE Buffer 2 is ready (empty); the IO Controller can write
acyclic message for the CC-Link IE Master to Buffer 2
FALSE Buffer 2 is not ready
Table 115: Cyclic State Reports of Acyclic Buffers for PROFINET
After the IO Controller has retrieved the acyclic message from Buffer 1, the
CIE_ACYC_MSG and CIE_ACYC_LEN parameters are reset.
CC-Link IE Field
In its cyclic “Input Process Image”, the gateway reports the following status
information to the CC-Link IE Master via RX (Input Bit Data) and RWr (Input
Word Data):
Name Memory area Type Bit/Word Meaning
Address
PN_ACYC_MSG RX Bit RX4 TRUE The IO Controller has written acyclic
(Coupler RX message to Buffer 2, waiting to be read by
buffer/CRXB) the CC-Link IE Master
FALSE No acyclic message waiting in Buffer 2
PN_ACYC_LEN RWr WORD RWr0 Length of the acyclic message waiting in Buffer 2
(Coupler RWr
buffer/CRWrB)
CIE_ACYC_BUF RX Bit RX5 TRUE Buffer 1 is ready (empty); the CC-Link IE
(Coupler RX Master can write acyclic message for the IO
buffer/CRXB) Controller to Buffer 1
FALSE Buffer 1 is not ready
Table 116: Cyclic State Reports of Acyclic Buffers for CC-Link IE Field
After the CC-Link IE Master has retrieved the acyclic message from
Buffer 2, the PN_ACYC_MSG and PN_ACYC_LEN parameters are reset.

10.2.3 Sequence of Acyclic Data Transfer from PROFINET to CC-Link

IE Field
This section describes the handshake procedure and the sequence of the
acyclic data transfer from PROFINET to CC-Link IE Field via the Message
Interface of the gateway.
1 Status report in cyclic data exchange in CC-Link IE Field
1.1 CC-Link IE Field Master sends cyclic request service to gateway
1.2 No data waiting in Buffer 2: The gateway replies in cyclic response service:
RX[4]: PN_ACYC_MSG = OFF/FALSE
RWr[0]: PN_ACYC_LEN = 0
2 Status report in cyclic data exchange in PROFINET
2.1 PROFINET IO Controller sends cyclic request service to gateway
2.2 No data in Buffer 2. The gateway replies in cyclic response service in Slot 1, Subslot 5:
PN_ACYC_BUF = ON/TRUE (buffer is empty and thus available for write request)
3 PROFINET IO Controller writes acyclic message
3.1 PROFINET IO Controller sends message in acyclic Write Request in Slot 1, Subslot 1,
Index 1.
3.2 Gateway stores message in Buffer 2 and sends acyclic Write Response (confirming the
writing)
4.2 Data in Buffer 2. The gateway replies in cyclic response service in Slot 1, Subslot 5:
PN_ACYC_BUF = OFF/FALSE (buffer is occupied, thus not available for further write request)
5.2 Data in Buffer 2 waiting: The gateway replies in cyclic response service:
RX[4]: PN_ACYC_MSG = ON/TRUE
RWr[0]: PN_ACYC_LEN = XX
6 CC-Link IE Field Master reads acyclic message via SLMP
6.1 The CC-Link IE Master sends a Memory Read Command (0613) at 0x00000400
6.2 The gateway prepares the data and sends it in its Memory Read Response to the CC-Link
IE Master
7.2 No data in Buffer 2: The gateway replies in cyclic response service:
RX[4]: PN_ACYC_MSG = OFF/FALSE
RWr[0]: PN_ACYC_LEN = 0
8.2 No data in Buffer 2: The gateway replies in cyclic response service in Slot 1, Subslot 5:
PN_ACYC_BUF = ON/TRUE (buffer is empty and thus available for new write request)

Figure 169: Sequence of Acyclic Communication of PROFINET to CC-Link IE Field

10.2.4 Sequence of Acyclic Data Transfer from CC-Link IE Field to
PROFINET
This section describes the handshake procedure and the sequence of
acyclic data transfer from CC-Link IE Field to PROFINET via the Message
Interface of the gateway.
1.2 No data waiting in Buffer 1: The gateway replies in cyclic response service in Slot 1,
Subslot 5: CIE_ACYC_MSG = OFF/FALSE and CIE_ACYC_LEN = 0
2.2 No data in Buffer 1. The gateway replies in cyclic response service:
RX[5]: CIE_ACYC_BUF = ON/TRUE (buffer is empty and thus available for write request)
3 CC-Link IE Field Master writes acyclic message via SLMP
3.1 CC-Link IE Field Master sends message data with Memory Write Command (1613) at
0x00000000
3.2 Gateway stores message in Buffer 1 and sends acyclic Write Response (confirming the
writing)
4.2 Data in Buffer 1. The gateway replies in cyclic response service:
RX[5]: CIE_ACYC_BUF = OFF/FALSE (buffer is occupied, thus not available for further
write request)
5.2 Data waiting in Buffer 1: The gateway replies in cyclic response in Slot 1, Subslot 5:
CIE_ACYC_MSG = ON/TRUE and CIE_ACYC_LEN = XX
6 PROFINET IO Controller reads acyclic message

6.1 PROFINET IO Controller sends Read Request at Slot 1, Subslot 2, Index 1
6.2 The gateway prepares the data and sends it in its Read Response to the PROFINET IO
Controller
7.2 No data in Buffer 1: The gateway replies in cyclic response in Slot 1, Subslot 5:
CIE_ACYC_MSG = OFF/FALSE and CIE_ACYC_LEN = 0
8.2 No data in Buffer 1: The gateway replies in cyclic response service:
RX[5]: CIE_ACYC_BUF = ON/TRUE (buffer is empty and thus available for new write
request)

Figure 170: Sequence of Acyclic Communication of CC-Link IE Field to PROFINET

10.3 User Defined Buffer

During device configuration in SYCON.net, the user can create up to 256
additional buffers for acyclic data exchange between the two networks (see
section Configuring Acyclic Communication on page 106).
Unlike the Message Interface Buffers described in the previous section,
each of these User Defined Buffers allows direct read and write access
from both networks sides.
Since there are no cyclical status messages to the IO Controller or CC-Link
IE Master indicating the states of the user defined buffers, there is no real
“handshake” procedure for this data exchange. Thus, read and write
accesses must be synchronized by the applications of the IO Controller and
the CC-Link IE Master. The gateway is only responsible for keeping the
data consistent.
To access a user defined buffer, PROFINET uses a Read/Write Request at
Slot 1, Submodule 5 with an Index starting from 0xB001 to 0xBFFF
(one Index per buffer).
CC-Link IE Field uses an SLMP Memory Read/Write command at an
address starting from 0x00001000 to 0xFFFFFFFF (one address per
buffer).
Figure 171: Acyclic Communication via User Defined Buffers

Diagnosis and Status Messages of NT 151-CCIES-RE 323/355
11 Diagnosis and Status Messages of NT 151-CCIES-RE

11.1 Overview
In addition to the "regular" I/O process data, the NT 151-CCIES-RE also
reports status information or "diagnostic data" in its cyclic telegrams to the
IO Controller and to the CC-Link IE Field Master, which concern the basic
operating status of the gateway and the connection to the other network.
The following two sections show the positions of the diagnosis and status
parameters within the cyclical telegrams.
11.2 Cyclic PROFINET Input Frame (Gateway to IO Controller)

The following table shows the cyclic PROFINET input frame from the
gateway to the IO Controller.
Length Offset Module Bit Element Value Meaning
(Byte) (Byte)
N 0 Slot 1, Subslot 2 Variable 1 (...) Process data for the IO

(CIS – Coupler Input ... Controller.
Submodule) Variable N These are the variables
configured in SYCON.net in the
Direction CC-Link/IE to
PROFINET (see section Define
Variables for Cyclic Data on
page 103)
1 N+1 Slot 1, Subslot 5 0 CP_Error 0 FALSE: No error
(CMS – Coupler 1 TRUE: Error detected (gateway
Management Submodule)
specifies error in Error Code)
1 Reserved 0 Not used
2 CIE_Connected 0 FALSE: Gateway not connected
to CC-Link IE Field Master
1 TRUE: Gateway connected to
CC-Link IE Field Master and in
cyclic data exchange
3 CIE_DataStatus 0 FALSE: Connected CC-Link IE
Field Master is in STOP mode
(MyStatus.nodeStatus)
1 TRUE: Connected CC-Link IE
Field Master is in RUN mode
(MyStatus.nodeStatus)
4 CIE_ACYC_MSG 0 FALSE: No acyclic message
data
1 TRUE: The CC-Link IE Field
Master has written acyclic
message to Buffer 1, waiting to
be read by the IO Controller
5 PN_ACYC_BUF 0 FALSE: Buffer 2 is not ready/not
empty
1 TRUE: Buffer 2 in gateway is
ready/empty; the IO Controller
can write acyclic message to
Buffer 2, destined for the CC-
Link IE Field Master

Length Offset Module Bit Element Value Meaning
(Byte) (Byte)
1 N+2 Slot 1, Subslot 5 8 Error Code 0x00 No error or error has vanished
(CMS – Coupler (CP_Error = FALSE)
0x01 “Consistency Key Mismatch”:
The configuration files of the
gateway, the IO Controller and
the CC-Link IE Masters have
different “Consistency Key”
numbers; i.e. configuration
versions might not be identical.
0x02 Configuration error: No valid
configuration found in gateway.
0x03 Configuration error:
Module/Submodule mismatch
between IO Controller
configuration and IO Device
configuration.
0x0A The last acyclic requested read
or write service exceeds the
maximum buffer size.
2 N+3 Slot 1, Subslot 5 CIE_ACYC_LEN (...) Length of acyclic message data
(CMS – Coupler in Buffer 1
Table 117: PROFINET Input Process Image
Note: In case of a missing or invalid gateway configuration, access to

Coupler Management Submodule is not possible, therefore error codes
0x02 and 0x03 cannot be reported to the PROFINET IO Controller in
the cyclic diagnosis messages.
This configuration error state can thus only be diagnosed by checking
the APL LED at the gateway device itself.
See APL LED section in user manual netTAP NT 151-CCIES-RE,
DOC180403UMxxEN.

11.3 CC-Link IE Field Master Input Frames (Gateway to

Master)
The following table shows the cyclic CC-Link IE Field input frame from the
gateway to the Master.
Length Offset Memory area Bit Parameter Value Meaning
(Byte) (Byte)
2 0 Input Word Data: 16 PN_ACYC_LEN (...) Length of acyclic message data in

RWr0 Buffer 2
1 2 Input Word Data: 8 Error Code 0x00 No error or error has vanished
RWr1 (Lower Byte) (CP_Error = FALSE)
0x01 “Consistency Key Mismatch”:
The configuration files of the gateway,
the IO Controller and the CC-Link IE
Masters have different “Consistency
Key” numbers; i.e. configuration
versions might not be identical.
0x02 Configuration error: No valid
configuration found in gateway.
0x03 Configuration error:
Module/Submodule mismatch
between IO Controller configuration
and IO Device configuration.
0x0A The last acyclic requested read or
write service exceeds the maximum
buffer size.
1 3 Input Word Data: 8 Padding Byte 0x00 Not used, “Padding Byte”
RWr1 (Higher Byte)
N 4 Input Word Data: Variable 1 (...) Process data for the CC-Link IE Field
RWr2 ... Master.
... Variable N These are the variables configured in
RWrN (Array of Words) SYCON.net in the Direction
PROFINET to CC-Link/IE which
are not of Data Type Bit or Bool
(see section Define Variables for
Cyclic Data on page 103)
1 N+4 Input Bit Data: RX0 CP_Error 0 FALSE: No error
RX0 1 TRUE: Error detected (gateway
... specifies error in Error Code)
RX7
RX1 Reserved 0 Not used
(Status Bits)
RX2 PN_Connected 0 FALSE: Gateway not connected to
PROFINET IO Controller
1 TRUE: Gateway connected to
PROFINET IO Controller and in cyclic
data exchange
RX3 PN_DataStatus 0 FALSE: Connected PROFINET IO
Controller is in STOP mode
(APDU Status)
1 TRUE: Connected PROFINET IO
Controller is in RUN mode
(APDU Status)
RX4 PN_ACYC_MSG 0 FALSE: No acyclic message data
1 TRUE: The PROFINET IO Controller
has written acyclic message to Buffer
2, waiting to be read by the CC-Link
IE Field Master

Length Offset Memory area Bit Parameter Value Meaning
(Byte) (Byte)
RX5 CIE_ACYC_BUF 0 FALSE: Buffer 1 is not ready/not

empty
1 TRUE: Buffer 1 in gateway is
ready/empty; the CC-Link IE Field
Master can write acyclic message to
Buffer 1, destined for the PROFINET
IO Controller
N N+5 Input Bit Data: Variable 1 (...) Process data for the CC-Link IE Field
RX8 ... Master.
... Variable N These are the variables configured in
RXN (if Data Type = Bit SYCON.net in the Direction
or Bool) PROFINET to CC-Link/IE which
are of Data Type Bit or Bool (see
section Define Variables for Cyclic
Data on page 103)
Table 118: CC-Link IE Field Master Input Process Image
Note: In case of a missing or invalid gateway configuration, access to

the “Coupler RX Buffer” (CRXB) is not possible, therefore error codes
0x02 and 0x03 cannot be reported to the CC-Link IE Field Master in
the cyclic diagnosis messages.
This configuration error state can thus only be diagnosed by checking
the APL LED at the gateway device itself.
For details, see APL LED section in user manual netTAP NT 151-
CCIES-RE, DOC180403UMxxEN.

Error Codes 327/355
12 Error Codes
12.1 Overview Error Codes
Overview Error Codes Range
ODM Server General ODM Error Codes: 0x8004C700 to 0x8004C761
General ODM Driver Error Codes: 0x8004C7A0 to 0x8004C7C2
ODM Drivers cifX Driver Specific ODM Error: 0x8004C001 to 0x8004C0A4
DBM ODM Error Codes DBM V4: 0xC004C810 to 0xC004C878
Table 119: Overview Error Codes and Ranges
All other error codes can be found in the API manual Hilscher status and
error codes – Firmware and driver, DOC100802APIxxEN.
12.2 ODM Error Codes
12.2.1 General ODM Error Codes

Error Code (Definition) Value Description
CODM3_E_INTERNALERROR 0x8004C700 Internal ODM Error
ODM3_E_DESCRIPTION_NOTFOUND 0x8004C701 Description not found in ODM database
CODM3_E_WRITEREGISTRY 0x8004C710 Error writing to the registry
CODM3_E_BAD_REGULAR_EXPRESSION 0x8004C711 Invalid regular expression
CODM3_E_COMCATEGORIE_MANAGER_ 0x8004C712 Component Category Manager could not
FAILED be instantiated
CODM3_E_COMCATEGORIE_ENUMERATION_ 0x8004C713 Driver could not be enumerated by the
FAILED Category Manager
CODM3_E_CREATE_LOCAL_BUFFER 0x8004C714 Error creating local buffers
CODM3_E_UNKNOWNHANDLE 0x8004C715 Unknown handle
CODM3_E_QUEUE_LIMIT_REACHED 0x8004C717 Queue size limit for connection reached
CODM3_E_DATASIZE_ZERO 0x8004C718 Zero data length passed
CODM3_E_INVALID_DATA 0x8004C719 Invalid data content
CODM3_E_INVALID_MODE 0x8004C71A Invalid mode
CODM3_E_DATABASE_READ 0x8004C71B Error reading database
CODM3_E_CREATE_DEVICE_THREAD 0x8004C750 Error creating device thread
CODM3_E_CREATE_DEVICE_THREAD_STOP_ 0x8004C751 Error creating device thread stop event
EVENT
CODM3_E_CLIENT_NOT_REGISTERED 0x8004C752 Client is not registered at the ODM
CODM3_E_NO_MORE_CLIENTS 0x8004C753 Maximum number of clients reached
CODM3_E_MAX_CLIENT_CONNECTIONS_ 0x8004C754 Maximum number of client connections
REACHED reached
CODM3_E_ENTRY_NOT_FOUND 0x8004C755 Driver/device not found
CODM3_E_DRIVER_NOT_FOUND 0x8004C757 The requested driver is unknown to the
ODM
CODM3_E_DEVICE_ALREADY_LOCKED 0x8004C758 Device is locked by another process
CODM3_E_DEVICE_UNLOCKED_FAILED 0x8004C759 Device could not be unlocked, lock was
set by another process

Error Codes 328/355
CODM3_E_DEVICE_LOCK_NECCESSARY 0x8004C75A Operation requires a device lock to be set
CODM3_E_DEVICE_SUBSCRIPTIONLIMIT 0x8004C75B Maximum number of servers registered for
this device reached
CODM3_E_DEVICE_NOTSUBSCRIBED 0x8004C75C Process is not registered as a server on
this device
CODM3_E_DEVICE_NO_MESSAGE 0x8004C75D No message available
CODM3_E_TRANSFERTIMEOUT 0x8004C760 Message transfer timeout
CODM3_E_MESSAGE_INSERVICE 0x8004C761 Message in service
Table 120: ODM Error Codes - General ODM Error Codes
12.2.2 General ODM Driver Error Codes

CODM3_E_DRV_OPEN_DEVICE 0x8004C7A0 Packet type unsupported by driver
CODM3_E_DRV_INVALID_IDENTIFIER 0x8004C7A1 Invalid device identifier
CODM3_E_DRV_DEVICE_PARAMETERS_ 0x8004C7A3 Parameters differ from requested device
MISMATCH
CODM3_E_DRV_BROWSE_NO_DEVICES 0x8004C7A4 No devices found
CODM3_E_DRV_CREATE_DEVICE_INST 0x8004C7A5 Device instance could not be created
CODM3_E_DRV_DEVICE_NOMORE_TX 0x8004C7A6 Device connection limit reached
CODM3_E_DRV_DEVICE_DUPLICATE_TX 0x8004C7A7 Duplicate transmitter ID
CODM3_E_DRV_DEVICE_NOT_CONFIGURED 0x8004C7A8 Device is not configured
CODM3_E_DRV_DEVICE_COMMUNICATION 0x8004C7A9 Device communication error
CODM3_E_DRV_DEVICE_NO_MESSAGE 0x8004C7AA No message available
CODM3_E_DRV_DEVICE_NOT_READY 0x8004C7AB Device not ready
CODM3_E_DRV_INVALIDCONFIGURATION 0x8004C7AC Invalid driver configuration
CODM3_E_DRV_DLINVALIDMODE 0x8004C7C0 Invalid download mode
CODM3_E_DRV_DLINPROGRESS 0x8004C7C1 Download is active
CODM3_E_DRV_ULINPROGRESS 0x8004C7C2 Upload is active
Table 121: ODM Error Codes - General ODM Driver Error Codes

Error Codes 329/355
12.2.3 cifX Driver Specific ODM Error Codes
cifX Driver Specific ODM Error Codes

DRV_E_BOARD_NOT_INITIALIZED 0x8004C001 DRIVER Board not initialized
DRV_E_INIT_STATE_ERROR 0x8004C002 DRIVER Error in internal init state
DRV_E_READ_STATE_ERROR 0x8004C003 DRIVER Error in internal read state
DRV_E_CMD_ACTIVE 0x8004C004 DRIVER Command on this channel is
active
DRV_E_PARAMETER_UNKNOWN 0x8004C005 DRIVER Unknown parameter in function
DRV_E_WRONG_DRIVER_VERSION 0x8004C006 DRIVER Version is incompatible with DLL
DRV_E_PCI_SET_CONFIG_MODE 0x8004C007 DRIVER Error during PCI set configuration
mode
DRV_E_PCI_READ_DPM_LENGTH 0x8004C008 DRIVER Could not read PCI dual port
memory length
DRV_E_PCI_SET_RUN_MODE 0x8004C009 DRIVER Error during PCI set run mode
DRV_E_DEV_DPM_ACCESS_ERROR 0x8004C00A DEVICE Dual port ram not
accessable(board not found)
DRV_E_DEV_NOT_READY 0x8004C00B DEVICE Not ready (ready flag failed)
DRV_E_DEV_NOT_RUNNING 0x8004C00C DEVICE Not running (running flag failed)
DRV_E_DEV_WATCHDOG_FAILED 0x8004C00D DEVICE Watchdog test failed
DRV_E_DEV_OS_VERSION_ERROR 0x8004C00E DEVICE Signals wrong OS version
DRV_E_DEV_SYSERR 0x8004C00F DEVICE Error in dual port flags
DRV_E_DEV_MAILBOX_FULL 0x8004C010 DEVICE Send mailbox is full
DRV_E_DEV_PUT_TIMEOUT 0x8004C011 DEVICE PutMessage timeout
DRV_E_DEV_GET_TIMEOUT 0x8004C012 DEVICE GetMessage timeout
DRV_E_DEV_GET_NO_MESSAGE 0x8004C013 DEVICE No message available
DRV_E_DEV_RESET_TIMEOUT 0x8004C014 DEVICE RESET command timeout
DRV_E_DEV_NO_COM_FLAG 0x8004C015 DEVICE COM-flag not set. Check if Bus is
running
DRV_E_DEV_EXCHANGE_FAILED 0x8004C016 DEVICE I/O data exchange failed
DRV_E_DEV_EXCHANGE_TIMEOUT 0x8004C017 DEVICE I/O data exchange timeout
DRV_E_DEV_COM_MODE_UNKNOWN 0x8004C018 DEVICE I/O data mode unknown
DRV_E_DEV_FUNCTION_FAILED 0x8004C019 DEVICE Function call failed
DRV_E_DEV_DPMSIZE_MISMATCH 0x8004C01A DEVICE DPM size differs from
configuration
DRV_E_DEV_STATE_MODE_UNKNOWN 0x8004C01B DEVICE State mode unknown
DRV_E_DEV_HW_PORT_IS_USED 0x8004C01C DEVICE Output port already in use
DRV_E_USR_OPEN_ERROR 0x8004C01E USER Driver not opened (device driver not
loaded)
DRV_E_USR_INIT_DRV_ERROR 0x8004C01F USER Can't connect to device
DRV_E_USR_NOT_INITIALIZED 0x8004C020 USER Board not initialized (DevInitBoard
not called)
DRV_E_USR_COMM_ERR 0x8004C021 USER IOCTRL function failed
DRV_E_USR_DEV_NUMBER_INVALID 0x8004C022 USER Parameter DeviceNumber invalid
DRV_E_USR_INFO_AREA_INVALID 0x8004C023 USER Parameter InfoArea unknown
DRV_E_USR_NUMBER_INVALID 0x8004C024 USER Parameter Number invalid
DRV_E_USR_MODE_INVALID 0x8004C025 USER Parameter Mode invalid
DRV_E_USR_MSG_BUF_NULL_PTR 0x8004C026 USER NULL pointer assignment
DRV_E_USR_MSG_BUF_TOO_SHORT 0x8004C027 USER Message buffer too small

Error Codes 330/355

DRV_E_USR_SIZE_INVALID 0x8004C028 USER Parameter Size invalid
DRV_E_USR_SIZE_ZERO 0x8004C02A USER Parameter Size with zero length
DRV_E_USR_SIZE_TOO_LONG 0x8004C02B USER Parameter Size too long
DRV_E_USR_DEV_PTR_NULL 0x8004C02C USER Device address null pointer
DRV_E_USR_BUF_PTR_NULL 0x8004C02D USER Pointer to buffer is a null pointer
DRV_E_USR_SENDSIZE_TOO_LONG 0x8004C02E USER Parameter SendSize too large
DRV_E_USR_RECVSIZE_TOO_LONG 0x8004C02F USER Parameter ReceiveSize too large
DRV_E_USR_SENDBUF_PTR_NULL 0x8004C030 USER Pointer to send buffer is a null
pointer
DRV_E_USR_RECVBUF_PTR_NULL 0x8004C031 USER Pointer to receive buffer is a null
pointer
DRV_E_DMA_INSUFF_MEM 0x8004C032 DMA Memory allocation error
DRV_E_DMA_TIMEOUT_CH4 0x8004C033 DMA Read I/O timeout
DRV_E_DMA_TIMEOUT_CH5 0x8004C034 DMA Write I/O timeout
DRV_E_DMA_TIMEOUT_CH6 0x8004C035 DMA PCI transfer timeout
DRV_E_DMA_TIMEOUT_CH7 0x8004C036 DMA Download timeout
DRV_E_DMA_DB_DOWN_FAIL 0x8004C037 DMA Database download failed
DRV_E_DMA_FW_DOWN_FAIL 0x8004C038 DMA Firmware download failed
DRV_E_CLEAR_DB_FAIL 0x8004C039 DMA Clear database on the device failed
DRV_E_DEV_NO_VIRTUAL_MEM 0x8004C03C DMA USER Virtual memory not available
DRV_E_DEV_UNMAP_VIRTUAL_MEM 0x8004C03D DMA USER Unmap virtual memory failed
DRV_E_GENERAL_ERROR 0x8004C046 DRIVER General error
DRV_E_DMA_ERROR 0x8004C047 DRIVER General DMA error
DRV_E_WDG_IO_ERROR 0x8004C048 DRIVER I/O WatchDog failed
DRV_E_WDG_DEV_ERROR 0x8004C049 DRIVER Device Watchdog failed
DRV_E_USR_DRIVER_UNKNOWN 0x8004C050 USER Driver unknown
DRV_E_USR_DEVICE_NAME_INVALID 0x8004C051 USER Device name invalid
DRV_E_USR_DEVICE_NAME_UKNOWN 0x8004C052 USER Device name unknown
DRV_E_USR_DEVICE_FUNC_NOTIMPL 0x8004C053 USER Device function not implemented
DRV_E_USR_FILE_OPEN_FAILED 0x8004C064 USER File could not be opened
DRV_E_USR_FILE_SIZE_ZERO 0x8004C065 USER File size zero
DRV_E_USR_FILE_NO_MEMORY 0x8004C066 USER Not enough memory to load file
DRV_E_USR_FILE_READ_FAILED 0x8004C067 USER File read failed
DRV_E_USR_INVALID_FILETYPE 0x8004C068 USER File type invalid
DRV_E_USR_FILENAME_INVALID 0x8004C069 USER Invalid filename
DRV_E_FW_FILE_OPEN_FAILED 0x8004C06E USER Firmware file could not be opened
DRV_E_FW_FILE_SIZE_ZERO 0x8004C06F USER Not enough memory to load
firmware file
DRV_E_FW_FILE_NO_MEMORY 0x8004C070 USER Not enough memory to load
firmware file
DRV_E_FW_FILE_READ_FAILED 0x8004C071 USER Firmware file read failed
DRV_E_FW_INVALID_FILETYPE 0x8004C072 USER Firmware file type invalid
DRV_E_FW_FILENAME_INVALID 0x8004C073 USER Firmware file name not valid
DRV_E_FW_DOWNLOAD_ERROR 0x8004C074 USER Firmware file download error
DRV_E_FW_FILENAME_NOT_FOUND 0x8004C075 USER Firmware file not found in the
internal table
DRV_E_FW_BOOTLOADER_ACTIVE 0x8004C076 USER Firmware file BOOTLOADER active

Error Codes 331/355

DRV_E_FW_NO_FILE_PATH 0x8004C077 USER Firmware file no file path
DRV_E_CF_FILE_OPEN_FAILED 0x8004C078 USER Configuration file could not be
opend
DRV_E_CF_FILE_SIZE_ZERO 0x8004C079 USER Configuration file size zero
DRV_E_CF_FILE_NO_MEMORY 0x8004C07A USER Not enough memory to load
configuration file
DRV_E_CF_FILE_READ_FAILED 0x8004C07B USER Configuration file read failed
DRV_E_CF_INVALID_FILETYPE 0x8004C07C USER Configuration file type invalid
DRV_E_CF_FILENAME_INVALID 0x8004C07D USER Configuration file name not valid
DRV_E_CF_DOWNLOAD_ERROR 0x8004C07E USER Configuration file download error
DRV_E_CF_FILE_NO_SEGMENT 0x8004C07F USER No flash segment in the
configuration file
DRV_E_CF_DIFFERS_FROM_DBM 0x8004C080 USER Configuration file differs from
database
DRV_E_DBM_SIZE_ZERO 0x8004C083 USER Database size zero
DRV_E_DBM_NO_MEMORY 0x8004C084 USER Not enough memory to upload
database
DRV_E_DBM_READ_FAILED 0x8004C085 USER Database read failed
DRV_E_DBM_NO_FLASH_SEGMENT 0x8004C086 USER Database segment unknown
DEV_E_CF_INVALID_DESCRIPT_VERSION 0x8004C096 CONFIG Version of the descript table
invalid
DEV_E_CF_INVALID_INPUT_OFFSET 0x8004C097 CONFIG Input offset is invalid
DEV_E_CF_NO_INPUT_SIZE 0x8004C098 CONFIG Input size is 0
DEV_E_CF_MISMATCH_INPUT_SIZE 0x8004C099 CONFIG Input size does not match
configuration
DEV_E_CF_INVALID_OUTPUT_OFFSET 0x8004C09A CONFIG Invalid output offset
DEV_E_CF_NO_OUTPUT_SIZE 0x8004C09B CONFIG Output size is 0
DEV_E_CF_MISMATCH_OUTPUT_SIZE 0x8004C09C CONFIG Output size does not match
configuration
DEV_E_CF_STN_NOT_CONFIGURED 0x8004C09D CONFIG Station not configured
DEV_E_CF_CANNOT_GET_STN_CONFIG 0x8004C09E CONFIG Cannot get the Station
configuration
DEV_E_CF_MODULE_DEF_MISSING 0x8004C09F CONFIG Module definition is missing
DEV_E_CF_MISMATCH_EMPTY_SLOT 0x8004C0A0 CONFIG Empty slot mismatch
DEV_E_CF_MISMATCH_INPUT_OFFSET 0x8004C0A1 CONFIG Input offset mismatch
DEV_E_CF_MISMATCH_OUTPUT_OFFSET 0x8004C0A2 CONFIG Output offset mismatch
DEV_E_CF_MISMATCH_DATA_TYPE 0x8004C0A3 CONFIG Data type mismatch
DEV_E_CF_MODULE_DEF_MISSING_NO_SI 0x8004C0A4 CONFIG Module definition is missing,(no
Slot/Idx)
Table 122: cifX Driver Specific ODM Error Codes

Error Codes 332/355
12.3 ODM Error Codes DBM V4
ODM Error Codes DBM V4

CDBM_E_MD5_INVALID 0XC004C810 Checksum invalid
CDBM_E_INTERNALERROR 0XC004C811 Internal Error
CDBM_W_WRITEREGISTRY 0X8004C812 Error writing to the registry
CDBM_E_UNEXPECTED_VALUE_ 0XC004C813 Error in a file containing the old DBM
IN_OLD_HEADER_FORMAT Header format.
CDBM_E_CHECKSUM_INVALID 0XC004C814 The Checksum of the old Header is invalid
CDBM_E_DB_ALREADY_LOADED_ FORMAT 0XC004C815 A database is already loaded
CDBM_E_NO_VALID_TRANSACTION 0XC004C816 No valid transaction handle given
CDBM_E_STD_STRUCT_ERROR 0XC004C817 An error occurred during validation of data
CDBM_E_UNSUPPORTED_ 0XC004C818 Unsupported DataType
DATA_TYPE_FORMAT
CDBM_W_CLASS_DELETED_ FORMAT 0X8004C819 Using an Object which is marked as
(Warning) deleted
CDBM_W_CLIENT_DISCONNECTED 0X8004C81A A Client has already an outstanding
(Warning) connection to a Table. The connection is
now destroyed.
CDBM_E_STRUCTURE_DEFINITION_ INVALID 0XC004C81B A structure definition of an Element in a
Table is invalid
CDBM_E_NO_DATA_AVAILABLE 0XC004C81C No data available for this operation
CDBM_E_NO_VALID_STRUCTURE 0XC004C81D No valid structure available for this
operation
CDBM_E_NO_TOGGLE_STRING_ FOUND 0XC004C81E No Toggle string found for this number
CDBM_E_ELEMENT_OUT_OF_RANGE 0XC004C81F An element wasn’t found in the Record of
a Table
CDBM_E_ELEMENT_NOT_IN_ TABLE 0XC004C820 The element is not part of the Table
CDBM_E_CANNOT_CONVERT_ 0XC004C821 The data can't be converted into the Client
INTO_CLIENT_TYPE type
CDBM_E_TRANSACTION_ ALREADY_OPEN 0XC004C822 A transaction is already open. Please
close this one first before opening a new
one.
CDBM_I_OLD_WITHOUT_HEADER 0X4004C823 Use of an old DBM file Format without
(Informational) Header
CDBM_E_HR_FROM 0XC004C824 An HRESULT was received from a
Subroutine
CDBM_E_PARAMETER 0XC004C825 A Parameter is invalid
CDBM_E_NOTIMPL 0XC004C826 Method is currently not implemented
CDBM_E_OUTOFMEMORY 0XC004C827 Out of memory
CDBM_E_NO_OPEN_TRANSACTION 0XC004C828 No transaction open
CDBM_E_NO_CONTENTS 0XC004C829 No contents available
CDBM_REC_NO_NOT_FOUND 0XC004C82A Record not found
CDBM_STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_ NOT_FOUND 0XC004C82B Element of the Structure not found
CDBM_E_NO_MORE_RECORDS_ IN_TABTYPE 0XC004C82C Table type 3 can contain only one record
CDBM_E_WRITE 0XC004C82D The data in the VARIANT must be given in
a SafeArray
CDBM_E_WRITE_NO_PARRAY 0XC004C82E The VARIANT contains no valid [parray]
element

Error Codes 333/355

CDBM_E_WRITE_CANT_ ACCESS_DATA 0XC004C82F Unable to access SafeArray Data in the
VARIANT
CDBM_E_WRITE_DATA 0XC004C830 To write the data of this Element it must be
given as a BSTR, or as an Array of
VT_UI1/VT_I1
CDBM_E_WRITE_BSTR_E1 0XC004C831 The BSTR string must have an even
length.
CDBM_E_WRITE_BSTR_E2 0XC004C832 The BSTR string must contain only hex
digits (0..9 and a/A..f/F).
CDBM_E_WRITE_CANT_ INTERPRET_ARRAY 0XC004C833 Unable to interpret data in the SafeArray.
CDBM_E_WRITE_VT_ERROR 0XC004C834 Data type in the SafeArray is not VT_UI1
or VT_I1.
CDBM_E_WRITE_LENGTH 0XC004C835 Data length is invalid for write operation of
this type.
CDBM_WRITE_ELEMENT 0XC004C836 Element not found in the Record of the
Table
CDBM_MIN_MAX_ERROR 0XC004C837 Can't write data because of min underflow
or max overflow
CDBM_TABLE_EXIST 0XC004C838 Table already exist in the database
CDBM_MIN_MAX_INVALID 0XC004C839 The Min value is greater than the Max
Value
CDBM_DEF_MIN_MAX_INVALID 0XC004C83A The Default Value is not in the range
between the Min value and the Max Value
CDBM_CANT_CHANGE_STRUCTURE_ 0XC004C83B It's not allowed to change the structure
WHILE_RECORDS_EXIST while Records exist in the Table
CDBM_NEW_STRUCT_NEEDS_TYPE 0XC004C83C In a newly added structure the data type
must be set also
CDBM_VALUE_ERROR 0XC004C83D Range error while validating a value
CDBM_DATATYPE_ UNSUPPORTED_IN_RCS 0XC004C83E The data type is unsupported in the RCS
file format
CDBM_I_COUNT_OF_TABLES_ 0X4004C83F The count of Tables exceeds the RCS
EXCEEDS_RCS_RANGE (Informational) range of Tables. This can cause problems
if the file is downloaded to RCS Systems
CDBM_I_COUNT_OF_TABLES_ 0X4004C840 The count of Tables exceeds the
EXCEEDS_OLDDBM_RANGE (Informational) DBM32.DLL range of Tables. This can
cause problems if the file is used with older
Tools using the DBM32.DLL
CDBM_UNSUPPORTED_DATATYPE_ 0XC004C841 The Data type is not compatible with the
IN_RCS_MODE old database format
CDBM_WRITE_UNSTRUCTURED_1 0XC004C842 The data of an unstructured record can
only be written with the 'Write' Method not
with 'WriteElement'.
CDBM_READ_UNSTRUCTURED_1 0XC004C843 The data of an unstructured record can
only be read with the 'Read' Method not
with 'ReadElement'
CDBM_WRITE_DATA_LENGTH_ INVALID 0XC004C844 The given data length doesn’t correspond
with the expected data length.
CDBM_UNKNOWN_VIEW_MODE 0XC004C845 The View Mode is unknown.
CDBM_E_DIAG_TABLE 0XC004C846 It doesn’t make much sense to add or
delete records from a diagnostic table
because those changes are never saved.

Error Codes 334/355

CDBM_E_ADR_STRING_ERROR 0XC004C847 The given Address string doesn’t fit the
required format of this type where all
address bytes must be in the range
between 0 and FF
CDBM_ERROR_FROM_VAR_ CHANGE_TYPE 0XC004C848 Function VariantChangeType return an
error when trying to convert the Parameter
CDBM_E_MINERROR 0XC004C849 Error while comparing the Value with the
lower range
CDBM_E_MAXERROR 0XC004C84A Error while comparing the Value with the
upper range
CDBM_E_RANGE_ERROR 0XC004C84B Value out of Range
CDBM_E_TABLE_TYPE1 0XC004C84C Table type 1 doesn’t have a unique record
length over all records
CDBM_E_TABLE_TYPE3_ ADDREC 0XC004C84D Table type 3 doesn’t allow to insert more
than one Record
CDBM_E_TABTYPE1 0XC004C84E It's not allowed to insert more Records
than structure definitions in Table Type 1
CDBM_E_TOGGLE_NOT_FOUND 0XC004C84F Could not find the string for this value in
the list of valid toggle strings
CDBM_E_TOGGLE_VALUE_IS_ EMPTY_STRING 0XC004C850 The toggle string for this value is empty.
CDBM_VARIANT2BYTEARRAY_ ERROR 0XC004C851 Error during conversion of Variant to byte
array
CDBM_E_SET_ELEM_PROP_ DEPENDENCY 0XC004C852 The Toggle Type needs also the additional
string and the additional number entries in
the Method
CDBM_E_TABTYPE1_REC_ 0XC004C853 When reading the records of Table type 1
DOESNT_CORRESPOND_ WITH_ELEMENT elementwise the record number must
correspond with the element number
CDBM_TABTYPE1_NO_DATA_ 0XC004C854 When reading the records of Table type 1
FOUND_FOR_RECORD and structure definitions are present it's
assumed that for each structure element a
corresponding record must exist
CDBM_E_TABTYPE1_WRITE_ 0XC004C855 When writing the records of Table type 1
ELEMENT_NE_RECORD elementwise and structure definitions are
present it's only allowed to write the
corresponding element number in each
record
CDBM_E_TABTYPE1_WRITE_ 0XC004C856 When writing the records of Table type 1
ELEMENT_NOT_FOUND with an array and structure definitions are
present it's assumed that a corresponding
element number of this record exist
CDBM_I_TABLE_NAME_EXCEEDS_ 0X4004C857 The Table name exceeds the maximum
RCS_RANGE (Informational) length of RCS compatible Table names
CDBM_W_CUT_STRING 0X8004C858 The string exceeds the maximum length
(Warning) and will be limited to the maximum length
CDBM_I_STRING_TOO_SHORT 0X4004C859 The string is below the minimum length.
(Informational) The minimum length will be reduced.
CDBM_I_STRING_TOO_LONG 0X4004C85A The string is exceeding the maximum. The
(Informational) maximum length will be extended.
CDBM_E_STRING_TOO_SHORT 0XC004C85B The string is below the minimum length.
(Error)
CDBM_E_STRING_TOO_LONG 0XC004C85C The string is exceeding the maximum
(Error) length

Error Codes 335/355

CDBM_E_WRONG_TYPE_ FOR_WRITE 0XC004C85D Writing on the Element type with the given
Data type is not implemented
CDBM_E_NO_APPEND_IN_ 0XC004C85E Method IDbmRecord::AppendData is not
STRUCTURED_RECORDS allowed for structured records
CDBM_E_DATA_UNAVAILABLE 0XC004C85F No data available
CDBM_E_CANT_CONVERT_ INTO 0XC004C860 Unable to convert the value into the
Element type
CDBM_E_DBM_FILE_OVERFLOW 0XC004C861 You try to write a RCS like database which
needs too much bytes
CDBM_E_PW_ERROR 0XC004C862 Password not correct
CDBM_E_FILELENGTH_CORRUPT 0XC004C863 The file length doesn’t correspond to the
length given in the Header.
CDBM_E_STRUCT_TYPE 0XC004C864 Error in the file.
CDBM_E_MD5SUM_INVALID 0XC004C865 MD5 sum invalid
CDBM_E_STRUCT_LENGTH 0XC004C866 Error in the expected and given structure
length at a specific offset in the file.
CDBM_E_APPEND 0XC004C867 Append of data is only allowed if the
Record contains only one data field and
the field type will support this
CDBM_APPEND_NOT_ SUPPORTED 0XC004C868 Append of Data not supported by this filed
type
CDBM_DATA_TYPE_APPEND_ ERROR 0XC004C869 Can't append Data of this type.
CDBM_E_UNSTRUCTURED_TABLE_ 0XC004C86A A Table without structure information
DOESNT_SUPPORT_LENGTH doesn’t support a record length
CDBM_E_DISABLED_WHILE_ 0XC004C86B The Method is disabled while a transaction
TRANSACTION_IS_OPEN is open. Please close this one first and call
the Method again.
CDBM_E_UNABLE_TO_CALL_ 0XC004C86C The Method is disabled on a LinkedList
READ_ON_LINKED_LIST type. Please use the IRecordCollection on
this type.
CDBM_E_ELEMENT_HAS_NO_ 0XC004C86D An Element from a Table has no
SUBSTRUCTURE substructure
CDBM_STRUCT_ERROR_FROM_ 0XC004C86E Error from calling VariantChangeType
VAR_CHANGE_TYPE
CDBM_E_FOREIGNKEY_DEF 0XC004C86F The definition of a FOREIGNKEY must
contain the name of the related Table in
the description and this Table must exist at
this time
CDBM_E_FOREIGNKEY_ REF_TAB 0XC004C870 The description of a FOREIGNKEY must
refer to a Table of type
'eDbmTableTypeLinkedList'
CDBM_E_KEY 0XC004C871 To create a Record Collection with a KEY
it's necessary to have the data type KEY at
the first position in all Records of the
searched Table
CDBM_E_KEY_TABLE_TYPE 0XC004C872 This Method needs a Table of type
'eDbmTableTypeLinkedList'
CDBM_DATATYPE_NOT_ IMPLEMENTED 0XC004C873 This data type is currently not implemented
CDBM_INSERT_POS_NOT_ FOUND 0XC004C874 The position of the Record where the new
one should be inserted wasn’t found
CDBM_E_INSERT_REC_QI 0XC004C875 Error during insertion of a Record
CDBM_E_TAB_PROP 0XC004C876 Invalid Property in Table
CDBM_E_KEY_NOT_FOUND 0XC004C877 The KEY wasn’t found in the Table

Error Codes 336/355

CDBM_E_KEY_INVALID 0XC004C878 The KEY is invalid for this operation
Table 123: ODM Error Codes DBM V4

Appendix 337/355
13 Appendix
13.1 User Rights
User-rights are set within the FDT-container. Depending on the level the
configuration is accessible by the user or read-only.
To access the Settings, Configuration and Diagnosis panes of the
netGateway DTM you do not need special user rights. Also all users can
select the decimal or hexadecimal Display mode or sort table entries.
Note: To edit, set or configure the parameters of the Settings and

Configuration panes, you need user rights for Maintenance, for Planning
Engineer or for Administrator.
The following tables give an overview of the user right groups and which
user rights you need to configure the single parameters.
13.1.1 Settings
Observer Operator Maintenance Planning Adminis-
Engineer trator
Driver D D X X X
Selecting the Driver - - X X X
Device Assignment D D X X X
Scanning for Devices - - X X X
Selecting the Device - - X X X
Table 124: Settings (D = Displaying, X = Editing, Configuring)
13.1.2 Configuration
Observer Operator Maintenance Planning Adminis-
Engineer trator
Settings D D X X X
Signal Mapping D D X X X
Memory Card Management D D X X X
Table 125: Configuration (D = Displaying, X = Editing, Configuring)

Appendix 338/355
13.1 References
References Safety
[S1] ANSI Z535.6-2011 American National Standard for Product Safety Information in
Product Manuals, Instructions, and Other Collateral Materials
[S4] 26514-2010 - IEEE Standard for Adoption of ISO/IEC 26514:2008 Systems and
Software Engineering--Requirements for Designers and Developers of User
Documentation
13.2 Conventions in this Manual
Instructions
1. Operational purpose
2. Operational purpose
 Instruction
Results
 Result
Signs
Sign Note
General note
Important note that must be followed to prevent malfunctions.
Reference to further information
Table 126: Signs
Signal Words
Signal word Description
Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate Injury.
Indicates a property damage message.
Table 127: Signal Words

Appendix 339/355
13.3 Legal Notes
Copyright
© Hilscher Gesellschaft für Systemautomation mbH
All rights reserved.
The images, photographs and texts in the accompanying materials (in the
form of a user's manual, operator's manual, Statement of Work document
and all other document types, support texts, documentation, etc.) are
protected by German and international copyright and by international trade
and protective provisions. Without the prior written consent, you do not
have permission to duplicate them either in full or in part using technical or
mechanical methods (print, photocopy or any other method), to edit them
using electronic systems or to transfer them. You are not permitted to make
changes to copyright notices, markings, trademarks or ownership
declarations. Illustrations are provided without taking the patent situation
into account. Any company names and product designations provided in
this document may be brands or trademarks by the corresponding owner
and may be protected under trademark, brand or patent law. Any form of
further use shall require the express consent from the relevant owner of the
rights.
Important notes
Utmost care was/is given in the preparation of the documentation at hand
consisting of a user's manual, operating manual and any other document
type and accompanying texts. However, errors cannot be ruled out.
Therefore, we cannot assume any guarantee or legal responsibility for
erroneous information or liability of any kind. You are hereby made aware
that descriptions found in the user's manual, the accompanying texts and
the documentation neither represent a guarantee nor any indication on
proper use as stipulated in the agreement or a promised attribute. It cannot
be ruled out that the user's manual, the accompanying texts and the
documentation do not completely match the described attributes, standards
or any other data for the delivered product. A warranty or guarantee with
respect to the correctness or accuracy of the information is not assumed.
We reserve the right to modify our products and the specifications for such
as well as the corresponding documentation in the form of a user's manual,
operating manual and/or any other document types and accompanying
texts at any time and without notice without being required to notify of said
modification. Changes shall be taken into account in future manuals and do
not represent an obligation of any kind, in particular there shall be no right
to have delivered documents revised. The manual delivered with the
product shall apply.
Under no circumstances shall Hilscher Gesellschaft für Systemautomation
mbH be liable for direct, indirect, ancillary or subsequent damage, or for
any loss of income, which may arise after use of the information contained
herein.
Liability disclaimer
The hardware and/or software was created and tested by Hilscher
Gesellschaft für Systemautomation mbH with utmost care and is made
available as is. No warranty can be assumed for the performance or
flawlessness of the hardware and/or software under all application
conditions and scenarios and the work results achieved by the user when

Appendix 340/355
using the hardware and/or software. Liability for any damage that may have
occurred as a result of using the hardware and/or software or the
corresponding documents shall be limited to an event involving willful intent
or a grossly negligent violation of a fundamental contractual obligation.
However, the right to assert damages due to a violation of a fundamental
contractual obligation shall be limited to contract-typical foreseeable
damage.
It is hereby expressly agreed upon in particular that any use or utilization of
the hardware and/or software in connection with
• Flight control systems in aviation and aerospace;
• Nuclear fusion processes in nuclear power plants;
• Medical devices used for life support and
• Vehicle control systems used in passenger transport
shall be excluded. Use of the hardware and/or software in any of the
following areas is strictly prohibited:
• For military purposes or in weaponry;
• For designing, engineering, maintaining or operating nuclear systems;
• In flight safety systems, aviation and flight telecommunications systems;
• In life-support systems;
• In systems in which any malfunction in the hardware and/or software
may result in physical injuries or fatalities.
You are hereby made aware that the hardware and/or software was not
created for use in hazardous environments, which require fail-safe control
mechanisms. Use of the hardware and/or software in this kind of
environment shall be at your own risk; any liability for damage or loss due
to impermissible use shall be excluded.
Warranty
Hilscher Gesellschaft für Systemautomation mbH hereby guarantees that
the software shall run without errors in accordance with the requirements
listed in the specifications and that there were no defects on the date of
acceptance. The warranty period shall be 12 months commencing as of the
date of acceptance or purchase (with express declaration or implied, by
customer's conclusive behavior, e.g. putting into operation permanently).
The warranty obligation for equipment (hardware) we produce is 36
months, calculated as of the date of delivery ex works. The aforementioned
provisions shall not apply if longer warranty periods are mandatory by law
pursuant to Section 438 (1.2) BGB, Section 479 (1) BGB and Section 634a
(1) BGB [Bürgerliches Gesetzbuch; German Civil Code] If, despite of all
due care taken, the delivered product should have a defect, which already
existed at the time of the transfer of risk, it shall be at our discretion to
either repair the product or to deliver a replacement product, subject to
timely notification of defect.
The warranty obligation shall not apply if the notification of defect is not
asserted promptly, if the purchaser or third party has tampered with the
products, if the defect is the result of natural wear, was caused by
unfavorable operating conditions or is due to violations against our
operating regulations or against rules of good electrical engineering
practice, or if our request to return the defective object is not promptly
complied with.

Appendix 341/355
Costs of support, maintenance, customization and product care
Please be advised that any subsequent improvement shall only be free of
charge if a defect is found. Any form of technical support, maintenance and
customization is not a warranty service, but instead shall be charged extra.
Additional guarantees
Although the hardware and software was developed and tested in-depth
with greatest care, Hilscher Gesellschaft für Systemautomation mbH shall
not assume any guarantee for the suitability thereof for any purpose that
was not confirmed in writing. No guarantee can be granted whereby the
hardware and software satisfies your requirements, or the use of the
hardware and/or software is uninterruptable or the hardware and/or
software is fault-free.
It cannot be guaranteed that patents and/or ownership privileges have not
been infringed upon or violated or that the products are free from third-party
influence. No additional guarantees or promises shall be made as to
whether the product is market current, free from deficiency in title, or can be
integrated or is usable for specific purposes, unless such guarantees or
promises are required under existing law and cannot be restricted.
Confidentiality
The customer hereby expressly acknowledges that this document contains
trade secrets, information protected by copyright and other patent and
ownership privileges as well as any related rights of Hilscher Gesellschaft
für Systemautomation mbH. The customer agrees to treat as confidential all
of the information made available to customer by Hilscher Gesellschaft für
Systemautomation mbH and rights, which were disclosed by Hilscher
Gesellschaft für Systemautomation mbH and that were made accessible as
well as the terms and conditions of this agreement itself.
The parties hereby agree to one another that the information that each
party receives from the other party respectively is and shall remain the
intellectual property of said other party, unless provided for otherwise in a
contractual agreement.
The customer must not allow any third party to become knowledgeable of
this expertise and shall only provide knowledge thereof to authorized users
as appropriate and necessary. Companies associated with the customer
shall not be deemed third parties. The customer must obligate authorized
users to confidentiality. The customer should only use the confidential
information in connection with the performances specified in this
agreement.
The customer must not use this confidential information to his own
advantage or for his own purposes or rather to the advantage or for the
purpose of a third party, nor must it be used for commercial purposes and
this confidential information must only be used to the extent provided for in
this agreement or otherwise to the extent as expressly authorized by the
disclosing party in written form. The customer has the right, subject to the
obligation to confidentiality, to disclose the terms and conditions of this
agreement directly to his legal and financial consultants as would be
required for the customer's normal business operation.
Export provisions
The delivered product (including technical data) is subject to the legal
export and/or import laws as well as any associated regulations of various
countries, especially such laws applicable in Germany and in the United
States. The products / hardware / software must not be exported into such
Appendix 342/355
countries for which export is prohibited under US American export control
laws and its supplementary provisions. You hereby agree to strictly follow
the regulations and to yourself be responsible for observing them. You are
hereby made aware that you may be required to obtain governmental
approval to export, reexport or import the product.
13.4 Registered Trademarks

Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1
and Windows® 10 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
CANopen® is a registered trademark of CAN in AUTOMATION -
International Users and Manufacturers Group e.V (CiA), Nürnberg.
CC-Link® and CC-Link IE® are registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation, Tokyo, Japan.
DeviceNet™ and EtherNet/IP™ are trademarks of ODVA (Open DeviceNet
Vendor Association, Inc).
EtherCAT® is a registered trademark and a patented technology of
Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Verl, Germany, formerly Elektro Beckhoff
GmbH.
Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric.
POWERLINK is a registered trademark of B&R, Bernecker + Rainer
Industrie-Elektronik Ges.m.b.H, Eggelsberg, Austria
PROFIBUS® und PROFINET® are registered trademarks of PROFIBUS
International, Karlsruhe.
Sercos and Sercos interface are registered trademarks of Sercos
international e. V., Suessen, Germany.
All other mentioned trademarks are property of their respective legal
owners.

Appendix 343/355
13.5 List of Figures

Figure 1: Dialog Structure of netGateway DTM 11
Figure 2: Navigation Area 12
Figure 3: Status Bar – Status Fields 1 to 6 15
Figure 4: Status Bar Display Examples 15
Figure 5: Insert Gateway Device into the Project 22
Figure 6: Gateway Device in the Project 22
Figure 7: Device Assignment without Device 23
Figure 8: Gateway Protocol Selection (1) 24
Figure 11: Protocol Configuration 27
Figure 13: Gateway Signal Mapping 29
Figure 14: Gateway Signals mapped 31
Figure 15: Select Driver 32
Figure 16: Set IP Address Search Range (1) 33
Figure 18: Select Device 35
Figure 19: Firmware Download 36
Figure 20: Security Question – Save Project 38
Figure 27: Gateway Device with Slave 45
Figure 28: PROFIBUS DP Bus Parameter 46
Figure 29: PROFIBUS DP Slave Station Address 47
Figure 32: Select USB Driver (1) 51
Figure 37: Insert Proxy Device into the Project 58
Figure 38: Proxy Device in the Project 58
Figure 40: Proxy Protocol Selection (1) 60
Figure 41: Proxy Protocol Selection (2) 61
Figure 42: Proxy Device with Slave 62
Figure 44: PROFIBUS DP Slave Station Address 64
Figure 45: PROFINET IO Device Table 65
Figure 46: PROFINET IO Name of Station 66
Figure 54: Insert pre-configured Gateway Device into the Project 75
Figure 55: Pre-configured Gateway Device in Project 75

Appendix 344/355
Figure 56: Protocol conversions 76
Figure 60: Open Port X2 via context menu 80
Figure 61: Configuring PROFINET IO Device at X2 (1) 80
Figure 64: Open Port X3 via context menu 84
Figure 65: PROFINET IO Device Configuration Window 84
Figure 69: Map signals (1) 89
Figure 76: Found Device 95
Figure 82: Open configuration via context menu. 103
Figure 84: Gateway Coupler Variables Configuration Window 104
Figure 85: Define Coupler Variables 105
Figure 86: Configure Clearance of Acyclic Buffers in Case of Error 106
Figure 87: Create User Defined Buffers 107
Figure 88: Open configuration via context menu 108
Figure 89: Configuration dialog CC-Link IE Slave 108
Figure 90: Signal Configuration dialog CC-Link IE Slave 109
Figure 91: Open configuration via context menu 110
Figure 92: Configuration dialog PROFINET Device 110
Figure 93: “General” Configuration dialog PROFINET Device 111
Figure 94: Signal Configuration dialog PROFINET IO Device 112
Figure 95: Select netX Driver 113
Figure 100: Start download via context menu 119
Figure 102: Export GSDML file via context menu 121
Figure 103: Export CSP+ file via context menu 121
Figure 104: Insert Proxy Device into the Project 123
Figure 105: Proxy Device in the Project 123
Figure 106: Proxy Device with Slave 124
Figure 108: PROFINET IO Device Table 127
Figure 109: PROFINET IO Name of Station 128
Figure 110: Select Driver 129

Appendix 345/355
Figure 115: Firmware update 136
Figure 116: Navigation Area - Settings 137
Figure 117: Driver Selection List 138
Figure 118: Driver Selection List - recognized or installed Drivers 138
Figure 119: Driver Selection List - Driver/s selected 138
Figure 120: Navigation Area – Settings 139
Figure 121: netX Driver > USB/RS232 Connection 141
Figure 122: netX Driver > TCP Connection 144
Figure 123: Device Assignment - detected Devices 147
Figure 124: Device Assignment - Selecting the Device 149
Figure 125: Navigation Area – Configuration 150
Figure 126: Settings 151
Figure 127: License Pane 154
Figure 128: License Pane - License Type 155
Figure 129: License Pane – License Type / Master protocols 155
Figure 130: License Pane – License Type / Utilities 155
Figure 131: License Pane - Request Form, please fill out / Device Information 158
Figure 132: License Pane - Request Form, please fill out / License Type 159
Figure 133: License Pane - Request Form, please fill out / Mandatory data 159
Figure 134: License Pane – Selecting the Subsidiary / Ordering / Contacts 160
Figure 135: License Pane – placing the order by E-mail 161
Figure 136: Example: Order E-Mail License request 161
Figure 137: License Pane - placing the order by Fax or by Telephone 162
Figure 138: Example: Order Data Form PrintOrderRequest 162
Figure 139: License Pane – Fax Number of the selected Subsidiary 163
Figure 140: License Pane – Telephone Number of the selected Subsidiary 163
Figure 141: License Pane - Ordering by exported File and E-Mail 164
Figure 142: License Pane - Download License 165
Figure 143: Signal Mapping 167
Figure 144: Status information of the Master 169
Figure 145: Status information of the Slave 169
Figure 146: Pane Command Table 190
Figure 147: Examples - Reading Command with FC 3, Writing Command with FC16 194
Figure 149: Access of the Open Modbus/TCP Client to the netTAP and netBRICK Device 195
Figure 150: PROFINET – PROFIBUS Adress Mapping 210
Figure 151: Pane Command Table 250
Figure 154: Access from the Modbus RTU Master to the netTAP and netBRICK Device 256
Figure 155: Navigation Area - Diagnosis 284
Figure 156: General Diagnosis 285
Figure 157: Firmware Diagnosis (*The name of the Firmware is displayed.) 287
Figure 158: PROFINET – PROFIBUS Address Mapping 290
Figure 159: PROFINET IO – PROFIBUS DP Read/Write Error Detection 292
Figure 160: PROFINET IO- PROFIBUS DP – Alarm Errors 293
Figure 161: Acyclic Gateway Communication 294
Figure 162: Sequence of Acyclic Reading Task 298
Figure 163: Sequence Acyclic Writing Task 300
Figure 164: Acyclic Communication PROFINET IO-Device to Ethernet/IP Scanner 301
Figure 165: Sequence Acyclic Reading Task PROFINET to EtherNet/IP 304
Figure 166: Sequence Acyclic Writing Task PROFINET to EtherNet/IP 310
Figure 167: Acyclic Communication NT 151-CCIES-RE 315
Figure 168: Acyclic Communication via Message Interface Buffer 316
Figure 169: Sequence of Acyclic Communication of PROFINET to CC-Link IE Field 319

Appendix 346/355
Figure 170: Sequence of Acyclic Communication of CC-Link IE Field to PROFINET 321
Figure 171: Acyclic Communication via User Defined Buffers 322

Appendix 347/355
13.6 List of Tables

Table 1: Descriptions Dialog Panes 8
Table 2: List of Revisions 9
Table 3: General Device Information 12
Table 4: Overview Dialog Panes 13
Table 5: OK, Cancel, Apply and Help 14
Table 6: Selecting, inserting, deleting Table Line 14
Table 7: Status Bar Icons [1] 15
Table 8: Abbreviations of the protocols 76
Table 9: Descriptions Settings 137
Table 10: Driver Selection List Parameters 138
Table 11: Parameters netX Driver > USB/RS232 Connection 142
Table 12: Parameters netX Driver > TCP Connection 145
Table 13: Parameters of the Device Assignment 148
Table 14: Descriptions of the Dialog Panes Configuration 150
Table 15: Navigation Area – Configuration – Device-dependent 150
Table 16: Settings 152
Table 17: Communication Change of State 170
Table 18: EtherCAT Slave Parameters 176
Table 19: XML File Names for netTAP and netBRICK 177
Table 20: Identification parameters in EtherCAT XML Files 177
Table 21: EtherNet/IP Adapter Parameters (Part 2) 182
Table 22: EDS File Names for netTAP and netBRICK 183
Table 23: Identification parameters in EtherNet/IP EDS Files 184
Table 24: Open Modbus/TCP Parameters 188
Table 25: Parameter of the Command Table 190
Table 27: Access of the Open Modbus/TCP Client using Modicon-based Addressing (1) 196
Table 28: Access of the Open Modbus/TCP Client using Modicon-based Addressing (2) 196
Table 29: Access of the Open Modbus/TCP Client using Zero-based Addressing (1) 197
Table 30: Access of the Open Modbus/TCP Client using Zero-based Addressing (2) 197
Table 31: Access of the Open Modbus/TCP Client using One-based Addressing (1) 198
Table 32: Access of the Open Modbus/TCP Client using One-based Addressing (2) 198
Table 33: POWERLINK Controlled Node/Slave Parameters 202
Table 34: XDD File Names for netTAP and netBRICK 203
Table 35: Identification parameters in POWERLINK XDD Files 203
Table 36: PROFINET IO-Device Parameters 207
Table 37: GSDML File Names for netTAP and netBRICK 208
Table 38: Identification parameters in GSDML Files 209
Table 39: sercos Slave Parameter 217
Table 40: XML File Names for netTAP and netBRICK 218
Table 41: Default settings in Sercos XML Files 218
Table 42: CANopen Slave Parameters (Part 2) 223
Table 44: CC-Link Slave Parameters (Part 1) 227
Table 45: CC-Link Slave Parameters (Part 2) 228
Table 46: CSP File Names for netTAP 229
Table 47: Network Parameters CC-Link IE Field Slave 231
Table 48: DeviceNet Slave Parameters (Part 1) 235
Table 49: DeviceNet Slave Parameters (Part 2) 236
Table 51: Parameters – PROFIBUS DP Slave (Part 1) 241
Table 52: Parameters – PROFIBUS DP Slave (Part 2) 242
Table 53: PROFIBUS DP Slave (Identifier bytes) 243
Table 54: GSD File Names for netTAP and netBRICK 244
Table 55: Modbus RTU Parameters 248

Appendix 348/355
Table 58: Access from the Modbus RTU Master using Modicon-based Addressing (1) 257
Table 59: Access from the Modbus RTU Master using Modicon-based Addressing (2) 257
Table 60: Access from the Modbus RTU Master using Zero-based Addressing (1) 258
Table 61: Access from the Modbus RTU Master using Zero-based Addressing (2) 258
Table 62: Access from the Modbus RTU Master using One-based Addressing (1) 259
Table 63: Access from the Modbus RTU Master using One-based Addressing (2) 259
Table 64: 3964R Parameter (Part 1) 261
Table 65: 3964R Parameter (Part 2) 262
Table 66: ASCII Parameter 266
Table 67: ASCII Telegram Structure Example 267
Table 68: Telegram Structure 269
Table 69: Parameter Types 269
Table 70: ASCII Character Table 270
Table 71: Size of the Send and Receive Buffer 271
Table 72: Timing Parameters for the Operating ‘Send Only’ Mode 272
Table 73: Telegram Structure for the Operating ‘Send Only’ Mode 273
Table 74: Timing Parameters for the Operating ‘Receive Only’ Mode 274
Table 75: Telegram Structure for the Operating ‘Receive Only’ Mode 275
Table 76: Timing Parameters for the Operating Mode 'Client Mode' 277
Table 77: Telegram Structure for the Operating Mode 'Client Mode' 278
Table 78: Timing Parameters for the Operating Mode 'Server Mode' 279
Table 79: Telegram Structure Parameters for the Operating Mode 'Server Mode' 280
Table 80: netSCRIPT Settings 282
Table 81: Explanations to the Dialog Pane Signal Configuration 283
Table 82: Descriptions of the Diagnosis Panes 284
Table 83: Indication General Diagnosis 286
Table 84: Parameter General Diagnosis 286
Table 85: Description Table Task Information 287
Table 86: Proxy Devices with Acyclic Communication 290
Table 87: PROFINET IO - PROFIBUS; Address Mapping of acyclic Data 291
Table 88: PROFINET IO – PROFIBUS DP; Error Codes 292
Table 89: PROFINET IO - PRPFIBUS; Mapping of Alarms 293
Table 90: Acyclic Communication of Gateway Devices 294
Table 91: Request States in Acyclic Communication 296
Table 92: Elements of WRREC for Reading Task 305
Table 93: Elements of RDREC for Status Register 305
Table 94: Elements RDREC Reply from Status Register 306
Table 95: Elements of RDREC for Message Record 306
Table 96: Elements of RDREC REPLY from Message Record 306
Table 97: Example of WRREC for a Reading Task 307
Table 98: Example of RDREC to Status Register 307
Table 99: Example of RDREC REPLY from Status Register in Case of an Unfinished Reading Task 307
Table 100: Example of RDREC REPLY from Status Register in Case of a Finished Reading Task 307
Table 101: Example of RDREC to Message Record 308
Table 102: Example of RDREC REPLY from Message Record 308
Table 103: Elements of WRREC for Writing Task 311
Table 104: Elements of RDREC for Status Register 311
Table 105: Elements RDREC Reply from Status Register 312
Table 106: Elements of RDREC for Message Record 312
Table 107: Elements of RDREC REPLY from Message Record 312
Table 108: Example of WRREC for a Writing Task 313
Table 109: Example of RDREC to Status Register 313
Table 110: Example of RDREC REPLY from Status Register in Case of an Unfinished Writing Task 313
Table 111: Example of RDREC REPLY from Status Register in Case of a Finished Writing Task 313
Table 112: Example of RDREC to Message Record 314

Appendix 349/355
Table 113: Example of RDREC REPLY from Message Record 314
Table 114: PNIO Error Codes WRREC and RDREC 314
Table 115: Cyclic State Reports of Acyclic Buffers for PROFINET 317
Table 116: Cyclic State Reports of Acyclic Buffers for CC-Link IE Field 317
Table 117: PROFINET Input Process Image 324
Table 118: CC-Link IE Field Master Input Process Image 326
Table 119: Overview Error Codes and Ranges 327
Table 120: ODM Error Codes - General ODM Error Codes 328
Table 121: ODM Error Codes - General ODM Driver Error Codes 328
Table 122: cifX Driver Specific ODM Error Codes 331
Table 123: ODM Error Codes DBM V4 336
Table 124: Settings (D = Displaying, X = Editing, Configuring) 337
Table 125: Configuration (D = Displaying, X = Editing, Configuring) 337
Table 126: Signs 338
Table 127: Signal Words 338

Appendix 350/355
13.7 Glossary
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation is a feature of an interface: An interface with Auto-
Negotiation will automatically determine a set of correct communication
parameters.
Baud rate
Data transmission speed of a communication channel or interface.
Coil
A coil (in the meaning defined by Modbus terminology) is a single bit in
memory that can be accessed (i.e. read or write) via Modbus.
cifX
Communication InterFace based on netX
CSP
electronic device data sheet, required for each CC-Link device
A file containing configuration information about a device being a part of a
network that can be read out by masters for system configuration. Device
Description Files use various formats which depend on the communication
system. Often these formats are based on XML such as EDS_files or
GSDML_files. Contains configuration information
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
This is a protocol simplifying the configuration of IP networks by
automatically assigning IP addresses.
DPM
Dual-Port Memory
DTM
Device Type Manager
The Device Type Manager (DTM) is a software module with graphical user
interface for the configuration and/or for diagnosis of devices.
EDS
Electronic Data Sheet
XML based device description file.
EDS file
A special kind of Device Description File used by EtherNet/IP.
EtherCAT
A communication system for industrial Ethernet designed and developed by
Beckhoff Automation GmbH.
EtherNet/IP
Rockwell. It partly uses the CIP (Common Industrial Protocol).

Appendix 351/355
EtherNet/IP Scanner
A Scanner exchanges real-time I/O data with Adapters and Scanners. This
type of node can respond to connection requests and can also initiate
connections on its own.
EtherNet/IP Adapter
An Adapter emulates functions provided by traditional rack-adapter
products. This type of node exchanges real-time I/O data with a Scanner
Class product. It does not initiate connections on its own.
Ethernet POWERLINK
B&R. It partly uses CANopen technologies.
FDT
Field Device Tool
FDT specifies an interface, in order to be able to use DTM (Device Type
Manager) in different applications of different manufacturers.
Full duplex
Full duplex denominates a telecommunication system between two
communication partners which allows simultaneous communication in both
directions is called a full-duplex telecommunication system. At such a
system, it is possible to transmit data even if currently data are received.
Full-duplex is the opposite of Half_duplex.
Function code
A function code (in the meaning defined by Modbus terminology) is a
standardized method to access (i.e. read or write) coils or registers via
Modbus.
Gateway
A device interfacing between two different communication standards.
GSD
Generic Station Description, Device description file
GSD file
A special kind of Device Description File used by PROFIBUS (GSD =
Generic Station Description).
GSDML
Generic Station Description Markup Language
XML based device description file.
GSDML file
A special kind of XML-based Device Description File used by PROFINET.
Half duplex
Half duplex denominates a telecommunication system between two
communication partners which does not allow simultaneous, but
alternating, communication in both directions is called a half-duplex
telecommunication system. At such a system, receiving data inhibits the
transmission of data. Half-duplex is the opposite of _Full_duplex.

Appendix 352/355
Hub
A network component connecting multiple communication partners with
each other. A hub does not provide own intelligence, thus it does not
analyze the data traffic and sends received data to all connected
communication partners. A hub can be used for setting up a star topology.
Industrial Ethernet
See Real-Time Ethernet
Master
Master devices initiate the data traffic on the bus. In the communication
protocol Master devices are called active participants. A master may send
messages without external request.
netX
networX on chip, next generation of communication controllers
Object Dictionary
An object dictionary is a storage area for device parameter data structures.
It is accessed in standardized manner.
ODMV3
The Online-Data-Manager Version 3 (ODMV3) is an application interface.
The ODMV3 works as a server, which can be run as an out-proc server or
system service. Its task is to provide different applications (e. g.
SYCON.net), access to multiple devices and even share one device
amongst several applications.
Open Modbus/TCP
A communication system for Industrial Ethernet designed and developed by
Schneider Automation and maintained by the Modbus-IDA organization
based on the Modbus protocols for serial communication.
PROFINET
A communication system for Industrial Ethernet designed and developed by
PROFIBUS International. It uses some mechanisms similar to those of the
PROFIBUS field bus.
PROFINET IO Controller
A PROFINET control unit responsible for the defined run-up of an I/O
subsystem and the cyclic or acyclic data exchange.
PROFINET IO Device
A PROFINET field device that cyclically receives output data from its IO-
Controller and responds with its input data.
RE
RE stands for Real Time Ethernet
Real-Time Ethernet
Real-Time Ethernet (Industrial Ethernet) is an extension of the Ethernet
networking technology for industrial purposes with very good Real-Time
features and performance. There is a variety of different Real-Time
Ethernet systems on the market which are incompatible with each other.
The most important systems of these are
• EtherCAT

Appendix 353/355
• EtherNet/IP
• Ethernet POWERLINK
• Open Modbus/TCP
• PROFINET
• Sercos
• VARAN
Register
A register (in the meaning defined by Modbus terminology) is a 16-bit wide
storage area for data which can be accessed and addressed as a unit by
some of the Modbus Function Codes.
Sercos
Bosch-Rexroth and supported by Sercos International.
Slave
Slave devices are peripheral devices, like for example I/O devices or
drives. Slave devices are also called passive participants. They do not
receive the bus access authorization. That means, they may only accept
received messages from the Master or send a message to the Master after
enquiry of the Master.
Switch
A network component connecting multiple communication partners (or even
entire branches of a network) with each other. A switch is an intelligent
network component which analyzes network traffic in order to decide on its
own. For the connected communication partners a switch behaves
transparently.
SYNC
Sychronisation cycle of the master
TCP/IP
Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol connection-orientated, secure
transfer protocol as basis for the Internet-protocols
VARAN
Versatile Automation Random Access Network
A communication system for industrial Ethernet based on the DIAS-BUS
developed by Sigmatek. The system is supported by the VARAN-BUS-
NUTZERORGANISATION (VNO).
Watchdog Timer
A watchdog timer provides an internal supervision mechanism of a
communication system. It supervises that an important event happens
within a given timeframe (the watchdog time which can be adjusted
accordingly, for instance by a parameter in the _Warmstart message) and
causes an alarm otherwise (usually this is accomplished by changing the
operational state of the communication system to a more safe state).
XDD file
A special kind of Device Description file used by Ethernet POWERLINK.

Appendix 354/355
XML
XML means Extended Markup Language. It is a symbolic language for
structuring data systematically. XML is standard maintained by the W3C
(World-wide web consortium). Device Description Files often use XML-
based formats for storing the device-related data appropriately.

Appendix 355/355
13.8 Contacts
Headquarters
Germany
Hilscher Gesellschaft für
Systemautomation mbH
Rheinstrasse 15
65795 Hattersheim
Phone: +49 (0) 6190 9907-0
Fax: +49 (0) 6190 9907-50
E-Mail: [email protected]
Support
Phone: +49 (0) 6190 9907-99
E-Mail: [email protected]
Subsidiaries
China Japan
Hilscher Systemautomation (Shanghai) Co. Ltd. Hilscher Japan KK
200010 Shanghai Tokyo, 160-0022
Phone: +86 (0) 21-6355-5161 Phone: +81 (0) 3-5362-0521
E-Mail: [email protected] E-Mail: [email protected]
Support Support
Phone: +86 (0) 21-6355-5161 Phone: +81 (0) 3-5362-0521
France Korea
Hilscher France S.a.r.l. Hilscher Korea Inc.
69500 Bron Seongnam, Gyeonggi, 463-400
Phone: +33 (0) 4 72 37 98 40 Phone: +82 (0) 31-789-3715
Support
Phone: +33 (0) 4 72 37 98 40 Switzerland
E-Mail: [email protected] Hilscher Swiss GmbH
4500 Solothurn
India Phone: +41 (0) 32 623 6633
Hilscher India Pvt. Ltd. E-Mail: [email protected]
Pune, Delhi, Mumbai Support
Phone: +91 8888 750 777 Phone: +49 (0) 6190 9907-99
Italy USA
Hilscher Italia S.r.l. Hilscher North America, Inc.
20090 Vimodrone (MI) Lisle, IL 60532
Phone: +39 02 25007068 Phone: +1 630-505-5301
Support Support
Phone: +39 02 25007068 Phone: +1 630-505-5301


Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices OI 12 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices OI 12 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices OI 12 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instruction Manual

Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices

Hilscher Gesellschaft für Systemautomation mbH

3 CONFIGURATION SEQUENCE FOR GATEWAY AND PROXY .............................. 20

Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices | netTAP, netBRICK and netLINK

4 SETTINGS .............................................................................................................. 137

5 CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 150

Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices | netTAP, netBRICK and netLINK

6 DIAGNOSIS ............................................................................................................ 284

Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices | netTAP, netBRICK and netLINK

7 ONLINE FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................. 288

8 ACYCLIC COMMUNICATION OF PROXY DEVICES ............................................. 290

9 ACYCLIC COMMUNICATION OF GATEWAY DEVICES ....................................... 294

10 ACYCLIC COMMUNICATION OF NT 151-CCIES-RE ............................................ 315

11 DIAGNOSIS AND STATUS MESSAGES OF NT 151-CCIES-RE ........................... 323

12 ERROR CODES ...................................................................................................... 327

13 APPENDIX .............................................................................................................. 337

Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices | netTAP, netBRICK and netLINK

Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices | netTAP, netBRICK and netLINK

Section Subsection Page

Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices | netTAP, netBRICK and netLINK

1.1.1 Online Help

1.1.2 List of Revisions

Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices | netTAP, netBRICK and netLINK

1.2 About netGateway DTM

Note: If the project file is used on a further PC,

Requirements netGateway DTM

Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices | netTAP, netBRICK and netLINK

For more information on the hardware installation, please refer to the

1.3 Dialog Structure of the netGateway DTM

Figure 1: Dialog Structure of netGateway DTM

Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices | netTAP, netBRICK and netLINK

1.3.1 General Device Information

1.3.2 Navigation Area

Figure 2: Navigation Area

 Select the required folder and subfolder.

Hide / display Navigation

Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices | netTAP, netBRICK and netLINK

1.3.3 Dialog Panes

Note: Accessing the Diagnosis panes of the netGateway DTM requires

For further information, refer to section Connecting/Disconnecting Device

Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices | netTAP, netBRICK and netLINK

1.3.4 OK, Cancel, Apply and Help

1.3.5 Table Lines

To select the previous line of a table use Previous Line.

To select the next line of a table use Next Line.

To select the last line of a table use Last Line.

Create a new Line inserts new lines into the table.

Table 6: Selecting, inserting, deleting Table Line

Configuration of Gateway and Proxy Devices | netTAP, netBRICK and netLINK

1.3.6 Status Bar

Figure 3: Status Bar – Status Fields 1 to 6

Status Icon / Meaning

Disconnected: Icon opened = Device is offline

2 Data Source States

3 States of the instance Date Set

4 Changes directly made on the Device

6 Device Diagnosis Status

Online State and